Standard Tender Document

KENYA PORTS AUTHORITY
TENDER NO. KPA/169/2010-11/EE

UPGRADING OF
INCOMING POWER FROM 11KV TO 132KV -
SUPPLY, INSTALLATION AND
COMMISSIONING OF 132KV/11KV
SUBSTATION AND ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT

TENDER DOCUMENT

June 2011

KPA/169/2010-11EE PROPOSED UPGRADI NG OF I NCOMI NG POWER FROM 11KV TO 132 KV Page 2 of 270

2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS........................................................................................... 2
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS .................................................................. 4
SECTION I: INVITATION FOR TENDERS (IFT) .................................................. 5
VISION, MISSION, & CORE VALUES ..................................................................... 7
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT POLICY STATEMENT .............. 8
SECTION II: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS (ITT) ................................... 9
1. Scope of Tender ................................................................................................. 10
2. Source of Funds ................................................................................................ 10
3. Eligible Tenderers ............................................................................................. 10
4. One Tender per Tenderer ............................................................................... 11
5. Alternative Tenders by Tenderers ............................................................... 11
6. Cost of Tendering .............................................................................................. 11
7. Site Visit and Pre-Tender Meeting............................................................... 11
A. Tendering Documents ............................................................................ 12
8. Content of Tendering Documents ............................................................... 12
9. Clarification of Tendering Documents ....................................................... 13
10. Amendments of the Tendering Documents .............................................. 13
B. Preparation of Tenders .......................................................................... 13
11. Language of Tender .......................................................................................... 13
12. Documents Constituting the Tender .......................................................... 13
13. Documents Establishing Eligibility and Qualifications of the
Tenderer ....................................................................................................................... 14
14. Form of Tender .................................................................................................. 15
15. Tender Prices ..................................................................................................... 15
16. Tender Currencies ............................................................................................ 15
17. Tender Validity Period ..................................................................................... 15
18. Tender Security and Tender Securing Declaration ............................... 16
19. Format and Signing of Tender ...................................................................... 17
C. Submission of Tenders .......................................................................... 17
20. Sealing and Marking of Tenders .................................................................. 17
21. Deadline for Submission of Tenders .......................................................... 18
22. Late Tenders ....................................................................................................... 18
23. Modification, Substitution and Withdrawal of Tenders ....................... 18
D. Opening and Evaluation of Tenders .................................................. 19
24. Opening of Tenders .......................................................................................... 19
25. Confidentiality ................................................................................................... 19
26. Clarification of Tenders .................................................................................. 20
27. Preliminary Examination of Tenders .......................................................... 20
28. Correction of Errors ......................................................................................... 21
29. Conversion to Single Currency..................................................................... 21
30. Comparison of Tenders ................................................................................... 21
31. National Preference .......................................................................................... 22
32. Determination of the winning evaluated Tender .................................... 22
33. Post-qualification of Tenderer ...................................................................... 22
E. Award of Contract ................................................................................... 22
34. Criteria of Award ............................................................................................... 22
35. Clarifications ...................................................................................................... 22
36. Procuring Entitys Right to Accept any Tender and to Reject any or
all Tenders ................................................................................................................... 23


3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
37. Procuring Entities Right to Vary Quantities at the Time of Award .. 23
38. Notification of Award ....................................................................................... 23
39. Signing of Contract .......................................................................................... 23
40. Performance Security ...................................................................................... 24
41. Advance Payment ............................................................................................. 24
42. Adjudicator ......................................................................................................... 24
F. Review of Procurement Decisions ...................................................... 24
43. Right to Review .................................................................................................. 24
44. Time Limit on Review ...................................................................................... 25
45. Submission of Applications for Review by the Public Procurement
Administrative Review Board ................................................................................ 25
46. Decision by the Public Procurement Administrative Review Board . 25
47. Appeal on the decision of the Review Board ............................................ 25
SECTION III: TENDER DATA SHEET ............................................................ 26
SECTION IV: GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ............................ 36
PART I GENERAL CONDITIONS .................................................................... 37
PREAMBLE TO GENERAL CONDITIONS .......................................................... 38
PART II SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ...................................... 41
SECTION V: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 44
SECTION VII: DRAWINGS ............................................................................... 235
SECTION VIII: BILLS OF QUANTITIES ....................................................... 241
SECTION IX: TENDER FORMS ..................................................................... 249
A. Form of Tender ....................................................................................... 250
B. Tender-Securing Declaration (Mandatory) .................................... 254
C. Confidential Business Questionnaire ............................................. 255
ntegrity Declaration ......................................................................................... 258
D. Letter of Acceptance ............................................................................. 260
E. Contract Data Sheet ............................................................................. 261
SECTION X: FORMS OF SECURITY ............................................................ 265
A. Tender Security (Bank or Insurance Guarantee) ........................ 266
B. Performance Bank or Insurance Guarantee [Unconditional] . 267
C. Bank or Insurance Guarantee for Advance Payment ................ 268
SECTION XI: APPLICATION TO PUBLIC PROCUREMENT
ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD ....................................................... 269


4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

CDS Contract Data Sheet
GCC General Conditions of Contract
IFT Invitation for Tender
ITT Instruction to Tenderers
PE Procuring Entity
PM Project Manager
PPDA 2005 Public Procurement and Disposal Act, 2005
PPDR 2006 Public Procurement and Disposal Regulations, 2006
PPOA Public Procurement Oversight Authority
STD Standard Tender Documents
SOR Statement of Requirements
SP Service Provider
TDS Tender Data Sheet
VAT Value Added Tax


5 SECTION I: INVITATION FOR TENDERS (IFT)

SECTION I: INVITATION FOR TENDERS (IFT)


6 SECTION I: INVITATION FOR TENDERS (IFT)
Invitation for Tenders
Tender No.KPA/169/2010-11/EE
Tender Name: UPGRADING OF INCOMING POWER FROM 11KV TO 132KV - SUPPLY, INSTALLATION
AND COMMISSIONING OF 132kV/11kV SUBSTATION AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
June 2011
1.1 The Kenya Ports Authority now invites sealed tenders from eligible suppliers of high voltage electrical switchgear
and electrical contractors registered with Ministry of Energys ERC Class A for carrying out the proposed
UPGRADING OF INCOMING POWER FROM 11KV TO 132KV - SUPPLY, INSTALLATION AND
COMMISSIONING OF 132kV/11kV SUBSTATION AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
1.2 The Procuring Entity has set aside funds for use during the financial year(s) [2010-11-12]. It is intended that part
of the proceeds of the fund will be used to cover eligible payments under the contract for the PROPOSED
UPGRADING OF INCOMING POWER FROM 11KV TO 132KV -SUPPLY, INSTALLATION AND
COMMISSIONING OF 132kV/11kV SUBSTATION AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
1.3 Tendering will be conducted through the National Competitive (NCB) Bidding procedures specified in the Public
Procurement and Disposal Act, 2005 and the Public Procurement and Disposal Regulations, 2006 and is open to all
Tenderers as defined in the Regulations.
1.4 Interested eligible Tenderers may obtain further information from and inspect the Tendering Documents at the
offices of the Procurement & Supplies Manager located on the 4th floor of office Block 3 at the Kenya Ports
Authority Headquarters, Kilindini Kipevu from MONDAY TO FRIDAY (BETWEEN 0800 HOURS AND 1600
HOURS inclusive) except on public holidays.
1.5 A complete set of tender documents may be obtained by interested candidates upon payment of non-refundable
fees of KShs.5, 000.00 in the form of a Bankers Cheque payable to Kenya Ports Authority. The document can also
be viewed and downloaded from the website www.kpa.co.ke and payment evidence MUST be submitted with
the tender document. Bidders who download the tender document from the website must forward their particulars
immediately for records and communication of any further tender clarifications or addenda and will be required to
pay a discounted fee of Kshs 3,000. Enquiries can be made via email address: ctcsecretary@kpa.co.ke fax
number +25422 2226721.
1.6 There shall be a pre-planned site visit on Thursday, 23nd June, 2011 starting from 1000 Hours. Interested
and eligible candidates shall be required to gather at the Conference room on the 6
th
floor of Kipevu Block III HQ
at 1000 Hours. All bidders shall be required to sign an attendance register as evidence of having participated in the
site visit. Bidders who shall not turn up for the pre planned site visit shall make their own arrangements to visit
the site.
1.7 All Tenders in one original plus [two-2 copies], properly filled in, and enclosed in plain envelopes must be
delivered to the address below:
Tender Box No. 7 located at the BUS TERMINUS, PORT MAIN PEDESTRIAN GATE NO.8,
KILINDINI, MOMBASA BEFORE 0900 HOURS ON TUESDAY, 26
TH
JULY, 2011

Bulky tenders shall be submitted at the office of Procurement & Supplies Manager located on the 4th floor
of office Block III at the Kenya Ports Authority Headquarters, Kipevu, Kilindini Mombasa.
1.8 Tenders will be opened promptly thereafter in the presence of Tenderers representatives who choose to attend the
opening at the New Conference Room, 6
th
Floor Finance Block III Kipevu Headquarters, Kenya Ports Authority,
Mombasa.
1.9 Late Tenders, incomplete Tenders, Tenders not opened at the Tender opening ceremony shall not be accepted for
evaluation irrespective of the circumstances.
1.10 Canvassing or lobbying for the tender shall lead to automatic disqualification.

Yobesh Oyaro
PROCUREMENT AND SUPPLIES MANAGER


7

VISION, MISSION, & CORE VALUES

Vision
World class seaports of choice.
Mission
To facilitate and promote global maritime trade through the provision of competitive port services.
Values
Customer Focus: Service excellence is key to our operations and we endeavour to exceed customer
expectations.
Integrity: We uphold fairness, honesty, professionalism and transparency in all our undertakings.
Teamwork: We embrace team spirit in all that we do.
We Care: We care for our staff, the communities around us and are sensitive to the environment.


8

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT POLICY STATEMENT

The Kenya Ports Authority recognizes and appreciates the importance of Health, Safety and
Environment in the organization.

The Authority therefore places Health, Safety and Environment matters as important Boardroom
Agenda.

To translate this commitment into actions, the Authority shall adopt a health, safety and
environment policy that shall ensure:
1. Compliance with all relevant statutory instruments in all matters of Health, Safety and
Environment.
2. Appropriate consideration of relevant international conventions and recommendations.
3. Formulation and compliance with rules, regulations and guidelines on matters of Health,
Safety and Environment.
4. All reasonably practicable precautions are taken to safeguard the safety and health of all
employees and Port users.
5. Appropriate systems for providing adequate information and instructions to all cadres of
employees on risks to their health and safety are in place.
6. That all work places and equipment/plant are safe and regularly inspected.
7. All employees and Port Users assume defined responsibilities in matters of health, safety and
environment in conformity with this policy.
8. Appropriate training for all employees to enhance their performance is provided.
9. That all Suppliers comply with Health, Safety and Environment rules, regulations and
guidelines.
10. Adequate provision for prevention and control of fires and proper use of Fire fighting
appliances.
11. Adequate provision for prevention and control of environmental pollution.
12. That Environmental Impact Assessment is carried out for all projects likely to have an impact
on the environment.
13. Provision and promotion of First Aid services and activities.
14. Contravention of the Health, Safety and Environment Management System attracts severe
disciplinary action including dismissal and/or prosecution.
15. Review of the Health, Safety and Environment Management System to conform to changing
trends.

(Signed)
GICHIRI NDUA
MANAGING DIRECTOR


9 SECTION II: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS (ITT)

SECTION II: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS (ITT)


Introduction

1. Scope of
Tender
1.1 The Procuring Entity indicated in the Tender Data Sheet (TDS) invites
Tenders for the construction of works as specified in the Tender Data
Sheet and Sections V (Technical Specifications) and VII (Drawings).
1.2 The successful Tenderer will be expected to complete the works by the
required completion date specified in the Tender Data Sheet.
1.3 The objectives of the works are listed in the Tender Data Sheet. These
are mandatory requirements. Any subsequent detail is offered to
support these objectives and must not be used to dilute their
importance.
2. Source of
Funds
2.2 Payments will be made directly by the Procuring Entity (or by financing
institution specified in the Tender Data Sheet upon request of the
Procuring Entity to so pay) and will be subject in all respects to the
terms and conditions of the resulting contract placed by the Procuring
Entity.
3. Eligible
Tenderers
3.1 A Tenderer may be a natural person, private or public company,
government-owned institution, subject to sub-Clause 3.4 or any
combination of them with a formal intent to enter into an agreement or
under an existing agreement in the form of a joint venture, consortium,
or association. In the case of a joint venture, consortium, or
association, unless otherwise specified in the Tender Data Sheet, all
parties shall be jointly and severally liable.
3.2 The Invitation for Tenders is open to all suppliers as defined in the
Public Procurement and Disposal Act, 2005 and the Public
Procurement and Disposal Regulations, 2006 except as provided
hereinafter.
3.3 A Tenderer shall not have a conflict of interest. All Tenderers found to
have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A Tenderer may be
considered to have a conflict of interest with one or more parties in this
Tendering process, if they:
a) Are associated or have been associated in the past directly or
indirectly with employees or agents of the Procuring Entity or a
member of a board or committee of the Procuring Entity;
b) Are associated or have been associated in the past, directly or
indirectly with a firm or any of its affiliates which have been
engaged by the Procuring Entity to provide consulting services for
the preparation of the design, specifications and other documents
to be used for the procurement of the works under this Invitation
for Tenders;
c) Have controlling shareholders in common; or
d) Receive or have received any direct or indirect subsidy from any of
them; or
e) Have the same legal representative for purposes of this Tender; or
f) Have a relationship with each other, directly or through common
third parties, that puts them in a position to have access to
information about or influence on the Tender of another Tenderer,
or influence the decisions of the Procuring Entity regarding this
Tendering process; or
g) Submit more than one Tender in this Tendering process. However,
this does not limit the participation of subcontractors in more than
one Tender, or as Tenderer and subcontractor simultaneously.
3.4 A Tenderer will be considered to have a conflict of interest if they


participated as a consultant in the preparation of the design or
technical specification of the project and related services that are the
subject of the Tender.
3.5 Tenderers shall not be under a declaration of ineligibility for corrupt
and fraudulent practices issued by the Government of Kenya in
accordance with GCC sub-Clause 3.2.
3.6 Government owned enterprises in Kenya may participate only if they
are legally and financially autonomous, if they operate under
commercial law, are registered by the relevant registration board or
authorities and if they are not a dependent agency of the Government.
3.7 Tenderers shall provide such evidence of their continued eligibility
satisfactory to the Procuring Entity, as the Procuring Entity shall
reasonably request.
4. One Tender
per Tenderer
4.1 A firm shall submit only one Tender, in the same Tendering process,
either individually as a Tenderer or as a partner in a joint venture
pursuant to ITT Clause 5.
4.2 No firm can be a subcontractor while submitting a Tender individually
or as a partner of a joint venture in the same Tendering process.
4.3 A firm, if acting in the capacity of subcontractor in any Tender, may
participate in more than one Tender but only in that capacity.
4.4 A Tenderer who submits or participates in more than one Tender (other
than as a subcontractor or in cases of alternatives that have been
permitted or requested) will cause all the Tenders in which the
Tenderer has participated to be disqualified.
5. Alternative
Tenders by
Tenderers
5.1 Tenderers shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the
Tendering documents, including the basic Tenderers technical design
as indicated in the specifications and Drawings and Bill of Quantities.
Alternatives will not be considered, unless specifically allowed for in
the Tender Data Sheet. If so allowed, sub-Clause 5.2 and 5.3 shall
govern.
5.2 When alternative times for completion are explicitly invited, a
statement to that effect will be included in the Tender Data Sheet as
will the method of evaluating different times for completion.
5.3 If so allowed in the Tender Data Sheet, Tenderers wishing to offer
technical alternatives to the requirements of the Tendering documents
must also submit a Tender that complies with the requirements of the
Tendering documents, including the basic technical design as
indicated in the specifications. In addition to submitting the basic
Tender, the Tenderer shall provide all information necessary for a
complete evaluation of the alternative by the Procuring Entity,
including technical specifications, breakdown of prices, and other
relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the winning
evaluated tenderer conforming to the basic technical requirements
shall be considered by the Procuring Entity.
6. Cost of
Tendering
6.1 The Tenderer shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and
submission of its Tender, and the Procuring Entity shall in no case be
responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or
outcome of the Tendering process.
7. Site Visit and
Pre-Tender
Meeting
7.1 The Tenderer, at the Tenderers own responsibility and risk, is advised
to visit and examine the Site of Works and its surroundings and obtain
all information that may be necessary for preparing the Tender and
entering into a contract for construction of the Works. The costs of
visiting the Site shall be at the Tenderers own expense.


7.2 The Procuring Entity may conduct a site visit and a pre-Tender
meeting. The purpose of the pre-Tender meeting will be to clarify issues
and to answer questions on any matter that may be raised at that
stage.
7.3 The Tenderers designated representative is invited to attend a site visit
and pre-Tender meeting which, if convened, will take place at the
venue and time stipulated in the Tender Data Sheet.
7.4 The Tenderer is requested as far as possible, to submit any questions
in writing or by electronic means to reach the procuring Entity before
the pre-Tender meeting. It may not be practicable at the meeting to
answer all questions, but questions and responses will be transmitted
in accordance with sub-Clause 7.5.
7.5 Minutes of the pre-Tender meeting, including the text of the questions
raised and the responses given together with any responses prepared
after the pre-Tender meeting will be transmitted within the time stated
in the Tender Data Sheet to all purchasers of the Tendering
documents. Any modification of the Tendering documents listed in
sub-Clause 8.1 that may become necessary as a result of the pre-
Tender meeting shall be made by the Procuring Entity exclusively
through the issue of an Addendum pursuant to ITT sub Clause 10.2
and not through the minutes of the pre-Tender meeting.
7.6 Non attendance during the site visit or pre-Tender meeting will not be
a cause for disqualification of a Tenderer unless specified to the
contrary in the Tender Data Sheet.
A. Tendering Documents
8. Content of
Tendering
Documents
8.1
The works required, Tendering procedures, and contract terms are
prescribed in the Tendering Documents. In addition to the Section
I Invitation for Tenders, Tendering documents which should be read
in conjunction with any addenda issued in accordance with ITT sub
Clause 10.2 include:
Section II Instructions to Tenderers
Section III Tender Data Sheet
Section IV General Conditions of Contract
Section V Technical Specifications
Section VII Drawings
Section VIII Bill of Quantities
Section IX Forms of Tender
Form of Tender
Appendix to Tender
Confidential Business Questionnaire
Integrity Declaration
Letter of Acceptance
Contract Data Sheet
Section X Forms of Security
Tender Security Form
Tender Securing Declaration
Performance Bank or Insurance Guarantee
Advance Payment Guarantee
Section XI Form RB 1 Application to Public Procurement
Administrative Review Board

8.2 The number of copies to be completed and returned with the Tender
is specified in the Tender Data Sheet.
8.3 The Invitation for Tenders (Section I) issued by the Procuring Entity


is not part of the Tendering Documents and is included for reference
purposes only. In case of discrepancies between the Invitation for
Tenders and the Tendering Documents listed in sub-Clause 8.1
above, the said Tendering Documents will take precedence.
8.4 The Procuring Entity is not responsible for the completeness of the
Tendering Documents and their addenda, if they were not obtained
directly from the authorized staff of the Procuring Entity.
8.5 The Tenderer is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms
and specifications in the Tendering documents. Failure to furnish all
information required by the Tendering Documents or to submit a
Tender substantially responsive to the Tendering documents in every
respect will be at the Tenderers risk and may result in the rejection
of its Tender.
9. Clarification
of Tendering
Documents
9.1 A prospective Tenderer requiring any clarification of the Tendering
documents may notify the Procuring Entity in writing, e-mail or
facsimile at the Procuring Entity's address indicated in the Tender
Data Sheet.
9.2 The Procuring Entity will within the period stated in the Tender Data
Sheet respond in writing to any request for clarification provided
that such request is received no later than the period indicated in the
Tender Data Sheet prior to the deadline for the submission of
Tenders prescribed in sub-Clause 22.1.
9.3 Copies of the procuring entity's response will be forwarded to all
Purchasers of the Tendering documents, including a description of
the inquiry, but without identifying its source.
9.4 Should the Procuring Entity deem it necessary to amend the
Tendering documents as a result of a clarification, it shall do so
following the procedure under ITT Clause 10.
10. Amendments
of the
Tendering
Documents
10.1 Before the deadline for submission of Tenders, the Procuring Entity
may, for any reason, whether at its own initiative or in response to a
clarification requested by a prospective Tenderer, modify the
Tendering documents by issuing addenda.
10.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Tender documents
pursuant to sub-Clause 8.1 and shall be communicated in writing,
by e-mail or facsimile to all who have obtained the Tendering
documents directly from the Procuring Entity.
10.3 In order to allow prospective Tenderers reasonable time in which to
take an addendum into account in preparing their Tenders, the
Procuring Entity at its discretion shall extend, as necessary, the
deadline for submission of Tenders, in accordance with sub-Clause
22.2

B. Preparation of Tenders

11. Language of
Tender
11.1 The Tender, and all correspondence and documents related to the
Tender exchanged by the Tenderer and the Procuring Entity shall be
written in the Tender language stipulated in the Tender Data Sheet.
Supporting documents and printed literature furnished by the
Tenderer may be in another language provided they are accompanied
by an accurate translation of the relevant passages in the above
stated language, in which case, for purposes of interpretation of the
Tender, the translation shall prevail.
12. Documents 12.1 The Tender submitted by the Tenderer shall consist of the following


Constituting
the Tender
components:

a) The Form of Tender (in the format indicated in Section IX)
completed in accordance with ITT Clause 15, 16 and 17;
b) Information requested by Instructions to Tenderers ITT sub-
Clause 13.2; 13.3 and 13.4;
c) Tender Security or Tender Securing Declaration in accordance
with Instructions to Tenderers ITT Clause 19;
d) Priced Bill of Quantities;
e) Qualification Information Form and Documents;
f) Alternative offers where invited in accordance with Instructions to
Tenderers ITT Clause 5;
g) Written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Tender to
commit the Tenderer in accordance with Instructions to Tenderers
ITT sub Clause 19.2; and
h) Technical schedules duly filled in details as requested.
i) And any information or other materials required to be completed
and submitted by Tenderers, as specified in the Tender Data
Sheet.
13. Documents
Establishing
Eligibility
and
Qualification
s of the
Tenderer
13.1 Pursuant to ITT Clause 13, the Tenderer shall furnish, as part of its
Tender, documents establishing the Tenderers eligibility to Tender
and its qualifications to perform the contract if its Tender is
accepted.
13.2 Tenders submitted by a joint venture of two or more firms as
partners shall comply with the following requirements, unless
otherwise stated in the Tender Data Sheet:

a) The Tender shall include all the information listed in the Tender
Data Sheet pursuant to sub-Clause 13.3 above for each joint
venture partner;
b) The Tender shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all
partners;
c) One of the partners will be nominated as being in charge, and this
authorization shall be evidenced by submitting a power of
attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of all the
partners;
d) The partner in charge shall be authorized to incur liabilities and
receive instructions for and on behalf of any and all partners of a
joint venture and the entire execution of the Contract, including
payment, shall be done exclusively with the partner in charge;
e) All partners of the joint venture shall be liable jointly and severally
for the execution of the contract in accordance with the contract
terms and a statement to this effect shall be included in the
authorization mentioned under (c) above as well as in the Tender
and in the Agreement (in case of a successful Tender); and
f) A copy of the joint venture agreement entered into by all partner
shall be submitted with the Tender. Alternatively, a Letter of
Intent to execute a joint venture agreement in the event of a
successful Tender shall be signed by all partners and submitted


with the Tender, together with a copy of the proposed Agreement.
g) The Tender Security and Tender Securing Declaration as stated in
accordance with ITT Clause 19, and in case of a successful
Tender, the Agreement, shall be signed so as to be legally binding
on all partners.
14. Form of
Tender
14.1 The Tenderer shall fill the Form of Tender furnished in the Tendering
Documents. The Form of Tender must be completed without any
alterations to its format and no substitute shall be accepted.
15. Tender
Prices
15.1 The Contract shall be for the whole Works, as described in sub-
Clause 1.1, based on the priced Bill of Quantities submitted by the
Tenderer.
15.2 The Tenderer shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works
described in the Bill of Quantities. Items for which no rate or price is
entered by the Tenderer will not be paid for by the Procuring Entity
when executed and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and
prices in the Bill of quantities.
15.3 All duties, taxes and other levies payable by the Contractor under the
Contract, or for any other cause, as of the date 15 days prior to the
deadline for submission of Tenders, shall be included in the rates,
prices and total Tender price submitted by the Tenderer.
16. Tender
Currencies
16.1 The unit rates and prices shall be quoted by the Tenderer in the
currency as specified in the Tender Data Sheet.
16.2 Tenderers shall indicate details of their expected foreign currency
requirements in the Tender, if any. The rates of exchange to be used
by the Tenderers in arriving at the local currency equivalent shall be
the selling rates for similar transactions established by the authority
specified in the Tender Data Sheet prevailing on the date 28 days
prior to the latest deadline for submission of Tenders. These
exchange rates shall apply for all payments so that no exchange risk
will be borne by the Tenderer. In any case, payments will be
computed using the rates quoted in the Tender.
16.3 Tenderers may be required by the Procuring Entity to clarify their
foreign currency requirements and to substantiate that the amounts
included in the rates and prices and in the Contract Data Sheet are
reasonable and responsive to sub-Clause 17.1.
17. Tender
Validity
Period
17.1 Tenders shall remain valid for the period specified in the Tender
Data Sheet after the Tender submission deadline prescribed by the
Procuring Entity, pursuant to ITT Clause 22. A Tender valid for a
shorter period shall be rejected by the Procuring Entity as non
responsive.
17.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original Tender
validity period, the Procuring Entity may request that the Tenderers
extend the period of validity for a specified additional period. The
request and the Tenderers' responses shall be made in writing or by
cable. A Tenderer may refuse the request without forfeiting its Tender
Security or causing to be executed its Tender Securing declaration. A
Tenderer agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to
otherwise modify the Tender, but will be required to extend the
validity of its Tender Security or Tender Securing declaration for the
period of the extension, and in compliance with ITT Clause 19 in all
respects.
17.3 In the case of fixed price contracts, if the award is delayed by a
period exceeding sixty (60) days beyond the expiry of the initial
Tender validity period, the contract price will be increased by a factor


specified in the request for extension. The Tender evaluation shall be
based on the Tender price without taking into consideration on the
above correction.
18. Tender
Security and
Tender
Securing
Declaration
18.1 Pursuant to ITT Clause 12, where required in the Tender Data
Sheet, the Tenderer shall furnish as part of its Tender, a Tender
Security in original form and in the amount and currency specified in
the Tender Data Sheet.
A Tender Securing Declaration as specified in the Tender Data
Sheet in the format provided in section X shall be provided as a
mandatory requirement.
18.2 The Tender Security or Tender Securing Declaration is required to
protect the Procuring Entity against the risk of Tenderers conduct
which would warrant the securitys forfeiture, pursuant to ITT sub-
Clause 19.9.
18.3 The Tender Security shall be denominated in the currency of the
Tender and shall be in one of the following forms:
a) Cash;
b) A Bank Guarantee;
c) An Insurance Bond issued by an insurance firm approved by the
PPOA located in Kenya;
d) An irrevocable letter of credit issued by a reputable bank.
18.4 The Tender Security shall be in accordance with the Form of the
Tender Security included in Section X or another form approved by
the Procuring Entity prior to the Tender submission.
18.5 The Tender Security shall be payable promptly upon written demand
by the Procuring Entity in case any of the conditions listed in sub-
Clause 19.8 are invoked.
18.6 Any Tender not accompanied by a Tender Security in accordance
with sub-Clauses 19.1 or 19.3 shall be rejected by the Procuring
Entity as non-responsive, pursuant to ITT Clause 28.
18.7 The Procuring Entity shall immediately release any Tender Security
if:
a) The procuring proceedings are terminated;
b) The Procuring Entity determines that none of the submitted
Tenders is responsive;
c) A contract for the procurement is entered into.
18.8
The Tender Security shall be forfeited and the Tender Securing
Declaration executed if the Tenderer:
a) Withdraws its Tender after the deadline for submitting Tenders
but before the expiry of the period during which Tenders must
remain valid;
b) Rejects a correction of an arithmetic error pursuant to sub-Clause
29.2;
c) Refuse to enter into a written contract in accordance with ITT
Clause 40;
d) Fails to furnish the Performance Security in accordance with ITT
Clause 41.
18.9 The Tender Security and Tender Securing Declaration of a joint
venture must be in the name of the joint venture submitting the
Tender.


18.1
0
A Tenderer shall be suspended from being eligible for Tendering in
any contract with the Procuring Entity for the period of time
indicated in the Tender Securing Declaration:
a) If the Tenderer withdraws its Tender, except as provided in ITT
sub-Clauses 18.2 and 29.2; or
b) In the case of a successful Tenderer, if the Tenderer fails within
the specified time limit to:
(i) Sign the contract; or
(ii) Furnish the required Performance Security.

19. Format and
Signing of
Tender
19.1 The Tenderer shall prepare one original of the documents comprising
the Tender as described in ITT Clause 12 of these Instructions to
Tenderers, with the Form of Tender, and clearly marked
ORIGINAL. In addition, the Tenderer shall submit copies of the
Tender, in the number specified in the Tender Data Sheet, and
clearly marked as COPIES. In the event of discrepancy between
them, the original shall prevail.
19.2 The original and all copies of the Tenders shall be typed or written in
indelible ink and shall be signed by a person or persons duly
authorized to sign on behalf of the Tenderer. This authorization
shall consist of a written confirmation as specified in the Tender
Data Sheet and shall be attached to the Tender. The name and
position held by each person signing the authorization must be typed
or printed below the signature. All pages of the Tender, except for
un-amended printed literature, shall be initialled by the person or
persons signing the Tender.
19.3 Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if
they are initialled by the person or persons signing the Tender.
19.4 The Tenderer shall furnish information as described in the Form of
Tender on commissions or gratuities, if any, paid or to be paid to
agents relating to this Tender and to contract execution if the
Tenderer is awarded the contract
C. Submission of Tenders

20. Sealing and
Marking of
Tenders
20.1 The Tenderer shall seal the original and each copy of the Tender in
separate envelopes, duly marking the envelopes as ORIGINAL and
COPY. The envelopes shall then be sealed in an outer envelope
securely sealed in such a manner that opening and resealing cannot
be achieved undetected.
20.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:
a) Be addressed to the Procuring Entity at the address given in the
Tender Data Sheet; and
b) Bear the Project name indicated in the Tender Data Sheet, the
Invitation for Tenders (IFT) title and number indicated in the
Tender Data Sheet, and a statement: DO NOT OPEN
BEFORE, to be completed with the time and the date specified in
the Tender Data Sheet, pursuant to ITT sub-Clause 22.1.

20.3 In addition to the identification required in sub-Clause 21.2, the
inner envelopes shall also indicate the name and address of the
Tenderer to enable the Tender be returned unopened in case it is
declared late, pursuant to sub-Clause 22.1 and for matching
purpose under ITT Clause 23

20.4 If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked as required by ITT sub
clause 21.2, the Procuring Entity shall assume no responsibility for


misplacement or premature opening of the Tender.
21. Deadline for
Submission
of Tenders
21.1 Tenders shall be received by the Procuring Entity at the address
specified under ITT sub-Clause 21.2 no later than the date and time
specified in the Tender Data Sheet.

21.2 The Procuring Entity may, in exceptional circumstances and at its
discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of Tenders by
amending the Tendering documents in accordance with ITT Clause 9,
in which case all rights and obligations of the Procuring Entity and
Tenderers previously subject to the deadline will thereafter be subject
to the new deadline.

21.3 The extension of the deadline for submission of Tenders shall not be
made later than the period specified in the Tender Data Sheet
before the expiry of the original deadline.
22. Late Tenders 22.1
The Procuring Entity shall not consider for evaluation any Tender
that arrives after the deadline for submission of Tenders, in
accordance with ITT Clause 22.
22.2
Any Tender received by the Procuring Entity after the deadline for
submission of Tenders shall be declared late, rejected and returned
unopened to the Tenderer
23. Modification,
Substitution
and
Withdrawal
of Tenders
23.1 A Tenderer may modify or substitute or withdraw its Tender after it
has been submitted, provided that written notice of the modification,
including substitution or withdrawal of the Tender, is received by the
Procuring Entity prior to the deadline prescribed for submission of
Tenders prescribed under ITT sub-Clause 22.1.
23.2 The Tenderers modification or substitution or withdrawal notice
shall be prepared, sealed, marked, and dispatched in accordance
with the provisions of ITT Clauses 20 and 21 with the outer and
inner envelopes additionally marked MODIFICATION or
SUBSTITUTION or WITHDRAWAL as appropriate. The notice may
also be sent by electronic mail and facsimile, but followed by a
signed confirmation copy, postmarked not later than the deadline for
submission of Tenders.

23.3 No Tender may be withdrawn, replaced or modified in the interval
between the deadline for submission of Tenders and the expiration of
the period of Tender validity specified by the Tenderer on the Tender
Form. Withdrawal of a Tender during this interval shall result in the
Tenderers forfeiture of its Tender Security or execution of Tender
Securing Declaration, pursuant to the ITT sub-Clause 19.9.

23.4 Withdrawal of a Tender between the deadline for submission of
Tenders and the expiration of the period of Tender validity specified
in the Tender Data Sheet or as extended pursuant to sub-Clause
22.2 shall result in the forfeiture of the Tender Security and
execution of Tender Securing Declaration pursuant to ITT sub-
Clause 19.9.

23.5 Tenderers may only offer discounts to, or otherwise modify the prices
of their Tenders by submitting Tender modifications in accordance
with this Clause, or included in the original Tender submission.


D. Opening and Evaluation of Tenders
24. Opening of
Tenders
24.1 The Procuring Entity will open all Tenders including modifications,
substitution or withdraw notices made pursuant to ITT Clause 24,
in public, in the presence of Tenderers or their representatives who
choose to attend and other parties with legitimate interest and
Tender proceedings, at the place on the date and at time specified
in the Tender Data Sheet. The Tenderers representatives who are
present shall sign a register as proof of their attendance.
24.2 Envelopes marked WITHDRAWAL shall be opened and read out
first. Tenders for which an acceptable notice of withdrawal has
been submitted pursuant to ITT Clause 24 shall not be opened but
returned to the Tenderer. If the withdrawal envelope does not
contain a copy of the Power of Attorney confirming the signature
as a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Tenderer, the
corresponding Tender will be opened. Subsequently, all envelopes
marked "MODIFICATION" shall be opened and the submissions
therein read out in appropriate detail. Thereafter all envelopes
marked or "SUBSTITUTION" opened and the submissions therein
read out in appropriate detail.
24.3 All other envelopes shall be opened one at a time. The Tenderers'
names, the Tender prices, the total amount of each Tender and of
any alternative Tender (if alternatives have been requested or
permitted), any discounts, the presence or absence of Tender
security, and such other details as the appropriate tender opening
committee may consider appropriate, will be announced by the
Secretary of the Tender Opening Committee at the opening.
24.4 Tenders or modifications that are not opened and not read out at
Tender opening shall not be considered further for evaluation,
irrespective of the circumstances. In particular, any discount
offered by a Tenderer which is not read out at Tender opening shall
not be considered further.
24.5 Tenderers are advised to send in a representative with the
knowledge of the content of the Tender who shall verify the
information read out from the submitted documents. Failure to
send a representative or to point out any un-read information by
the sent Tenderers representative shall indemnify the Procuring
Entity against any claim or failure to read out the correct
information contained in the Tenderers Tender.
24.6 No Tender will be rejected at Tender opening except for late Tenders
which will be returned unopened to the Tenderer, pursuant to ITT
Clause 23.
24.7 The Secretary of the appropriate tender opening committee shall
prepare minutes of the Tender opening. The record of the Tender
opening shall include, as a minimum: the name of the Tenderers
and whether or not there is a withdrawal, substitution or
modification, the Tender price per Lot if applicable, including any
discounts and alternative offers and the presence or absence of a
Tender Security or Tender Securing Declaration.
24.8 The Tenderers representatives who are present shall be requested
to sign the record. The omission of a Tenderers signature on the
record shall not invalidate the contents and affect the record.
24.9 A copy of the minutes of the Tender opening shall be furnished to
individual Tenderers upon request.
25. Confidentiality 25.1 Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation,


and comparison of Tenders and recommendations for the award of
a Contract shall not be disclosed to Tenderers or any other persons
not officially concerned with such process until the award to the
successful Tenderer has been announced.
25.2 Any effort by a Tenderer to influence the Procuring Entitys
processing of Tenders or award decisions may result in the
rejection of his Tender.
25.3 Notwithstanding sub-Clause 26.2, from the time of Tender opening
to the time of Contract award, if any Tenderer wishes to contact the
Procuring Entity on any matter related to the Tendering process, it
should do so in writing.
26. Clarification of
Tenders
26.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, comparison of Tenders
and post-qualification of the Tenderer, the Procuring Entity may, at
its discretion, ask a Tenderer for clarification of its Tender
including breakdown of prices. Any clarification submitted by a
Tenderer that is not in response to a request by the Procuring
Entity shall not be considered.

26.2 The request for clarification and the response shall be in writing.
No change in the prices or substance of the Tender shall be sought,
offered, or permitted except to confirm the correction of arithmetic
errors discovered by the Procuring Entity in the evaluation of
Tenders in accordance with ITT Clause 29.
26.3 From the time of Tender opening to the time of Contract award if
any Tenderer wishes to contact the Procuring Entity on any matter
related to the Tender it should do so in writing.
27. Preliminary
Examination of
Tenders
27.1 Prior to the detailed evaluation of Tenders, the Procuring Entity will
determine whether:
a) The Tender has been submitted in the required format;
b) Any Tender Security submitted is in the required form, amount
and validity period;
c) The Tender has been signed by the person lawfully authorized to
do so;
d) The required number of copies of the Tender have been
submitted;
e) The Tender is valid for the period required;
f) All required documents and information have been submitted;
and
g) Any required samples have been submitted.
27.2 The Procuring Entity will confirm that the documents and
information specified under ITT Clause 12 and ITT Clause 13 have
been provided in the Tender. If any of these documents or
information is missing, or is not provided in accordance with the
Instructions to Tenderers, the Tender shall be rejected.
27.3 The Procuring Entity may waive any minor informality,
nonconformity, or irregularity in a Tender which does not
constitute a material deviation, provided such waiver does not
prejudice or affect the relative ranking of any Tenderer
27.4 A substantially responsive Tender is one which conforms to all the
terms, conditions, and specifications of the Tendering documents,
without material deviation or reservation. A material deviation or


reservation is one that:
a) Affects in any substantial way the scope, quality, or execution of
the Works;
b) Limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Tendering
documents, the Procuring Entity's rights or the Tenderers
obligations under the Contract; or
c) If rectified, would affect unfairly the competitive position of other
Tenderers presenting substantially responsive Tenders.
27.5 If a Tender is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected by the
Procuring Entity, and may not subsequently be made responsive by
correction or withdrawal of the non-conforming deviation or
reservation.
28. Correction of
Errors
28.1 Tenders determined to be substantially responsive will be checked
by the Procuring Entity for any arithmetic errors. Errors will be
corrected by the Procuring Entity as follows:
a) If there is a discrepancy between unit prices and the total price
that is obtained by multiplying the unit price and quantity, the
unit price shall prevail, and the total price shall be corrected,
unless in the opinion of the Procuring Entity there is an obvious
misplacement of the decimal point in the unit price, in which the
total price as quoted shall govern and the unit price shall be
corrected;
b) If there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition or
subtraction of subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and the total
shall be corrected; and
c) Where there is a discrepancy between the amounts in figures
and in words, the amount in words will govern.
28.2 The amount stated in the Tender will, be adjusted by the Procuring
Entity in accordance with the above procedure for the correction of
errors and, with, the concurrence of the Tenderer, shall be
considered as binding upon the Tenderer. If the Tenderer does not
accept the corrected amount, its Tender will then be rejected, and
the Tender Security may be forfeited and the Tender Securing
Declaration may be executed in accordance with sub-Clause 19.9.
29. Conversion to
Single
Currency
29.1 To facilitate the evaluation and comparison, the Procuring Entity
will convert all Tender prices expressed in the amounts in various
currencies in which the Tender prices are payable to Kenya
Shillings at the selling exchange rate established for similar
transactions by the Central Bank of Kenya ruling on the date
specified in the Tender Data Sheet.
30. Comparison of
Tenders
30.1 The Procuring Entity shall evaluate and compare only the Tenders
determined to be substantially responsive in accordance with ITT
Clause 28.
30.2 In evaluating the Tenders, the Procuring Entity will determine for
each Tender the evaluated Tender price by adjusting the Tender
price as follows:
Making any correction for errors pursuant to ITT Clause 29;
Excluding provisional sums and the provision, if any for
contingencies in the Bill of Quantities, but including Day work ,
where priced competitively ; and
Making appropriate adjustments to reflect discounts or other price
modifications offered in accordance with sub-Clause 24.5.
30.3 The Procuring Entity may waive any minor informality or non-
conformity, which does not constitute a material deviation,


provided such waiver does not prejudice or affect the relative
standing of any Tenderer. Variations, deviations, and alternative
offers and other factors, which are in excess of the requirements of
the Tendering documents or otherwise result in unsolicited benefits
for the Procuring Entity will not be taken into account in Tender
evaluation.
31. National
Preference
31.1 There will be no national preference except to the effect and
substance as contained in the Tender Data Sheet.
32. Determination
of the winning
evaluated
Tender
32.1 The Tender with the highest combined technical and financial score
evaluated from among those which are eligible, compliant and
substantially responsive shall be the winning evaluated Tender.
33. Post-
qualification of
Tenderer
33.1 If specified in the Tender Data Sheet, post-qualification shall be
undertaken.

33.2 The Procuring Entity will determine to its satisfaction whether the
Tenderer that is selected as having submitted the winning
evaluated responsive Tender is qualified to perform the contract
satisfactorily, in accordance with the criteria listed in sub-Clause
13.3.
33.3 The determination will take into account the Tenderers financial,
technical, and production capabilities. It will be based upon an
examination of the documentary evidence of the Tenderers
qualifications submitted by the Tenderer, pursuant to sub-Clause
13.3, as well as such other information as the Procuring Entity
deems necessary and appropriate. Factors not included in these
Tendering documents shall not be used in the evaluation of the
Tenderers qualifications.
33.4 An affirmative determination will be a prerequisite for award of the
contract to the Tenderer. A negative determination will result in
rejection of the Tenderers Tender, in which event the Procuring
Entity will proceed to the next highest evaluated tender to make a
similar determination of that Tenderers capabilities to perform
satisfactorily.
E. Award of Contract
34. Criteria of
Award
34.1 Subject to ITT Clause 35 and 36, the Procuring Entity will award
the Contract to the Tenderer whose Tender has been determined to
be substantially responsive to the Tendering documents and who
has offered the winning evaluated tender Price, provided that such
Tenderer has been determined to be:
a) Eligible in accordance with the provisions of ITT Clause 3;
b) Is determined to be qualified to perform the Contract
satisfactorily;
c) Successful negotiations have been concluded.
35. Clarifications 35.1
Clarifications may be undertaken with the winning evaluated
tenderer relating to the following areas:
a) A minor alteration to the technical details of the statement of
requirements;
b) Reduction of quantities for budgetary reasons, where the
reduction is in excess of any provided for in the Tendering
documents;
c) A minor amendment to the Contract Data Sheet;
d) Finalizing payment arrangements;


e) Mobilization arrangements;
f) Agreeing final delivery or work schedule to accommodate any
changes required by the Procuring Entity;
g) The methodology or staffing; or
Clarifying details that were not apparent or could not be finalized at
the time of Tendering.

35.2 Clarifications shall not change the substance of the tender.
36. Procuring
Entitys Right
to Accept any
Tender and to
Reject any or
all Tenders
36.1 Notwithstanding ITT Clause 35, the Procuring Entity reserves the
right to accept or reject any Tender, and to cancel the Tendering
process and reject all Tenders, at any time prior to the award of
Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected
Tenderer or Tenderers.
36.2 Notice of the rejection of all Tenders shall be given promptly within
14 days to all Contractors that have submitted Tenders.
36.3 The Procuring Entity shall upon request communicate to any
Tenderer the grounds for its rejection of its Tenders, but is not
required to justify those grounds.
37. Procuring
Entities Right
to Vary
Quantities at
the Time of
Award
37.1 The Procuring Entity reserves the right at the time of contract
award to increase or decrease the quantity of goods or related
services originally specified in these Tendering documents (schedule
of requirements) provided this does not exceed by the percentage
indicated in the Tender Data Sheet, without any change in unit
price or other terms and conditions of the Tender and Tendering
documents.
38. Notification of
Award
38.1 The Tenderer whose Tender has been accepted will be notified of the
award by the Procuring Entity prior to expiration of the Tender
validity period by e-mail or facsimile confirmed by registered letter.
This letter (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract called the
"Letter of Acceptance") will state the sum that the Procuring Entity
will pay the Contractor in consideration of the provision and
maintenance of the Work(s) as prescribed by the Contract
(hereinafter and in the Contract called the Contract Price).
38.2 The notification of award will constitute the formation of the
Contract, subject to the Tenderer furnishing the Performance
Security in accordance with ITT Clause 41 and signing the Contract
in accordance with sub-Clause 40.2
At the same time as the person submitting the successful Tender is
notified, the Procuring Entity will notify each unsuccessful
Tenderer, the name of the successful Tenderer and the Contract
amount and will discharge the Tender Security and Tender
Securing Declaration of the Tenderer pursuant to ITT sub Clause
19.7
38.4 If, after notification of award, a Tenderer wishes to ascertain the
grounds on which its Tender or application for pre-qualification
was unsuccessful, it should address its request to the secretary of
the Tender Committee that authorized the award of contract. The
secretary of the Tender Committee shall, within fourteen days after
a request, provide written reasons as to why the Tender, proposal or
application to be pre-qualified was unsuccessful. However, failure to
take this opportunity to clarify the grounds for rejection does not
affect the Tenderers right to seek immediate review by the Public
Procurement Administrative Review Board under Clause 45.
39. Signing of 39.1 Promptly, and in no case later than 14 days, after notification,
Procuring Entity shall send the successful Tenderer the Agreement


Contract and Contract Data Sheet, incorporating all agreements between the
parties obtained as a result of Contract negotiations.
39.2 Within the period specified in the notification or Tender Data Sheet
but not earlier than fourteen (14) days since notification of award of
contract, the successful Tenderer shall sign and date the contract
and return it to the Procuring Entity.
40. Performance
Security
40.1 Within thirty (30) days but after 14 days after receipt of the Letter of
Acceptance, the successful Tenderer shall deliver to the Procuring
Entity a Performance Security in the amount and in the form
stipulated in the Tender Data Sheet and the Contract Data Sheet,
denominated in the type and proportions of currencies in the Letter
of Acceptance and in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
40.2 If the Performance Security is provided by the successful Tenderer
in the form of a Bank Guarantee or Insurance Bond, it shall be
issued either:
a) At the Tenderers option, by a bank or insurance firm located in
Kenya, or a foreign bank or insurance firm through a
correspondent bank or insurance firm located in Kenya;
b) With the consent of the Procuring entity, directly by a foreign
bank acceptable to the Procuring entity.
40.3 Failure of the successful Tenderer to comply with the requirement
of sub-Clause 41.1 shall constitute sufficient grounds for the
annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Tender Security, in
which event the Procuring Entity may make the award to the next
winning evaluated tenderer or call for new Tenders.
41. Advance
Payment
41.1 The Procuring Entity will provide an Advance Payment as stipulated
in the Conditions of Contract, subject to a maximum amount, as
stated in the Tender Data Sheet.
41.2 The Advance Payment request shall be accompanied by an Advance
Payment Security (Guarantee) in the form provided in Section X. For
the purpose of receiving the Advance Payment, the Tenderer shall
make an estimate of, and include in its Tender, the expenses that
will be incurred in order to commence work. These expenses will
relate to the purchase of equipment, machinery, materials, and on
the engagement of labour during the first month beginning with the
date of the Procuring Entitys Notice to Commence as specified in
the Contract Data Sheet.
42. Adjudicator 42.1 The Procuring Entity proposes the person named in the Tender Data
Sheet to be appointed as Adjudicator under the Contract. If the
Tenderer disagrees with this proposal, the Tenderer should so state
in the Tender. If, in the Letter of Acceptance, the Procuring Entity
has not agreed on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the
Adjudicator shall be appointed by the Appointing Authority
designated in the Contract Data Sheet at the request of either party.
F. Review of Procurement Decisions
43. Right to
Review
43.1 A Tenderer who claims to have suffered or risk suffering, loss or
damage or injury as a result of breach of a duty imposed on a
Procuring Entity or an Approving Authority by the Public
Procurement and Disposal Act, 2005 and the Public Procurement
and Disposal Regulations 2006, the procurement proceedings or
processes, may seek administrative review as prescribed by the Act.
The following matters, however, shall not be subject to the
administrative review:
a) The choice of procurement method;


b) a decision by the Procuring Entity to reject all Tenders,
proposals or quotations;
c) Where a contract is signed in accordance to Section 68 of the
Public Procurement and Disposal Act,2005;
d) Where an appeal is frivolous.
44. Time Limit on
Review
44.1 The Tenderer shall submit an application for review in the number
of copies and pay fees as prescribed by the Public Procurement and
Disposal Regulations 2006 within fourteen (14) days of the time the
Tenderer became or should have become aware of the
circumstances giving rise to the complaint or dispute.
45. Submission of
Applications
for Review by
the Public
Procurement
Administrative
Review Board
45.1 Any application for administrative review shall be submitted in
writing to the Secretary, Public Procurement Administrative Review
Board on Form RB 1 at the address shown in the Tender Data
Sheet. The secretary to the review board shall immediately after
filing of the request, serve a copy thereof on the Procuring Entity or
Director-General as the case may be.
45.2 The application for administrative review shall be in accordance
with the requirements of Regulation 73 of the Public Procurement
and Disposals Regulations, 2006, including:
a) Reasons for the complaint ,including any alleged breach of the
Act or Regulations;
b) An explanation of how the provisions of the Act and or
Regulation has been breached or omitted, including the dates
and name of the responsible public officer, where known;
c) Statements or other evidence supporting the complaint where
available as the applicant considers necessary in support of its
request;
d) Remedies sought;
e) Any other information relevant to the complaint.
46. Decision by the
Public
Procurement
Administrative
Review Board
46.1 The Administrative Review Board shall within thirty days after
receipt of an application for administrative review deliver a written
decision which shall indicate:
a) Annulling anything the Procuring Entity has done in the
procurement proceedings, including annulling the procurement
proceedings in their entirety;
b) Giving directions to the Procuring Entity with respect to
anything to be done or redone in the procurement proceedings;
c) Substituting the decision of the Review Board for any decision of
the Procuring Entity in the procurement proceedings;
d) Order the payment of costs as between parties to the review.
46.2 The decision made by the Review Board shall, be final and binding
on the parties unless judicial review thereof commences within
fourteen (14) days from the date of the Review Boards decision.

47. Appeal on the
decision of the
Review Board
47.1 Any party to the review aggrieved by the decision of the Review
Board may appeal to the High Court and the decision of the High
Court shall be final.


26

SECTION III: TENDER DATA SHEET


27 SECTION III: TENDER DATA SHEET
Tender Data Sheet (TDS)

Instructions to Tenderers Clause Reference

TDS
Reference
Number
ITT
Clause
Number
Amendments of, and Supplements to, Clauses in the
Instruction to Tenderers
A. Introduction

1. 1
.
1.1 The Procuring Entity is: The Kenya Ports Authority (KPA).

2. 2
.
1.1 Name of Project is: UPGRADING OF INCOMING KPLC SUPPLY FROM 11KV
TO 132KV
3. 3
.
1.2 The expected completion date of the works is 16 months. However bidders
may suggest their own timelines
4. 4
.
1.3 The Objectives of the Project are : UPGRADING OF INCOMING KPLC SUPPLY
FROM 11KV TO 132KV
5. 7
.
3.1

a) This invitation to tender is open to Registered Electrical Contractors who
shall demonstrate the require technical and financial capability to
undertake the envisaged project.
b) Tender Security shall be in the amount of Kenya Shillings Five Million
(Kshs5,000,000) in the form of a Bank Guarantee in the format
provided in the tender document
6. 8
.
5.2 Alternative time for completion tenderers shall be expected to submit their
work programs and may propose alternative completion periods
7. 7.3

Pre-Tender meeting will take place at KPA Kipevu Headquarter Kilindini
Mombasa
Venue 6
th
Floor Finance Block III at 1000hours
On Thursday, 23rd June, 2011
Starting at 1000Hours
8. 1
.
7.5 The minutes of the pre-Tender meeting will be transmitted within [five(5 days)]
9. 7.6 Non-attendance at the pre-tender meeting will not result in disqualification
B. Tendering Documents

10. 8.2 The number of copies to be completed and returned with the Tender is 2 i.e.
One ORIGINAL and Two (2) COPIES
11. 8.1 Address for clarification of Tendering Document is
The Secretary,
Corporation Tender Committee,
Kenya Ports Authority,
Mombasa, KENYA
Tel +254 041 2113600/999
Fax: +254-041-2226721
Email: ctcsecretary@kpa.co.ke

12. 8.2 Period to Respond to request for clarification by the Procuring Entity [2- days]
Period Prior to deadline for submission of Tenders for Tenderers to request
clarification [ten (10) days]
C. Preparation of Tenders

13. 11.1 Language of Tender and all correspondence shall be English
14. 12.1 Other information or materials required to be completed and submitted by
Tenderers :


Tenders shall be submitted in a two envelope systems (Envelope A
Technical Submission and Envelope B financial Submission) the two sealed
envelopes shall then be sealed in an outer envelope bearing the tender
number and name and a statement DO NOT OPEN BEFORE 0900HOURS
ON TUESDAY, 26
TH
JULY, 2011

Envelope A shall contain the Technical submission and shall be clearly
marked Envelope A Technical Submission. Envelope A shall contain NO
indication of the tender price or other financial information of the bid and: -

a. Shall have a table of contents pages clearly indicating Sections
and Page Numbers clearly indicated. The various sections shall
be highlighted and arranged in the format below
b. Shall have pages in the whole document numbered in the
correct sequence and all pages MUST be initialed. THIS IS A
MANDATORY REQUIREMENT AND TENDERS WITHOUT
PAGE NUMBERS SHALL BE DISQUALIFIED.
Section Requirements
1. Profile Particulars of Tendering Company including
the Company background, statutory
registration documents e.g. VAT & PIN
Certificate, and a Valid /Current Tax
Compliance certificate(TCC3) (MANDATORY)
Duly filled and signed Confidential Business
questionnaire and Anti-Corruption Declaration
Commitment/ Pledge(MANDATORY)
A Valid and Current Ministry of Energy,
Energy Regulatory Commission (ERC) Class A
Certificate (MANDATORY)
2. Manufacturers
Authorization
Original Manufacturers Authorization Form in the
format provided in the tender document for the
transformers and switchgear - where the bidder is
not the manufacturer (MANDATORY)
3. Tender
Security
Original Tender Security of Kshs.5 million in form
of a bank Guarantee in the format provided in the
Tender Document valid for a period of 120 days
from date of tender opening (MANDATORY)
4. Experience The main material and equipment to be supplied
must have proven experience of at least five (5)
years, up to bid submission, of safe operation in
power system network.
Provide evidence to demonstrate that the bidder
and the bidders proposed Sub-contractor(s), if
any, have previously erected distribution system
of the type specified and have adequate technical
knowledge and practical experience. The bidder
shall furnish with its bid details of having
completed or being in the process of completing
the supply and installation of at least one (1)
turnkey contract of a similar size and complexity
of 7.5 MVA, 132/11 kV Substation or a
Substation of a higher Transformer rating
and/or higher voltage rating in the last 5 years.
The Manufacturer must have minimum 5
years operating experience with transformers


and High Voltage Switchgear systems. Proof
including site details, technical brochures
must be included with the tender.
Tenderers Experience In Similar works- List
and contact details of sites where the bidder
has installed similar equipment. Complete with
brief description of project scope, contract
value, and Contract period. Site Visit may be
requested to prove the same. (use the table
format provided)
Qualifications and Experience of Key
Projects Staff proposed for the Project (Team
Leader, Co-Team Leader, other Engineers)
Provide a list attach Curriculum Vitae in the
format provided and attach certified copies of
professional and academic certificates.
Key equipment proposed for the works and
evidence of ownership or lease (Provide a
list and attach evidence of ownership or
lease)
5. Technical
Specifications
and Technical
schedules
The Manufacturers of all the major equipment
to be supplied must have ISO 9001 or
equivalent quality assurance Certification and
the tenderer to provide manufacturers
authorisation
The bidder shall return all the Technical
schedules duly filled in the format provided
Detailed information on the Transformers and
high Voltage Switchgear systems including
specifications and Manuals, Information
Brochures of the items quoted for and details of
their country of origin, CE conformity certificate
etc.
ISO CERTIFICATION for items imported
from overseas (MANDATORY)
KEBS certification for local items
(MANDATORY)
*This should be in form of a clause-by-clause
commentary on the Procuring Entitys
Technical Specifications demonstrating
substantial responsiveness of the
transformers and HV Switchgear to those
specifications, or
a statement of deviations and exceptions to
the provisions of the Technical
Specifications.
Tenderers Technical Specifications shall not
be a reproduction of the Procuring Entitys
specifications. ( refer to clause 13 of the ITB)
The schedule of deviations should be
accompanied by a commentary of how they
enhance the operational efficiency, cost
effectiveness, maintainability, and durability,
environmental and economic advantages.


Training proposal for KPA Engineers /Technical
(provide details of the training areas to be
covered)- MANDATORY
6. Methodology
and work plan
Work plan for design, building, shipping, delivery,
testing and commissioning in descriptive Gantt
chart format.
7. Under-takings
(i) A written undertaking:
(a) of ability to supply spares for at least 15
years after handing over which includes
upgrading of any software and hardware
proposed by the bidder in the Tender
(MANDATORY)
(b) to supply the Transformers and high
Voltage Switchgear accompanied by a
Computer based Maintenance Program for
execution of maintenance schedules,
should the tenderer be awarded the
contract(MANDATORY)
(c) to supply the Switchgear accompanied by
all necessary manuals from the original
manufacturer of each major component to
be of good quality, plastic covered, and in
the English language required to operate
and maintain the Transformers and high
Voltage Switchgear and in three (3) copies
for each of the following categories:
-Operation, -Maintenance and Parts
(MANDATORY)
(ii) Details of how the bidder intends to carry out
their part of the obligations during the
duration of Warranty (defects liability) period
- 24 months after commissioning
(MANDATORY)
8. Major
Component
Manufacturer
Documentation
Form
This should list the major components used on the
installation and their manufacturers details to
include name, address & location, contacts and
name of the contact person and be should be
submitted in the format provided in the tender
document (MANDATORY)
9. Defects liability
period support
plan

(NOTE: The manufacturers engineer shall give a
minimum 4 months on site technical support as
long as the Procuring entity has given notice to
require their presence. Thereafter, the
manufacturers engineer shall be availed on site
within 48 hours of notification) (MANDATORY)
10. Spare Parts
Recommended list of Spares to be supplied with
the Transformers and high Voltage Switchgear for
three year's preventive maintenance consumption
after the 24 months Defect Liability period
(MANDATORY)
11. Financial
Capacity
That the bidder shall have adequate financial
stability and status to meet the financial
obligations pursuant to the scope of the works. In


particular the bidder shall submit audited
financial statements for the last 4 years i.e. 2007,
2008, 2009 and 2010. The bidder shall
demonstrate access to, or availability of financial
resources such as liquid Assets, lines of credit,
unencumbered real assets, and other financial
means other than any contractual advance
payments to meet the following cash flow
requirement :
a) Cash flow
Capacity to have a cash flow of amount of
Kshs 90,Million and
Evidence of access to credit lines (eg letter
from Bankers)
The overall cash flow for this contract and
current commitments.
Annual Turnover of Kshs 300Million in the
last three(3) year
12. Accompanying
technical
documents
Operator manuals, Maintenance manuals etc Any
other item and information which the Tenderer
considers may support his technical
proposal.(MANDATORY)
13. Information
regarding
litigation,
(Litigation history in the last ten years in the
format provided)
(MANDATORY)

Envelope B shall contain:

i. Form of Tender.

ii. Priced Bill Of quantities

iii. Cost of spare parts to be used during the warranty period as
provided in the technical specifications

iv. Cost of spare-parts to be used for one years preventive maintenance
after warranty period.

v. Priced list of major spare parts, listed tools(clause 1.13 of technical
specifications) Accessories and consumables in the format provided
in the tender document

vi. Optional extras and cost, if any.

15 13.3

Minimum qualifying criteria shall be 75% of the marks in the technical
evaluation (Envelope A)

The marks shall be distributed as follows:
Qualification requirements for bidders, including members of joint ventures,
subcontractors or vendors:-
The Bidder and his proposed sub-contractors, if any, shall supply
documentary evidence to establish to the Procuring Entitys satisfaction that
the bidder has the Financial, Technical, Production, and capacity necessary to
perform the contract, including capacity in terms of personnel for the purpose
of performing the services
Bidders qualification will be evaluated on the basis of the following criteria:



A. TENDERERS TECHNICAL CAPACITY AND EXPERIENCE
A1. Technical Capacity of the Contractor
The bidder shall provide evidence of ownership or ability to access
tools, test equipments and heavy equipment (age of heavy equipment
items should be given) required for timely completion of the Contract.
The list of such tools and heavy equipment shall be Listed (verification
shall be done where required)
Major Construction & Transportation Equipment, for carrying out Civil
Works, including loading and unloading equipment
Substation Erection Tools & Equipment
Test Equipment for Plant and Switchgear and for Protection & Control
Equipment and Schemes. -
A2. CV of key personnel-
a) The following key staff of the Bidder for the proposed project shall be
Registered professionals by the domicile professional National body
or a recognized International professional body (Attach Registration
certificates of the professionals) with at least 5 years of relevant
experience:-
Project Manager should have completed at least one (1) project of
similar complexity of 15 MVA, 132/11 KV Substation or a Substation
of a higher Transformer rating and/or higher voltage rating in the last
5 years
Construction Engineer (Registered Engineer). The construction
Engineer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in similar
works - (The Construction Engineer shall only be engaged in one Lot
for the whole project duration)
Safety Officer (Minimum formal Education- a Diploma in Electrical
Engineering with training in safety and experience in safety)
Detailed CVs (Including the telephone contact and email address) shall
be provided listing the projects and relevant roles played in the project
(to be verified where necessary) for each of the three (3) key staff shall
be provided. A signed letter from the three (3) key staff confirming their
commitment and availability to the project if awarded shall also be
provided. No replacement of the key staff of the proposed project
Organization shall be allowed without prior approval from the
Procuring Entity. Where replacement is necessary the staff`s
qualification shall be the same as above.

B. ADHERENCE TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND
TECHNICAL SCHEDULES
B1. Performance Guarantees and technical schedules. Bidders
Satisfactory completion of technical schedules for outdoor
switchgear will be assessed.
The technical schedules forms are listed under Technical guarantees
schedule for outdoor switchgear and will be evaluated as hereunder:

a) Schedule 1a
b) Schedule 1b
c) Schedule 2a
d) Schedule 2b
e) Schedule 3a
f) Schedule 3b
g) Schedule 4a



h) Schedule 5
i) Schedule 6a
j) Schedule 6b
k) Schedule 7a
l) Schedule 7b
m) Schedule 8a
n) Schedule 8b

B2. Performance Guarantees and technical schedules. Bidders
Satisfactory completion of technical schedules for 11kV
switchgear will be assessed.
The technical schedules forms are listed under Technical schedule for
11kV switchgear and will be evaluated as hereunder:

i. Schedule A
ii. Schedule B
iii. Schedule C
iv. Schedule D
v. Schedule E
vi. Schedule F
vii. Schedule G
viii. Schedule H
ix. Schedule I
x. Schedule J
xi. Schedule K
xii. Schedule L
xiii. Schedule M

B3. Ability to arrange timely Supplies as per the specification &
Timely Completion

The bidder will provide committal letters from proposed planned suppliers
showing that the major materials and equipment in the quantities specified in
the contract document will be delivered for timely completion of the Contract
on time and as specified in the respective technical specifications and as
detailed in the technical schedules:

a) 132 kV switchgear.
b) 11 kV switchgear.

c) Bidders Gantt Chart and Critical Path Method (CPM)
Programme for Execution of the Facilities. The Programme provided
must be detailed showing all the stages of Execution of the Project from
Start to Completion of the project. The Programme should be made using
Microsoft Office Projects or any other equivalent programme.
C. TRAINING
Details of training schedules for KPA engineers and technicians as requied
in the technical schedules
D. FINANCIAL CAPACITY
Evidence of financial capability
Audited accounts for the last three(3) year
Cash flow as specified
Adequate Turnover



EVALUATION SUMMARY
Evaluation item Marks /
Points
A. Adherence to Technical Specifications and technical
schedules (55 points)
(Only bids that meet a score of 80% in this criteria shall be
considered)
55
B. Tenderers technical capacity and experience
(i) Equipment capacity (10 points)
(ii) Personnel capability (10points)
(iii) Similar experience- List and evidence of similar contracts i
n the last 5 years for both manufacturer and bidder
(10points) use format provided

30
C. Training 5
D. Financial capacity of the Tenderer:
Tenderers financial performance based on Certified Audited
Accounts for 2007, 2008 and 2009/10
10
TOTAL MARKS 100 POINTS
Pass Mark 75 points
The Authority shall carry out a site visit to the factory/ reference site visits to
the reference sites and manufacturing plant prior to opening of financial submission
Envelope B so as to establish whether the information provided in the technical
submission is accurate.
Where site visits are conducted, the Evaluation Criteria shall be based on:
Quality of workmanship
Reliability of the switchgear equipment
Availability of spare parts and service response
Cost of Maintenance
The Bidder(s) whose site(s) is/are visited MUST score a minimum of 15 out of 20
points of the site visit criteria so as to be considered financial opening
16

13.4 In the case of joint venture each partner shall submit information required
under Clause ITT Clause 13.4.
17 16.4 The price shall be fixed
18 17.1

The currency in which the prices shall be quoted shall be: Kenya Shilling or
United States Dollars
19 17.2

The authority for establishing the rates of exchange shall be Central Bank of
Kenya.The applicable date for exchange rates for tendering and evaluation
purposes is 28 days earlier than the final deadline for the submission of
tenders.
20 18.1 The Tender validity period shall be 90 days .
21 19.1 The amount of Tender Security shall be KShs 5 Million in the form of a bank
Guarantee in the format provided
22 20.1

In addition to the original of the Tender, the Tenderer should submit Two
copies of the Tender
23 20.2 Written confirmation of authorization are Sealed Power of Attorney authorising
the signatory to commit the tenderer
D. Submission of Tenders

24 21.2 a)
Tenders shall be submitted to
Tender Box No. 7 located at the BUS TERMINUS, PORT MAIN
PEDESTRIAN GATE NO.8, KILINDINI, MOMBASA BEFORE
0900 HOURS ON TUESDAY, 26
TH
JULY, 2011


Bulky tenders shall be submitted at the office of Procurement &
Supplies Manager ( door no 3.4.3) located on the 4th floor of
office Block III at the Kenya Ports Authority Headquarters,
Kipevu, Kilindini Mombasa
25 21.2 b) Project name UPGRADING OF INCOMING KPLC SUPPLY FROM
11KV TO 132KV
Tender number KPA/169/2010-11/EE
Time and date for submission 0900 HOURS ON TUESDAY, 26
TH

JULY, 2011
26 22.1 The deadline for Tender submission is 0900 HOURS ON
TUESDAY, 26
TH
JULY, 2011
27 22.3 The extension of the deadline for submission of Tenders shall be
made not later than 7days; normally not more than seven days]
before the expiry of the original deadline.
28 24.4 Expiry of Tender validity is 90 days from tender opening date

E. Opening and Evaluation of Tenders

29 25.1 The Tender opening shall take place at:
New Conference Room,
6
th
Floor Finance Block III
Kenya Ports Authority, Kipevu Headquarters,
Kilindini 0900 HOURS ON TUESDAY, 26
TH
JULY, 2011
33 34.1 Post- qualification will be undertaken where KPA deems it
necessary
35 38.1 Percentage for quantities increase or decrease is [15 percent]

F. Award of Contract
36 41.1 The amount of Performance Security shall be [10% of the contract
price]in the form of a Bank guarantee for an equivalent amount in
the format provided
37 42.1 The Advance Payment shall be limited to a maximum of fifteen (15)
percent of the Contract Price] and in any event shall be covered by
a Bank guarantee for an equivalent amount in the format
provided.
38 43.1 The proposed adjudicator for the project is:
The chairman Chartered Institute of Arbitrators Kenya Branch
G. Review of Procurement Decisions

39 46.1 The address for submitting appeals to Administrative Review
Board :
The Secretary,
Public Procurement Administrative Review Board ,
The Public Procurement Oversight Authority,
10
th
Floor ,National Bank House,
P.O. Box 58583-00200,
NAIROBI, Kenya.
Tel: +254 (0) 20 3244000
Email: info@ppoa.go.ke
Website: www.ppoa.go.ke


36 SECTION IV: GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

SECTION IV: GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT


37 PART I GENERAL CONDITIONS
The Conditions of Contract shall be :

A: MAIN ELECTROMECHANICAL WORKS

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (Including erection on site)
PART I GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART I General Conditions, shall be those forming Part I of the Conditions of Contract
for Electrical and Mechanical Works Including Erection on Site, Third Edition 1987, re-
printed 1988 with Editorial Amendments prepared by the Federation International des
Ingenieurs conseils (FIDIC). The Conditions are subject to variations and additions set
out in Part II hereof entitled Special Conditions.

i. The Special Conditions take precedence over the General Conditions of Contract.

ii. Copies of the FIDIC Conditions of Contract can be obtained from:

FIDIC Secretariat
P.O.Box 86
1000 Lausanne 12
Switzerland
Fax: 41 21 653 5432
Telephone 41 21 653 5003


PREAMBLE TO GENERAL CONDITIONS

This Preamble, the General Conditions, the Special Conditions, Technical Specification,
Employers and Contractors Drawings and Technical Literature, Schedules and Bills of
Quantities and other documents constitute the Contract documents.
The clauses and sub-clauses mentioned here are from the FIDIC conditions of Contract
for Mechanical and Electrical Works.

Commencement
Date
Sub-Clause 1.1.1 (i)
The date for commencement of the works is 14 days from the
date of letter of notification by the employer subject to receipt
of a letter of acceptance

The Employer Sub Clause 1.1.12
The employer is:
P.O. Box 95246-80104
Mombasa

The Engineer

The Engineers
Representative

Sub-Clause 1.1.15
Technical Services Manager
Kenya Ports Authority
P.O. Box 95009-80104 Mombasa

M&E Consulting Engineers
P.O. Box 43224-00100
Nairobi

Time for Completion Sub-clause 1.1.35
The Time for Completion from the Commencement Date will be
agreed at the time of tender award

Contractors Profit Sub-Clause 1.6
The percentage to cover profit entitlement, where appropriate,
is 18%.

Ruling Language Sub-Clause 5.1
The version in English language (ruling language) shall prevail.

Day to day
Communications
Sub-Clause 5.2
The language for day to day communications is English.

Programme to be
Furnished
Sub-Clause 12.1
The Programme must be submitted in the form of GANTT Chart
and Method Statement.

Electricity, Water,
Gas and Other
Services
Sub-Clause 14.3
Supplies on the site are:
a. Electricity: Shall be supplied by the Employer
b. Water: Shall be supplied by the Employer
c. Other Services: The Employer shall not provide any other
services.


Employers
Equipment
Sub-Clause 14.4
The Employer will not avail for use by the Contractor any
equipment

Working Hours Sub-Clause 18.3
The normal working hours are 0800Hours to 1700Hours
Monday to Friday

Delay in Completion Sub-clause 27.1
Failure to meet the Time for Completion entitles the Employer
to reduction in Contract Price as follows:
Kshs. 100,000.00 per day
Maximum Kshs. NO LIMIT

Prolonged Delay Sub-Clause 27.2
Maximum amount recoverable from the Contractor by the
Employer: 110% of the value of uncompleted work.

Terms of Payment Sub-Clause 33.1
In addition to the provisions under Clause 33, the terms of
payment shall be on the basis of payment Schedule (if any)
annexed to this Preamble.

Payment in Foreign
Currencies
Sub-Clause 35.1
Payment in foreign currencies shall be arranged as follows:
Shall be in US DOLLARS or equivalent

Rates of Exchange Sub-Clause 35.3
The rates of Exchange for the purpose of the Contract are: Not
Applicable.

Payment against
Provisional Sums
Sub-Clause 36.4 (b)
The percentage to be applied to Provisional. Nil
Minimum Liability Sub-Clause 42.2
The maximum liability of the Contractor to the Employer shall
be Contract sum.

Insurance of Works Sub-Clause 43.1
The deductible limits in the insurance cover of the Works shall
not exceed 10%
Sub-Clause 43.1 (a)
The additional risks to be insured are:
110% of the value of loss of damage

Third Party Liability Sub-Clause 43.3
The amount of insurance against third party liability taken out
by the Contractor shall not be less than: Kshs. 200,000.00

Payment on
Termination for
Employers Default
Sub-Clause 46.3
The additional amount payable by the Employer on termination
shall not exceed : Kshs.100,000.00

Labour, Materials
and Transport
Sub-Clause 47.1
The method of Calculating adjustments for changes in costs


shall be: Adjustments for changes in the cost of labour,
materials, transport or other costs shall not be allowed.

Notices to Employer
and Engineer
Sub-Clause 49.2
The address of the Employer for notices is:

THE SECRETARY, CORPORATION TENDER COMMITTEE
P. O. BOX 95246-80104
TEL: +254-41-2113999/3600, FAX: +254-41-2226721
E-MAIL: ctcsecretary@kpa.co.ke

Applicable Law Sub-Clause 51.1
The applicable law is the laws of the Republic of Kenya.

Procedural Law for
Arbitration
Sub-Clause 51.2
The Procedural Law for arbitration is the laws of the Republic
of Kenya.

Language and place
of Arbitration
Sub-Clause 51.3
The language of arbitration is English language. The place of
arbitration is Mombasa Kenya.


41 PART II SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
PART II SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The Conditions of Contract comprise the General Conditions of Contract and the following
Special Conditions of Contract which include amendments and additions to the General
Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions of Contract.

The provisions in the General Conditions of Contract shall apply unless modified in Sub-Section
3.3: special Conditions of Contract.

(The Clauses referred to in Part II Section A are those where the provision in the General
Conditions (Part I) refer to an alternative solution to be stated in Part II. The provisions in the
General Conditions will apply unless an alternative solution is given in Part II Section A.)

Table 3.1
Ser
ial
No.
General
Conditions
Clause No.
Brief
Description
Modification
01 1.1.12 Employer The Employer shall be:
P. O. Box 95009-80104
Tel. No. +245-41-2311867
Fax No. +254-41-2226721
Email: ctcsecretary@kpa.co.ke
02 1.1.15 Engineer The Engineer shall be:
Technical Services Manager
P. O. Box 95246-80104
Tel. No. +245-41-2311867
Fax No. +254-41-2226721
Email: asamatar@kpa.co.ke
03 1.1.16 Engineers
Representative
M&E Consulting Engineers
P.O. Box 43224-00100, Nairobi

04 1.1.11 Defects
Notification
Period
The Defects Notification Period shall be 24 months.
05 4 (Sub-
clause 6.6.)
Operation and
Maintenance
Manuals
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be in English
language.

06 9.0 Price
Variation

9.1 Contract price variations shall not be allowed for
contracts not exceeding one year (12 months)
9.2 Where contract price variation is allowed, the
variation shall not exceed 15% of the original
contract price.
9.3 Price variation requests shall be processed by
the procuring entity within 30 days of receiving
the request.
07 10.1 Performance
Security
Performance Security shall be 10% of the Contract sum
in the form of a bank guarantee in the format provided
08 Invitation Tender Validity
Period
The Tender shall remain valid for a period of 90 days
from the date of submission.

09 25.1 Time for
completion
The time for completion shall be agreed at the time of
Tender Award.
The scope of work shall include:
1. This part of the contract shall comprise the
supply delivery, erection, testing, commissioning
and setting to work of all electrical engineering
installation works as detailed in these


specifications and the accompanying contract
drawings.
2. The contractor shall include all apparatus and
appliances not particularly called for in this
specification or on the contract drawings but
which are necessary for completion and
satisfactory function of the contract works. No
claim for extra payment shall be entertained
from the contractor due to his failure to adhere
to the above requirement.
10 26.3 Earlier
Completion
There will be no extra sum paid for partial or full
completion earlier than the stated Time for Completion.
11 - Currency of
Payments
Shall be Kenya Shillings or US Dollars.
12 - Sufficiency of
Contract Prices,
Materials,
Labour,
Programme
etc
a) The Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all
necessary information as to the conditions of working at
the site in KENYA PORTS AUTHORITY and have
obtained all necessary information on all matters and
things that may in any way influence them in making
his Tender and completing the Schedules and to have
satisfied himself as to the risks, obligations and
responsibilities to be undertaken in entering into the
Contract.
b) The Contractor is deemed to have inquired into and
satisfied himself as the sources of supply, the
sufficiency of and the means of obtaining and
transporting all plant, materials, labour, fuel, water,
electricity and other things required for or in connection
with the work and to have considered all matters as
possible contingencies affecting the execution and
completion of the work

13 - Bribery Any commission, advantage, gift, gratuity, reward or
bribe given, promised or offered by or on behalf of the
contractor or his agent or servant or any other person
on his or their behalf to any officer, servant,
representative or agent of the Employer shall be in
addition to any criminal liability which may be thereby
incurred subject to the Contractor to the cancellation of
this and all other contracts which he may have entered
into with the Employer of any loss or damage resulting
from such cancellation
The Employer shall be entitled upon a certificate in
writing of the Engineer to deduct the amounts so
certified from any monies otherwise due to the
Contractor recover the said amounts as a debt due or
partly the one and partly the other as the Employer
shall deem advisable.

14 - First Aid
Facilities
The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the Site
adequate and easily accessible first aid facilities for
treatment of all personnel and work-people in case of
accidents during the execution of the works under the
Contract and such equipment as may be required in any
relevant laws and regulations for the time being in force.

The places where these items are kept shall be
prominently marked.


A sufficient number of the Contractors employees shall
be fully qualified in first aid so that a person so qualified
is immediately available in case of accident at any time
and at any place and the persons so designated shall be
made known to all employees by the posting of their
names and designation in a prominent position on the
Site. Any order from the engineer as to extensions of or
alterations to such first aid facilities or services shall be
promptly carried out. The Contractor shall provide,
maintain and at all times carry a suitable first aid kit in
each of his supervisory transport vehicles.
15 - Fire Prevention
and Fire
Fighting
The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to
prevent any damage due to fire. The precautions shall
include but not limited to the installation and
maintenance of fire extinguishers in key positions in or
near the buildings. Such arrangements shall be subject
to the approval of the appropriate fire service officer.
16 - Regulations and
site Discipline
The Contractor shall obey all Government of Kenya,
Local authority and Kenya Ports Authority regulations
and all other regulations which may from time to time
require his observance and he shall instruct his agents,
servants and other employees to obey such regulations;
the Contractor shall be responsible for keeping
discipline of the Site.
17 - Register of
Employees
The Contractor shall keep on the site a detailed register
in the form required by the Engineer of all persons
employed upon the Works, including Sub-contractors
and their employees, containing the names, usual and
temporary address, trade and rate of pay of each such
person. The register shall be available for inspection by
the Engineer whenever required.

18 - Disorderly
Conduct etc
The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable
precautions to prevent any unlawful riotous or
disorderly conduct by or amongst his employees and for
the preservation of peace and protection of persons and
property in the neighbourhood of the Works against the
same and shall not interfere with members of any
authorized Police Force who shall have free and
undisputed access at all times to any part of the Works
in the performance of their duties.

19 - Consent by
Authorities
The contractor shall obtain and fill in all notices and
forms required by the Authorities and shall obtain all
consents where necessary for the various works being
executed and shall pay all fees in connection therewith.

20 - Declaration
Against Waiver
The condonation by the Employer of any breach or
breaches by the contractor or an authorized Sub-
Contractor of any of the stipulations and conditions
contained in the Contract shall in no way prejudice, or
effect or be construed as a waiver of the Employers
rights, powers and remedies under the Contract in
respect of any breach or breaches aforesaid.


44 SECTION V: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 132KV SWITCHGEAR, CONTROL, PROTECTION
AND COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

SCOPE OF WORKS:

This specification covers:
The manufacturing, supplying, testing before shipment, painting, packing for transport,
insuring, shipping, delivering to the Port of Mombasa Kenya, landing, customs clearing,
transporting from the port to the site, erecting, constructing, installing, site testing and
commissioning of the plant as generally described below.
Training of KPA personnel so as to equip them with the necessary knowledge for the
operation and maintenance of the equipment after installation, and handing over.
The proposed substation will be at the Port of Mombasa, adjacent to Substation M and the tee-off
will be at Kipevu power generation plant.

NB: It is to be noted that these technical specifications and attached drawings are provided
as a guideline for the tenderers to be able to quote for the supply of equipment and services
necessary to achieve a working substation that meets the specified requirement.
Tenderers are expected to perform detailed calculations to arrive at equipment
specifications provide detailed designs based on these specifications and to ascertain that
equipment supplied will meet the performance requirements as indicated in these
specifications.
Additionally, they are expected to include any other items not listed in these
specifications, but which in their opinion, is necessary to complete the installation and
enable the equipment to work successfully and meet these technical specifications. It is
the responsibility of the contractor to provide proper designs, materials, workmanship and
all the accessories necessary for the proper execution of the project.
The works will include but not limited to the following:

Tee off at Kipevu

Establish a tee-off substation at Kipevu with

a)
Nine (9 No.) 132 kV cable sealing ends.
Two sets (6 No.) 132 kV surge diverters
Two (2 No.) 132 kV Air break switches
One (1 No.) 132 kV circuit breaker
One set (3 No.) 132 kV current transformers.
Cabling : One Lot
Structures and Civil Works including cable trenches, drainage and landscaping.

b)
Laying approximately 1.5 km of 3 No. 132 kV S/C copper cables in 400mm
2
from
Hilltop substation to KPA HQ site as indicated in the drawings. This will involve:
Excavation of cables trench along the trace line
Laying the 132kV single core cables plus terminations at both ends
Reinstatement of trenches after laying of cable and bottom sand layer.
Laying of approximately 1.5 km 48 strand fibre optic cable.


KPA Substation at the Port
Establish a 132V Substation at Mombasa Port with
Four (4No.) 132kV circuit breakers- one gang-operated mechanism
Three (3No.) 132kV line isolator assembly with an integral earth switch
Three (3No.) 132kV isolators(without integral earth switch)
Three sets (9 No.) of 132kV current transformers
One sets (3No.) of 132kV Line surge arrester
One set (3No.) 132kV Capacitive Voltage Transformer
Two sets (6No.) of 132kV transformer surge arresters
Two sets (3No.) of 11kV transformer surge arresters
2x 15MVA , 132/11kV Transformer
Busbar protection panel with high impedance differential numeric relay
Line differential protection using OPGW
Line distance protection relays (132kV line)
Line back up protection, over current & earth fault, over voltage (132 kV line).
Line metering cubicle with meters of Cl. 0.2 accuracy (for 1 incomer 132kV line).
1x 200kVA, 11/0.433 kV substation transformer, on the 11kV busbar.
Substation and equipment earthing one lot
Cabling : One Lot
Structures and Civil Works including cable trenches, drainage and landscaping One Lot
Substation Illumination System- One Lot
One Lot of 132kV bus bar materials
Safety Appliances
Build a new control building of an approved design as given in drawing with a floor area of
at least 384m.
Provide medium voltage cable of appropriate capacity to link the new substation to
existing substation M
1.1 DETAILED DESCRIPTION
KPA 132/11kV SUBSTATION
(1) Protection and control
The following equipment shall be provided and installed for the purposes of protection, control
and monitoring.
Line differential protection using OPGW as first main
Overcurrent relays as backup protection and independent of the distance relay.
Busbar protection covering the 132 kV bays.
Annunciator relay (with audible alarm)
Transformer differential protection relay
Transformer LV overcurrent (independent)
Transformer HV overcurrent ( independent)
Transformer LV restricted earth fault
Transformer tap changer regulating relay(tap changer panel)
(2) 132kV protection panel
Two 132kV protection panels shall include but not limited to:
Line differential protection
Overcurrent
Other accessories to ensure full protection functionality
The other panels shall include
Overvoltage
(3) 132 kV Metering and control equipment panel.
This shall accommodate the controls for 132kV lines, the transformer circuit breaker
controls, mimic diagram (with approved colour codes) and shall also incorporate the
following but not limited to:


Substation control unit
Line annunciator relay
1 Ammeter per phase
MW and MVAR Meters
Energy meter
Trip/close control switch
Circuit Breaker ON/OFF indication
Voltage meter with selector switch.
Transducer for MW and MVAR to be interfaced with SCADA.
Other accessories to ensure full functionality
(4) 132 kV Circuit Breaker Panels
The circuit breaker panel shall include but not limited to:
Breaker fail protection relay
Pole discrepancy
Trip circuit supervision (both trip coils)
Tripping relay with visible flag
Annunciation relay for breaker functions(gas pressure alarm, block, breaker fail, pole
discrepancy, dc supply failure)
(5) Transformer protection panel
Each transformer protection panel shall include but not limited to:
Transformer differential
Restricted earth fault
HV overcurrent
Annunciation relay and transformer function
Master Trip relay
LV trip relay
(6) Tap-changer panel
Each transformer tap-changer panel shall include but not limited to:
Voltage regulation relay
Selector switch Auto on/off
Manual switch raise/lower
Tap-changer function
Local /remote
Other accessories to ensure full functionality
(7) Battery
One set of 110 V dc battery and battery charger shall be provided.
One set of 48V dc battery and battery charger shall be provided
(8) Communications and Scada
Fibre optic STM-1 terminal equipment to transmit voice and data to the KPLC Regional
control centre at Kipevu. The OLTE shall be equipped with a fast Ethernet port capable of
handling at least 10 Mb/s. SCADA data shall be collected and transmitted to the RCC via
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The contractor shall parameterise offered substation
control/RTU to operate seamlessly with existing KPLC system.
(9) i.) Control building
The new control building shall be of an approved design as given in drawing and shall
accommodate the new equipment. It shall house:
KPLC metering room housing 132kV Control Panel and KPLC communication centre.
11kV Switchgear and controls (see 11 kV switchgear specifications)
132kV Circuit breaker controls and protection relay panels room
Battery room


Battery chargers and distribution boards
SCADA and Communication equipment for KPA
A washroom, WC, Urinal and Hand Wash Basin
Equipment/utility store
2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND AUXILIARIES
a) Responsibility for electrical control and auxiliaries.
The contractor shall provide all control, indication, alarm and protection devices and all
auxiliary equipment with wiring and interconnecting cable which are integral parts of or are
directly associated with or mounted on the equipment to be supplied under this contract.
b) Operation and control.
The operations, control procedures, monitoring and protective devices for the plants are
described in Equipment Technical Specifications.
The Contractor shall take all measures and furnish all requirements necessary for effecting
the intended method of operation and control.
The station functional control shall be possible in a hierarchic structure as follows:
Supervisory Control from a Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System.
This will be connected to KPA Local Control Centre at the Port and to the KPLC
Regional Control Centre (RCC) at Kipevu.
132kV equipment at the station shall also be under direct Supervisory Control from
the RCC at Kipevu whereas the MV line breakers shall be controlled from the LCC at
the Port. Indications shall be available both at LCC and RCC.
Local Control from the local relay and protection panels or from the instrument
sections on MV switchboards.
Direct Control/Emergency Control from the apparatus itself.
The stations shall function without interruptions even if connection to higher levels fails. A
local/remote switch shall be accommodated on each control position blocking remote
operation but not indication. The position of this switch shall be indicated in the higher levels
of operation.
The control shall include operation of all circuit breakers and motorised disconnectors.
Status indication shall be available in the supervisory system for all HV and MV breakers in
the system as well as busbar voltages, line and transformer load in MVA (plus MW and MVAr
for the 132 kV. For on-load tap changers position indication and raising/lowering of the tap
changer position shall be possible supervisory and remotely.
Direct control of all station switchgear at the respective switchyards/panels shall be possible.
Interlocking devices and automatic change-over systems shall be incorporated in the control
circuits in the quantity needed to guarantee non-interruption and correct sequence of
operation of the equipment. Protective devices shall be supplied in accordance with the
Particular Technical Specifications, and the particular needs of such equipment furnished
with the aim of ensuring a safe and reliable operation of the plants in the event of electrical
and mechanical disturbances or in case of mal-operation by the plant personnel shall be
taken into consideration.
The signals and command to be transmitted are given in Particular Technical Specifications.
All equipment, instruments and devices in the substation necessary for supervisory, remote
and local control as well as for protection, signalling and indication shall be included in the
Bid and hence the Contract, it being understood so that the enumeration found in Scope of
Works, in this respect is indicative but not limiting. Interlocking devices shall be incorporated
in the control circuit to ensure proper sequence and correct operation of the equipment
(breaker, isolator and earth switch).


2.2 DESIGN DATA FOR LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT
Low voltage installation shall be in accordance with EMC directives. The rating and design
criteria for low voltage equipment shall be as follows:
2.2.1 AC system
Parameter Value
1 Rated voltage between phase 415V 3ph 4wire
2 Rated voltage between phase to earth 240V
3 Grounding system PME
4 Frequency 50hz
5 Voltage variation +/-6%
6 Frequency variation +/-5%
7 Power frequency Test Voltage 1 min 3 kV
8 Thermal rating of conductors 120 % of load
9 Max short-circuit Current 31.5 kA

The three-phase supply shall be used for power circuit and the single-phase supply for
lighting, indication, motor controls and similar small power circuits. The single phase
supply within, cubicles and panels shall be transformed down to 110 Volt AC if necessary.
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment provided under this contract is to be capable of
reliable operation at voltages as low as 85% of the rated voltage, and to withstand
continuously up to 110% supply voltage above the rated value of 240V or 415V AC.
AC LV equipment can, after the Principal Electrical Engineers approval, be rated for lower
short circuit current if calculation demonstrates that lower values are applicable at the
place of installation. DC equipment shall be adapted to the actual values at sites as shown
in calculations.
2.2.2 DC system
Parameter Value
1 Rated voltage between phase 110V DC- 2 wire
2 Voltage variation +/-6%
3 Thermal rating of conductors 120 % of load
4 Max short-circuit Current 31.5 kA

DC equipment shall be adapted to the actual values at sites as shown in calculations.
The 110Volt, 2-wire will be used for essential controls indication, alarm, protection relays,
emergency lighting, circuit breaker tripping and closing circuit.
All equipment and apparatus except the electrical protective relays and electronic
equipment shall be capable of satisfactory operation at 80% to 125% of the rated supply
voltage. The electrical protective relays and electronic equipment shall be capable of
satisfactory operation of 85% to 120% of the rated supply voltage. All devices on DC
operating circuit for the circuit breakers shall also be capable of satisfactory operation
even at 130% of the rated working voltage, considering equalizing charge of storage
battery.
DC loads to be supplied from battery and/or battery charger shall be calculated by the
contractor and lists of those loads shall be submitted. The rating of the Station Auxiliary
DC supply will be such that the station DC supply controlled operations will function
normally for at least 10 hours following the loss of Auxiliary AC supply to the Battery
Charger.
2.2.3 230 V AC Un-interrupted supply (UPS)
If specified DC/AC UPS shall supply dedicated computer and measuring equipment.
The supply shall be 230 V IT.


2.3 MOTORS
2.3.1 General
As far as possible and if nothing else is specified, motors shall be three phase squirrel cage
motors complying with IEC 60034 and with dimensions according to IEC 60072. Such
motors shall have the following data:
Parameter Value
1 Continuous rating 130 % of mechanical
load
2 Frequency band for continuous rated
operation without exceeding temperature
class
47 57 Hz

3 Voltage band for continuous rated
operation without exceeding temperature
class
-15 % - +10 %

4 Maximum start current with direct start:-
(a) Motors above 75 kW 5 x In
(b) Motors between 35 and 75 kW 6x In
5 Insulation class F
6 Temperature rise B
7 Direct starting range 75 110 % of Un

Motors shall have sealed ball or roller bearings. If the bearing is not sealed for life it shall
withstand two years of operation before refill of lubricants.
Outdoor motors and motors erected in moist environment shall be equipped with still-
stand heaters controlled from the starter. The heater shall be so dimensioned that
maximum temperature is not reached even if the heater remains connected under
operation.
Motors shall withstand three consequent starts without overheating. Motors over 20 kW
shall be equipped with thermistor based temperature protection.
The three line connections of AC motors shall be brought out to a terminal box sealed from
the motor. The terminal arrangement shall be suitable for the reception of aluminium and
copper cable. A permanently attached diagram or instruction sheet shall be provided
giving the connections for the required direction of rotation. If only one direction of rotation
is permitted, this shall be clearly marked.
Motors to be connected to variable speed drives shall be specially adapted to this.
2.3.2 Special Motors
Other types of motors shall only be used where squirrel cage motors are inconvenient to
use (and even then only after approval by the Principal Electrical Engineer) or if DC motors
are specified. Such motors shall as far as possible follow the requirements set above.
Brushes shall be designed with a constant brush pressure and shall withstand at least
5000 hours of operation before they have to be replaced. It shall always be at least two
brushes in parallel and the brush-holders shall not touch the commutators when the
brushes wear out. The press fingers shall not carry the current and each brush shall be
separately adjustable.
Where single phase motors are used the motors shall be grouped so as to form,
approximately, a balanced three phase load.
2.3.3 Motor control gear
Control gear shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60947, the control gear being rated
according to the duty imposed by the particular application. No replacement of equipment
shall be necessary after short circuit (ref. IEC 60947) Motor contactors shall comply with
IEC 60947 class of intermittent duty 0-3 and utilisation category AC4. The contactors and
their associated apparatus shall be capable of switching the stalled current, and shall have
a continuous current rating of at least 50% greater than the full load current of the motors
they control.


The operating currents of overload trips fitted to motor contactors shall be substantially
independent of ambient temperature conditions, including the effect of direct sunlight on
the enclosure in which the contactors are installed. Where small motors are connected in
groups, the group protection shall be arranged so that it will operate satisfactorily in the
event of a fault occurring on a single motor. Each motor or group of motors shall be
provided with control gear for starting and stopping by hand and automatically. Overload
and single-phasing protection shall be provided. Facilities for padlocking the supply in off
position shall be provided.
2.4 COMPUTER BASED CONTROLLERS
Computer Based Controllers inclusive Programmable Logical Controllers (PLC) can be used
for individual control functions. Such equipment shall be designed for industrial
environment and application in high voltage plants. The control equipment must be fed
from the general station DC supply. The control equipment must be equipped with internal
watchdog function giving external potential free alarm by internal fault. The operational
status shall be frozen by fault or un-normal function so it can be re-established after
restart. The process must be shut down to a safe stage if fatal faults occur in the
controller. Analogue and digital in- and out puts must be galvanic isolated and potential
free and must, together with the enclosure, screen against disturbance from
electromagnetic field occurring by short-circuit, switching over voltages or lightning
discharges. The control equipment shall be tested according IEC 60255 and fulfil relevant
EMC requirements for Industrial Environment.
Digital in- and outputs shall be tested and approved for switching of DC voltages supplied
by the main plant battery (AC values are irrelevant).
Programmes shall be stored in flash ram or similar storage medium and shall not be
destroyed or changed by power failure (i.e. Separate backup battery shall not be used). The
memory shall contain the last program version. All programming of control sequences
shall be documented in a self-explanatory way not requiring special program knowledge for
understanding (function block programming or similar) Communication between various
controllers (and the main control system) can be over fibre optical cable provided
agreement between the contractors. Such communication must use open protocols to be
approved by the Principal Electrical Engineer (P.E.E). The Bidder shall in any case present
a verification of transmission quality.
The Controllers shall be delivered with software and software licences needed for testing,
setting and reconfiguration. If hardware other than laptop is required for this such shall be
included in the supply.

2.5 DESIGN DATA FOR HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT
The rating and design criteria for the HV and MV plant and equipment shall be as follows:-
Item Parameters SYSTEM PARAMETER
132 kV 11kV
1 System description 50 Hz, 3 phase,
3 wire
50 Hz, 3
phase, 3 wire
2 Neutral point earthing Solid earthed Solid earthed
3 Nominal voltage of networks 132 kV 11 kV
4 Highest system voltage as defined by IEC-
60038 *1
145 kV 12 kV
5 Short circuit and earth fault current,
symmetrical r.m.s value (main breaking
current) not less than *2
31.5 kA 31.5 kA
6 Thermal short-circuit current, not less
than 1 second
31.5 kA 31.5kA
7 Dynamic peak current (min making
current) not less than
80 kA 78 kA
8 Rated current of busbars and bus coupler
if not given in Scope of Works, for each
2,000 A 1500 A


individual substation.
9 Minimum rated current of isolating
switches and circuit breakers if not given
in Scope of Works
1,250 A 630A
10 Insulation level according IEC 60071: *3
10(a) Switching surge withstand voltage
Phase-to-earth N/A N/A
Longitudinal impulse component of
combined test
N/A N/A
10(b) Lighting impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50
s K peak)
650 kV 95 kV
10(c) Test voltage at power frequency 1 min dry
and wet. To earth and between phases.
275 kV 38 kV
11 For the design and erection of the conductors in the switchyard the following
minimum clearances shall be observed.
11(a) Phase to earth [mm] 1270 300
11(b) Phase to phase [mm] 1475 250
11(c) Bus bars phase to phase [mm] 3000 *1 1400
11(d) Height to live parts above ground [mm] 5000 2900
11(e) Lowest part of insulators above ground
[mm]
3500 2500
12 Maximum temperature rise of conductors
above ambient temperature (40
0
C)
40
0
C 40
0
C
13 Maximum wind pressure on conductors
and cylindrical objects
430 N/m
2
430 N/m
2

14 Maximum wind pressure on flat surfaces 820 N/m
2
820 N/m
2

15 Minimum nominal creepage distance as
defined in IEC 60815 Table II
25mm kV 25mm/ kV

Note *1)
Ref IEC 60038)
Note *2)
For all current carrying parts the permissible short circuit duration shall be at least 1 second.
Indoor equipment shall be arc tested in accordance with IEC 60298 amendment 2. The dynamic
or momentary short circuit current on which the equipment design shall be based shall be
computed by multiplying the r.m.s value of the symmetrical short circuit current by the factor 1.8
x 2^0.5
Note *3)
Ref IEC 60071)
2.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in Equipment Technical Specifications or Scope of
Works, any equipment, component and assembly shall be designed for the following
service conditions:
Parameter Max Min
Ambient air temperature
Outdoor +40C -1C
Indoor +40C -1C
24 hour average maximum +30C -1C
Ambient temperature for cables in the
ground
+40 C

-1C
Relative humidity 90% 65% 90% 65%
Height above sea level 100 m Below
1100m
Cooling water temperature N/A N/A


EMC Class (IEC 61000) Industrial environments
Seismic coefficient 0.16
Wind pressure on project area of
conductors and cylindrical objects ,
N/m
430 383
Maximum wind pressure on steel
members on 1.5 times projected area
820 N/m

Rainfall conditions
Average, mm/year 1500-2500
Maximum, mm in 24 Hrs 160
Annual mean isokeraunic level Max 180 days
Environmental Pollution Medium to High
Maximum Wind Velocity 120 km/hr (33.3 m/s)

Wherever any of these maximum or 24 hour average temperatures exceed the normal
service condition temperatures of the IEC Recommendations for the relevant equipment, or
of such other standard which is approved to be applied, the permissible temperature rises
of the IEC Recommendations or the standard shall be reduced by the same amount as the
difference between the above figures and the normal service condition temperatures. The
Contractor shall guarantee these reduced temperature rises.
All air cooled equipment shall be cooled with convection (i.e. without fans) provided other
cooling methods are not explicitly allowed for in the specifications.
2.7 SEISMIC COEFFICIENT
The seismic coefficient shall be taken as 0.16

2.8 TROPICALIZATION
In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard shall be given to the humid tropical
conditions under which the plant will be called upon to work. The contractor shall submit
details of his usual practice which have proven satisfactory and which he recommends for
application to the parts of the work, which may be affected by tropical conditions. The
materials and finishes used shall be approved by the Employer. All switchgear and control
cubicles shall also be rodent and vermin proof.

2.9 EARTHING
The earthing grid comprising earthing bus and stub under the outdoor switchgear and the
control building shall be installed by the contractor. The depth shall be 600mm. wiring for
earthing and connections from the equipment, including for all ancillary equipment,
control boards, steel structures, etc shall be installed under this contract. Conductor size
used for main earthing network will be 95mm copper. Main equipment shall be connected
with 95mm copper wire. Auxiliary equipment shall be connected with at least 35mm
copper wire main to main earthing network.
2.10 UNIT OF MEASUREMENT AND LANGUAGE
In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings prepared by the
Contractor, the metric units of measurement shall be used. On drawings or printed
pamphlets where other units have been used, the equivalent metric measurements shall
be added. All documents, correspondence, drawings, reports, schedules instructions, and
nameplate readings of the equipment shall be in the language stated in the Bid Data sheet.

2.11 WORKING STRESS AND DESIGN
(1) General
The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that they will not suffer
damage under the most adverse conditions nor result in deflections and vibrations, which


might adversely affect the operation of the equipment. Mechanisms shall be constructed to
avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion.
The equipment and apparatus shall be designed and manufactured in the best and most
substantial and workmanlike manner with materials best suited to their respective
purpose and generally in accordance with up-to-date recognized standards of good
practice.
All parts which will or might have to be dismantled for the purpose of serving or
replacement shall be assembled with anti-corrosive fasteners. The type, material and size
of all fasteners shall be selected to safely withstand the maximum superimposed direct,
alternating, kinetic and all loads induced by workmen when installing or removing the
fasteners during the life of the equipment.
Suitable structural steel bases or frames shall be provided where necessary to transmit to
the concrete foundations all loads imposed by the various parts of the equipment. Such
bases or frames shall be supplied complete with suitable anchor bolts and shall be so
proportioned that the bearing loads imposed on the concrete foundations will not exceed
50 Kg per square centimetre.
The equipment should be designed to cope with 0.16 G acceleration of seismology on the
centres of gravity.
Whenever possible, all similar parts, including spare parts, shall be made interchangeable.
Such parts shall be of the same materials and workmanship and shall be constructed to
such tolerances as to enable substitution or replacement by spare parts easily and
quickly.
All equipment shall be designed to minimize the risk of fire and consequential damage, to
prevent ingress of vermin, dust and dirt, and accidental contact with electrically energized
or moving parts. The plant shall be capable of continuous operation with minimum
attention and maintenance in the exceptionally severe conditions likely to be obtained in a
tropical climate.
Upon request by the Employer complete information regarding the design assumptions,
loading and operating conditions, deflections and unit stresses used in the design shall be
provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined the specification and drawings herewith,
and unless stated specifically to the contrary in the schedule of proposed conditions and
/or deviations from the specification to have concurred with the design and layout of the
applicable project features as being sufficient to insure reliability and safety in operation,
freedom from undue stresses, adequate drainage and other essentials for a satisfactory
working plant.
(2) Strength and quality
All steel castings and weldings and all site weldings shall be stress-relieved by heat
treatment before machining, and castings shall be stress-relieved again after repair by
welding.
Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout, especially in the design of all parts
subject to alternating stresses or shocks.
2.12 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Materials shall be new; the best of their respective kinds and such as are usual and
suitable for work of like character. All materials shall comply with the latest issues of the
specified standard unless otherwise specified or permitted by the Employer.
Workmanship shall be of the highest class throughout to ensure reliable and vibration-
Operations. The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that the
stresses to which they may be subjected shall not cause distortion, undue wear, or
damage under the most severe conditions encountered in service. All parts shall conform
to the dimensions shown on and shall be built in accordance with approved drawings. All
joints, datum surfaces and meeting components shall be machined and all castings shall
be spot faced for nuts. All machined finished shall be shown on the drawings. All screw,


bolts, studs and nuts and threads for pipe shall conform to the latest standards of the
International Organization for Standardization covering these components and shall all
conform to the standards for metric sizes.
The Contractor shall never incorporate any standards or size system by his own account,
regardless of that accepted and incorporated in this Contract. All materials and works that
have cracks, flaws or other defects or inferior workmanship will be rejected by the
Employer. All defective materials shall be promptly removed from the site by the
Contractor, and inferior workmanship shall be cut out and replaced.

(1) Standard Specifications
The design, materials, manufacture, testing, inspection and performance shall, unless
otherwise specified in the Special requirements of these Specifications, conform to the
authorized standards of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) or equivalent
national standards. The Contractor shall include a statement of the standards, intended to
be used.
(2) Assembly
Necessary items of equipment shall be assembled in the factory prior to shipment and type
tests shall be performed by the contractor as may be required to demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the Employer the adequacy of equipment and its component parts. All tests
should simulate normal operating conditions as closely as possible. All dismantled parts
shall be properly match marked and doweled to ensure correct assembly in the field.
(3) Casting
Casting shall be true to pattern, of workmanlike finish and of uniform quality and
condition, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks or other
injurious defects, shall be satisfactorily cleaned for their intended purpose.
Major defect on castings shall not be repaired, plugged, or welded without permission of
the Employer. Such permission will be given only when the defects are small and do not
adversely affect the Strength, use or merchantability of the castings. The Contractor will
give the distinction between major and minor defects. Excessive segregation of impurities
or alloys at critical points in a casting will be a cause for its rejection. The largest fillets
compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a change in section occurs. All
castings shall be stress-relieved before machining and again after repair by welding.
Plates to be joined by welding shall be accurately cut to size and rolled by pressure to the
proper curvature, which shall be continuous from the edges.
Flattening in the curvature along the edges with correction by blows will not be allowed.
The dimensions and shape of the edges to be jointed shall be such as to allow thorough
fusion and complete penetration, and the edges of plates shall be properly formed to
accommodate the various welding conditions.
(4) Forging
The ingots from which the forgings are made shall be cast in metal moulds.
The workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and the forgings shall be free from
all defects affecting their strength and durability, including seams, pipes, flaws, cracks,
scales, fins, porosity, hard spots, excessive non-metallic inclusions and segregations.
The largest fillets compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a change in
section occurs. All finished surfaces of forgings shall be smooth and free from tool marks.
The forging shall be clearly stamped with the heat number in such locations to be readily
observed when the forging is assembled in a completed unit.


(5) Welding
Wherever welding is specified or permitted, a welding process, including stress relieve
treatment as required if necessary, conforming to an appropriate and widely recognized
professional standard shall be used. All welders and welding operators shall be fully
qualified by such a standard. After the welding process has been approved by the
Employer, the Contractor shall record it on a special drawing, which shall thereupon
become one of the drawings of the Contract.
Radiograph inspection shall be carried out by the Contractor when required by the
standards, Specifications, or the design criteria employed. All welds which, in the opinion
of the Employer, may be subject to the full stress induced in the adjacent plate, or which
in the opinion of the Employer, do not appear to conform to the welding standard shall be
radiographed when required.
All defects in welds shall be chipped out to sound metal and such areas shall be
magnetically or ultrasonically tested to ensure that the defect has been completely
removed before repair welding.
Plates to be joined by welding shall be accurately cut to size and rolled by pressure to the
proper curvature, which shall be continuous from the edge.
Flattening in the curvature along the edges with correction by blows will not be allowed.
The dimensions and shape of the edges to be jointed shall be such as to allow through
fusion and complete penetration, and the edges of plates shall be properly formed to
accommodate the various welding conditions.
The surfaces of the plates adjacent to the edges to be welded shall be thoroughly cleaned
of all rust, grease and scale to bright metal. All important weldings shall be stress-relieved
by heat treatment before machining.

(6) Galvanizing
Unless specifically mentioned to the contrary, iron and steel shall be galvanized in the
factory after fabrication. The zinc coating shall be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from
spangle as possible. Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process for all parts other
than steel wires. All steel wires shall be galvanized by a recognized trade standard.
The minimum quantities of zinc coating shall be 350 gram/m2 for bolts and nuts and 550
gram/m2 for all other parts except steel wires, unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents. The uniformity of zinc coating, tested by dipping surface shall not be exposed
until the surface has been dipped four times for bolts and nuts, and six times for all parts.
The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or adversely
affect the mechanical properties of the materials.
Special treatment during galvanizing to prevent the formation of White rust during
shipment or storage is required. The Tenderer shall state in his Tender the treatment to be
used.
(7) Colour Standard
Each item of equipment shall be painted in accordance with the Clause 3.7.21.The final
colour of each item shall be decided by the employer after contract.
(8) Nameplate
To facilitate operation and maintenance it is very important that all equipment, valves,
instruments, switches, pipeline, etc., shall be clearly identified by nameplates showing the
function and proper use of each item. Such identification shall be in English and must be
intelligently and carefully designed to minimize errors and to avoid mal-operation in
operation or maintenance.


The nameplates shall be permanently legible, clearly worded, weather proof when outdoors
and securely mounted in conspicuous and logical locations.
A table showing materials, dimensions, location, mounting and wording shall be submitted
to the Employer for approval.
(9) Cabling and Wiring
The conductor used in substation and switching station shall be continuous between
outlets, and no junction shall be made except within outlets or junction boxes. The
conductor shall be drawn through ducts or conduits after they have been cleaned. Oil or
grease shall not be used as a lubricant for the drawing operation, but an approved
compound may be used for this purpose.
Joints in wiring shall be compressed and insulated with PVC tape or approved connectors
may be used.
(10) Conduits
Rigid steel conduit shall be galvanized inside and outside, or enamelled inside.It shall be of
a minimum thickness of 2.3mm and have a minimum inside diameter of 16mm.
(11) Conduits Installation
Conduits shall be concealed within the walls, ceilings and floors where possible. Exposed
runs of conduit shall be supported within a space of not more than 150cm. It shall be
installed perpendicular to walls, structural members and ceilings.
Only threaded joints shall be used. Conduit, which were crushed or deformed, shall not be
used in the works.
Conduit shall be installed in such a manner as to ensure that the inside remains in a dry
condition. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all sheet-steel outlets, junction and pull
boxes with galvanized locknuts and bushings.
Exposed conduits shall be finished with the same colour paints as the finished colour of
the wall or ceiling against which the conduits are placed.
All joints and terminations shall comply with the weatherproof or explosion proof
requirements as applicable.
2.13 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
(1) Corona and radio interference
Switchgear shall electrically be designed to avoid local corona formation and discharge
likely to cause radio interference, and shall be designed to mechanically endure short-
circuit current without thermal and mechanical failure for one (1) second.
The design of all line conductor fittings, vibration dampers, insulator fittings, etc. shall
avoid sharp corners or projections which would produce high electrical stress in normal
operation.
The design of adjacent metal parts and melting surfaces shall be such as to prevent
corrosion of the contact surfaces and to maintain good electrical contact under service
conditions.
Particular care shall be taken during manufacture of conductors and fittings and during
subsequent handling to ensure smooth surface free from abrasion.
(2) Insulators and Fittings
All porcelain insulators and bushings for outdoor equipment shall be brown grazed.
The resin insulators for indoor equipment may be of the inherent colour of the resin.
All fittings shall be malleable iron hot-dipped galvanized alloy.


All the insulators and bushings shall have impressed thereon, before firing the glaze, the
name, initial or trade mark of the manufacturer, the year of manufacture and the
mechanical strength.

(3) Enclosure

The enclosures for switchgear, control and relaying equipment shall be dead-front, floor-
standing or wall-mounting, rigid welded steel frames, completely enclosed by metal sheets
and suitable for indoor or outdoor installation.
The completed sections shall have provisions for lifting and ample strength to withstand
all stresses incidental to shipping, installation and operation without distortion or other
damage.
The floor-standing type enclosure shall be bolted at the bottom to suitable steel channel
and shall be of vermin-proof construction.
Suitable terminal blocks shall be provided for all outgoing power and control cables.
All cable terminals shall generally be located for bottom entry and connections.
The enclosure shall be painted in conformity with the requirements specified in Clause
3.7.21.
The degree of protection of the enclosures shall be IP 41 for indoor switchgear, IP 54 for
outdoor switchgear and IP 51 for indoor control and relaying equipment conforming to IEC
529 and IEC 144.
Interior illumination lamps operated by door switches shall be provided for each enclosure
as much as applicable. At least one 240V convenience outlet of Kenya use shall be
provided for each enclosure at convenient location.
Space heaters for 240-volt A.C. shall be provided inside the enclosures to prevent moisture
condensation. A manual switch to control the heaters shall be provided in the enclosures.
(4) Measuring Instruments
All measuring instruments shall be of flush-mounted, back-connected, dust-proof and
heavy-duty switchboard type. Each measuring instrument shall have a removable cover,
either transparent or with a transparent window. Each instrument shall be suitable for
operation with the instrument transformers shown on the drawing under both normal and
short-circuit conditions.
For analog type instruments, scale plates shall be of a permanent white circular or
rectangular finish with black pointer and markings. The scale range shall be determined
from the current transformer and voltage transformer ratios.
All measuring instruments of analog type shall be approximately 110mm enclosures and
shall be provided with clearly readable long scale, approximately 240 degrees.
The maximum error shall be not more than one and a half (1.5) percent of full-scale range.
(5) Indicating Lamp Assemblies
Indicating lamp assemblies for the enclosures shall be of the switchboard type, insulated
for 110-volt D.C. service, with appropriately coloured lens and integrally mounted resistors
for 110-volt service. The lens shall be made of a material, which will not be softened by the
heat from the lamps.
Red indicating lamps shall be used for ON position and green lamps for OFF position.
(6) Nameplates and Escutcheon Plates
Each cubicle, panel, meter, switch and device shall be provided with a nameplate or
escutcheon plate for identification. Each equipment shall be provided with a rating plate
containing the necessary information specified in the relevant IEC standards.


The plates shall be made of weatherproof and corrosion-proof materials and shall not be
deformed under the service conditions at the site. The entries on the plates shall be
indelibly marked by engraving to black letter on a white background. The language of all
plates shall be English.
(7) Wiring
(a) General
All wiring inside the switchboards shall be done with PVC insulated wire, not less than
2.5mm2 except for electronic devices. A suitable wiring duct system shall be installed for
all inter-panel and front-to-rear panel wiring which will provide easy access for inspection
and replacement. As far as possible all wiring shall be installed in wiring ducts.
All wiring from hinged door panels to the fixed panels shall be done with flexible conductor
of equivalent size.
All multicore cables shall be steel armoured.
Wiring between terminals of the various devices shall be point to point. Splices or tee
connection will not be acceptable. Wire runs shall be neatly tucked or clamped.
Exposed wiring shall be kept to a minimum, but where used shall be formed into compact
groups suitably bound together and properly supported.
Instrument transformer secondary circuits shall be grounded only at the first panel
entered, and shall not be grounded at any point or outside of the enclosures.
Cable supports and clamp type terminal lugs shall be provided for all incoming and
outgoing power wiring terminated at each panel. All wire shall be marked near each
terminal end with circuit or wire designation. These markers shall be of an approved type
and permanently attached to the conductor insulation.
(b) Phase arrangement
The standard phase arrangement when facing the front of the panel shall be R-S-T-N, and
R-N-S from the left to right, from top to bottom, and front to back for A.C three-phase and
single-phase circuits and N-P from left to right, P-N from top to bottom and front to back
for D.C polarity. All relays, instruments, other devices, buses and equipment involving
three-phase circuit shall be arranged and connected in accordance with the standard
phase arrangement where possible.
(c) Wiring colour code
All wires shall have ferrules at all terminations to distinguish each terminal.
(d) Phase and polarity colour code
Following coloured ferrules shall be provided on each wire in order to identify phase and
polarity.
Phase and Polarity Colour
A.C., three-phase, First phase Red
Second phase Yellow
Third phase Blue
A.C., single-phase, First line Red
Second line Yellow
Neutral Black
Grounded Green with yellow stripe
Auxiliary Supply Positive Red
Negative Black
High and medium voltage versus control and measuring cables 800 mm
Low voltage power cables versus control and measuring cables 400 mm
Necessary EMC consideration shall be taken in accordance with EMC standards.
Additionally, cables for extra low power, i.e. mA and mV circuits and cables connected to
low power solid state electronic circuits, shall be laid in separate sheet steel trays with


covers. The DC trip and AC voltage supplies and wiring to main protective gear shall be
segregated from those for back-up protection to the greatest extent possible.
Single-phase power cables shall be run in trefoil configuration, single-phase DC power
cables shall be run in parallel. Special care shall be taken so that closed magnetic circuits
do not form around single phase cables.
Cables below 25 mm cross section shall be copper. Larger cross sections may be
aluminium. Minimum cross sections shall be as follows:
Measuring cables for current 4.0 mm
Control and other measuring cables 2.5 mm
Power cables according 120 % max load current
All cross section must be checked against max load current, allowable burden on
measuring transformers, short circuit values, voltage drop, protection requirements and
selectivity.
The cables shall be marked with item designation in both ends as well as by entrances in
enclosures. The cable marking shall be fire proof.
Cables shall be laid in full runs and not spliced unless approved by Project Manager.
Termination of multi-stranded conductor ends shall be with a suitable crimped thimble as
specified above. All other cable lugs or similar shall be of crimped type adapted to the
cable type and cross-section used. The tools used should be special approved for the lugs
and cable type used.
The cable suppliers instructions regarding handling and bending radius shall be followed.
Fibre optic cables shall not contain metallic material and be so laid that they have proper
mechanical protection. I.e. cables not constructed for embedding shall be laid in protective
tubes.
2.14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Prior to any of the work being energized, the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying
and fixing in prominent positions near to each item of the work concerned, large
temporary signs giving clear warning of danger in areas which might previously have been
regard as safe.
During erection and tests the Contractor shall provide all temporary scaffolding ladders,
platforms with toe boards and handrails as required for safe and convenient access of
workmen, inspectors and other authorized persons. All dangerous opening or holes shall
be provided with handrails or covers. Measures shall be taken to protect workmen from
falling. The maximum possible safety shall be afforded to personnel directly engaged on
this Contract or to those who frequent the working area or to those who in the normal
course of their occupation find it necessary to utilize temporary works erected by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that he has facilities for conducting a safety programme
commensurate with the works on the site. He shall submit in writing a proposed
comprehensive safety programme to the Employer for approval prior to the start of
construction operation on the site. The Contractor shall designate a competent supervisory
employee to carry out his safety programme.
2.15 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND PAINTING
(1) Embedded Steelwork
All parts to ultimately be buried in concrete shall be cleaned and protected before leaving
the manufacturers plant by cement wash or other approved method. Before being
installed they shall be thoroughly desiccated and cleared of all rust and adherent matter,
or be treated according to a method approved by the Employer. Such cleaning or
treatment shall not detrimentally affect the strength or final operation and function of the
equipment.

(2) Steel exposed to atmosphere
All machined parts or bearing surfaces shall be cleaned and protected from corrosion
before leaving the manufacturers plant by the application of an approved rust preventive


coating, or a peelable plastic film. Where the latter is impracticable, such parts shall be
heavily covered with high melting point grease. After erection such parts shall be cleaned
with solvent and lapped or polished bright.
All parts, other than machined parts, which will be exposed after erection shall be
thoroughly cleaned and galvanized or given with two coats of best quality approved primer
and one coat of best quality approved finish paint before leaving the manufacturers plant
and a further one coat of paint of an approved quality and colour after erection and
touching up on the site, except such apparatus as panels and instruments which shall be
finished painted under approved procedures.
All outside panel surfaces shall be primed, filed where necessary, and given not less than
two coats of synthetic undercoat. The finishing coat for the outdoor installations shall be
gloss paint and for the indoor installations shall be a semi-gloss paint.
The inside surface of the enclosures shall have two prime coats and one finishing coat of
light cream colour.
Primer shall be applied to surfaces prepared in accordance with the plant manufacturers
instructions. The surface shall be wiped clean immediately prior to applying the paint. The
primer and finish coats of paint shall be applied using the methods and equipment
recommended by the manufacturer.
The internal surface of all pipelines shall be cleaned out by the approved methods before
installation and again prior to commissioning, to ensure freedom from dirt, rust, scale,
welding slag, etc. All exposed pipes shall be painted with an identifying colour after
erection is completed. The colour code system shall be approved by the Employer.
All steel surfaces, which are in permanent contact with oil, shall be given three coats of
approved oil resistant.
No painting or protection is required for finished or unfinished stainless steel parts.
The final colour of all equipment, frames for meters and relays, and switch handle shall be
approved by the Employer but the Contractor shall propose a colour scheme for the
equipment and devices and shall submit colour chips or paint samples. A colour chip shall
be included with the approved colour schedule for each type of finish to be applied at the
site.
The humid and tropical conditions shall be taken into account on selection of the paints
and painting procedure.
2.16 EMBEDDED METAL WORK, OPENING, ETC
The Contractor shall supply and install all enters, fasteners, embedded metalworks,
piping, conduit and sleeves associated with and required for the equipment being provided
and installed under this Contract, except as otherwise provided in the specifications.
The Contractor shall indicate the location and details of foundations, openings, blockout
and all embedded components on his drawings and shall be responsible for the
completeness and accuracy of his drawings and the information supplied to others.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy and accuracy of location of all
embedded components supplied by him.
The foundation bolts, embedded steel parts, anchors, braces, posts, supports, shims, etc.,
and all metal works as may be required for temporary or final support of anchorage of the
equipment shall be provided and installed by the Contractor as part of this contract.
Any metal work, which is to be built into the concrete foundations, shall not be painted
nor coated unless otherwise approved.
2.17 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish spare parts as listed in the bill of quantities.
The spare parts supplied shall be packed or treated in such a manner as to be suitable for
storage under the climate conditions at the Site for a period of not less than two years, and
each part shall be clearly marked with the description and purpose on the Spare parts so


provided shall be delivered into such stores as may be designated by the Employer.
Delivery of spare parts will not be deemed to be complete until the packages have been
opened by the Contractor, their contents checked by a representative of the Employer and
the articles reprotected and repacked by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer,
or assembled into units at the employers option. The method of package and package
materials shall be suitable for the satisfactory re-package.

2.18 PACKING
Each item shall be packed properly or protected for shipment from the place of
manufacture to the site.
Each crate of package shall contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope and a copy in
triplicate shall be forwarded to the Employer prior to dispatch. All items of material shall
be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing list.
All cases, packages, etc, shall be clearly marked on the outside to indicate the total weight,
to show where the weight is bearing and the correct position of the slings and shall bear
an identification mark relating them to the appropriate shipping documents. Cases, which
cannot be marked as above, shall have metal tags with the necessary marking on them.
The metal tags shall be securely attached to the package with strong steel wire or
equivalent.
Long pieces of steel angles shall be packed in bundles and properly tied together by an
approved method and care taken to ensure that they are robust and not of excessive
length and weight for handling in transit.
Short pieces of steel angles and steel plates shall be bolted or wired together through holes
and packed in stout timber cases.
Bolts, nuts, washers and fillers shall be bagged in sealed vinyl and packed in steel cans.
The cans shall bear the contents and be crated together.
Packing together of components of dissimilar metals shall not be acceptable.
Conductors and overhead earth wire shall be packed on drums stoutly constructed of good
quality steel. Drums shall be securely battened around the perimeter to give maximum
protection to the conductor and the earth wire and correct direction of rolling indicated
with an arrow in a manner not easily removable.
The first layer of conductors or earth wire on drums shall be secured to the hub in manner
avoiding damage to subsequent layers.
All drums shall be protected from deterioration on site by termite or fungus attack by an
approved impregnation treatment at the works before dispatch.
The Employer shall reserve the right to inspect and approve the equipment and the
packing before the items are dispatched. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for
ensuring that the packing is suitable for transit and such inspection will not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for any loss or damage due to faulty packing.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to improve and to reinforce the road facilities
when the weight and dimension of the cargo exceed the above specification.
All packing materials shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
from the Site at the earliest opportunity and disposed off to the satisfaction of the
Employer.
The following information must be clearly stencilled or printed on each packing case, crate,
cask, drum, bundle or loose piece, care being taken that the number and other particulars
on each package agree with those entered in the packing list accompanying the Invoice:
Employer's Identity
Supplier's Identity
Destination
Contract No.


Package No.
Item Code
Weight, dimensions
Sub-Project (Plant Identity).
The marking shall be durable. The marking shall be upon the body of the package.
Marking upon a batten fastened on the case, etc. shall not be used.

2.19 DELIVERY
The Contractor shall deliver all materials and equipment including Contractors equipment
supplied under the Contract to the site in adequate time for its preparation and erection
according to the Schedule.
Each notification shall include a complete shipping list of the contents of each package to
be delivered and shall indicate the anticipated date of delivery and the serial number for
each component to be used for identification and evidence of the insurance cost arranged
for it.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the reception on Site of all deliveries for the
purpose of the Contract.
2.20 CLEANING AND MATERIAL DISPOSAL
The Contractor shall at all times during the course of the work prevent the accumulation
on the premises of debris caused by the Works. Whenever it is necessary, in the opinion of
the Employer and in all events upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall remove
from the premises all temporary buildings and facilities, tools, scaffolding, surplus
materials, debris and all work and materials condemned by the Employer and shall leave
the premises in a clean, safe and sanitary condition. The Contractor shall prevent at any
time unnecessary accumulation and scattering of debris, materials, tools and equipment
around the premises, and shall conduct the work in an orderly manner. In case the
Contractor fails to comply with the above provision, or in case of dispute, the employer
shall have the right to order removal by others of debris, materials, tools or equipment,
and to charge the cost of such removal and/or repairs to the Contractor.
2.21 PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS
Within one month after the Date of Commencement, the Contractor shall prepare his
construction programme in a Software form covering the design, manufacture, delivery,
erection testing and commissioning of the Works, in sufficient detail to define the various
sections of the Works, including parts to be supplied by the Contractor. A hard copy shall
be submitted to the Employer for approval.
Upon approval of the programme by the Employer, it should thereafter be referred to as
the approved Construction Programme and shall become a part of the Contract.
Monthly progress reports shall be provided by the Contractor, indicating the actual state of
progress of all items during the course of manufacture and work at the Site, in the form
given by the Employer.
A brief weekly report on the construction work at the Site shall also be submitted by the
Contractor to the Employer.
From time to time during the execution of Contract, the Employer is empowered to call
meetings, either in his home office or at the manufacturers offices or Employers Nairobi
office or at the Site, as he deems necessary, for the purpose of co-ordination and control. If
required by the Employer, responsible representatives of the Contractor shall attend such
meetings at his own expense.
In executing the Approved Construction Programme of this Contract, the Contractor shall
co-operate with the Employer and other contractors on the Site in order to effect the timely
completion of the Project as a whole.
The Progress Plans shall at least contain the following milestones:
Essential information delivered from Employer


Documentation for approval from Contractor to Employer
Release of factory documentation
Factory Tests
Shipment
Site ready for erection
Start erection
Ready for pre-commissioning
Ready for commissioning
Test run
Taking over
Submittal of final documentation
2.22 DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR
Before starting manufacture of the equipment, dimensioned drawings and data showing all
significant details of the equipment and materials to be used shall be submitted to the
Employer for approval, at least 2 weeks before the commencement of the manufacturing
process.
These drawings shall be submitted within the times mentioned hereunder, measured in
calendar month from the Date of commencement. The drawings shall be modified as
necessary if requested by the Employer, and resubmitted for final approval.
When the Contractor prepares his construction schedule, as required herein, he shall
make allowance for the drawing approval time and indicate it on the schedule. A period of
at least six weeks should be allowed for such approval after receipt by the Employer.
Claims or extensions of time will not be approved if they are related to the late submission
of drawings to the Employer or if they involve delays caused by drawings not being
approved by the Employer.
After approval of drawings by the Employer, the Contractor shall supply the approved
drawings to the Employer according to the details given below.
It is to be understood, however, that approval of the drawings will not relieve the
Contractor of any responsibility in connection with the work.
All drawings submitted for approval or sent to the Employer for any other reason shall be
sent by courier.
After items of the work have been manufactured and erected, complete sets of prints and
negatives of the finally corrected drawings shall be furnished according to the following
table.
The following number of drawings to be submitted to the Employer shall be as follows:
To the Employer, during the work:
Drawing for approval 5 copies
Approved drawings 3 copies
After completion of the work (final drawings):
AutoCAD (latest version) 2 CDs with AutoCAD Licensed software
Complete set of bound prints (as built) 6 sets
All Protection and Control drawings shall be done on A4 paper. The function of each
drawing shall be clearly indicated. Related drawings shall be arranged sequentially, have
the same drawing number but different sheet numbers. The drawings shall include the
following;
AC Schematics
DC Schematics
Functional Drawings
Layout Drawings


Panel equipment wiring and cable terminations and schedules.
Relays and accessories list.
Protection and Control Software drawings shall be done in the latest AutoCAD release
edition.
Additional copies of particular drawings are to be provided if required, at the Contractors
expense.
2.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for approval, general instructions concerning
the correct manner of assembling, operating and maintaining the work.
This instruction manual shall be submitted immediately following final approval of the
drawings.
When finally approved, six (6) copies of the instruction manual shall be furnished to the
Employer. The contractor shall ensure that his erection supervisor has a copy in his office
at the Site.
The instruction manual shall describe in detail the erection procedure and use of all
erection equipment and measurement devices. The method for assembling, adjusting,
operating and dismantling of each device, system and machine shall be described and
illustrated. The maintenance details of each component shall also be described, including
the frequency of inspections and lubrication.
The instruction manual shall include a separate and complete section describing the
normal and emergency operating procedures for the control of the switching equipment,
and shall include explanatory diagrammatic drawings of equipment to facilities
understanding the description.
The Contractor shall, in preparing the instruction manual, take into account the lack of
experience and familiarity of the operators with this type of equipment.
The manual shall give specific information as to oil, grease, or any other materials needed
for maintenance operations. This information shall include brand names and
manufacturers numbers or designations, for at least two brands available in Kenya,
preferably manufactured in Kenya.
The manual shall include a complete list of all drawings prepared for the Contract, spare
parts list, and a parts list for each component of the equipment. The parts list shall apply
only to the equipment supplied and shall not include general reference or description of
similar equipment which is of the same model but different only in detail. The manual
shall be prepared on the English language.
2.24 TEST PROCEDURE INSTRUCTIONS
2.24.1 Electrical equipment:
(1) The manufacturer shall be responsible for performing or for having performed all the
required tests specified in this specification. Tenderer shall confirm the manufacturers
capabilities in this regard when submitting tenders. Any limitations shall be clearly
specified.
(2) Tender documents shall be accompanied by copies of Type test and Routine test reports
& certificates for similar rated equipment for the purpose of tender evaluation. Type test
reports & certificates shall be certified by the National Standards and Testing Authority
(NSTA) of the country of origin. Where a body other than NSTA is used to certify the
type-test reports, a copy of the certificate of accreditation shall be attached.
Current contact information of the testing and certification authority shall be provided.
Tenderer should note that this requirement is mandatory.
(3) Upon completion of the manufacturing process, routine tests shall be carried out as per
the specified standard for each equipment. In addition to these tests, Impulse,
temperature rise and short-circuit tests (where applicable) shall be carried out and the
results endorsed by the NSTA of the country of manufacture.
(4) Routine test reports shall be completed for equipment and made available before the
inspection by KPA representatives.


(5) A detailed list & contact addresses of previous customers shall be submitted with the
tender. The manufacturer shall indicate the monthly & annual production capacity and
experience in the production of the type and size of equipment he is offering. List of
workshop tools and equipment shall also be appended.
(6) The Contractor shall prepare and execute a testing program which will establish that
specified requirements have been met and that the items furnished and installed will
perform as specified and required.
(7) The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for approval, during or immediately
following the submission of drawings, testing programmes describing each test to be
performed during commissioning and performance tests. The programme shall establish
the sequence of the test, the equipment preparation and operation procedures to be
followed and the detailed procedure for conducting each test. The programme shall also
contain performance guarantees, design values, technical particulars, or other criteria
and distributed in the same manner as the drawings.
(8) A file containing a list of all the Commissioning Tests carried out and the results obtained
for all the Protection and Control schemes and the primary equipment, including system
balanced and unbalanced fault analysis for relay coordination and scheme settings shall
be submitted to the Employer prior to the commissioning of the project. It is mandatory
that these group tests shall be witnessed by the Employers representative.
(9) Three copies of the Commissioning Report shall be submitted to the Employer.

2.25 ATTENDANCE OF EMPLOYERS REPRESENTATIVE AT FACTORY TEST AND
TRAINING

The Contractor shall arrange for two Employers staff members to witness tests of major
items of equipment listed below in the manufacturers plant. All routine tests shall be
carried out in the presence of the Employers representatives. The representatives shall
approve shipment of the equipment if they are satisfied that the requirements of the
specification are fully met. An engineer from KPLC will also be invited to witness the tests
for equipment that will be handed over to KPLC.
It is anticipated that the visit shall not exceed five (5) days
(1) 132 kV and 11 kV circuit breakers
(2) 132 kV and 11kV outdoor isolators and earth switches
(3) Control and Protection panels
(4) 132 kV Current transformers
(5) 132 kV Capacitive Voltage Transformers and 132 kV voltage transformers.
(6) 132/11 kV Power Transformers
(7) OPGW conductor
(8) Communication terminal equipment.
During the attendance, the Contractor shall give the Employers persons a brief
explanation on design, manufacture, operation and maintenance of the materials and
equipment. Protection Schemes philosophy and settings shall be explained.

TRAINING
(1) High voltage switchgear equipment
(2) Control and protection equipment
(3) Telecommunication Equipment
The training on the operation of the high voltage switchgear equipment, control, protection
and communication equipment shall be conducted for 2 Employers staff for duration of
not less than 5 days.

2.26 PHOTOGRAPHS
The Contractor shall keep photographic records of the progress of each phase of the work.
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit three sets of colour photographs
with explanatory description adequately edited in book form to the Employers satisfaction.


The Contractor shall provide himself with necessary access to the work and temporary
facilities to photograph his part of the work at any stage of construction or manufacture.
3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUBSTATION
3.1 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Scope

This subsection covers the design, manufacture, testing before shipment, delivery to site,
erection and testing at the site of the following:

3.2 132kV CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
3.2.1 SCOPE
This specification is for three pole operated outdoor 132kV circuit breaker together with
controls and ancillary equipment.
3.2.2 REFERENCES
The following documents were referred to during the preparation of this specification, and
may be referred to, in case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
Unless otherwise specified, the latest revision, edition and amendments shall apply.
IEC 56: High Voltage alternating current circuit breakers.
IEC 144: Degree of protection of enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control gear.
BS 5311: Specification for A.C circuit breakers of rated voltage above 1 kV.
3.2.3 CONSTRUCTION
The circuit breakers shall be single pole operated, out-door type, SF6 gas insulated and
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 56 and/or BS 5311.
The circuit breaker shall be live tank type.
All the three poles of circuit breakers shall be operated by local electrical and
remote/electrical from the mechanism in the housing.
The circuit breaker shall have SF6 gas for electrical interrupting medium.
The SF6 gas shall comply with the requirement of IEC 376 and be suitable for use in the
circuit breaker when it is operated under the service and system conditions.
Sufficient gas shall be provided for filling the circuit breaker at installation with additional
20% for any losses.
When the circuit breaker is in closed position a rapid fall in the SF6 gas pressure, to a
level below that at which safe operation is possible shall not result in tripping the circuit
breaker.
A remote alarm indication to signal this condition shall be provided. A second stage drop
in gas shall block closing and tripping of the circuit breaker.
Insulation creepage distance shall not be less than 25mm per kV of rated voltage between
phases.

3.2.4 OPERATING MECHANISM
The operating mechanism shall be suitable for mounting at the circuit breaker supporting
structure, and below the circuit breaker in a weather-proof, dust-proof, vermin-proof and
well ventilated housing.
The degree of protection shall be class IP 54 as per the requirement of IEC 144.
Operating duty shall be standard and operating mechanism shall be trip free during the
entire closing sequence.
Operating mechanism shall be provided with either motor wound spring or pressure
actuated mechanism with provision for hand charge.
Motor operating voltage shall be 110 Volts D.C.


A set of at least ten normally closed and ten normally open spare potential free contacts
shall be provided for remote electrical indication as well as electrical interlocking and shall
be wired to a terminal block in the housing.
Potential free contacts shall be provided for alarming spring charge failure or control oil
pressure low. Potential free contacts shall be provided for alarms for SF6 gas low and SF6
Trip Block.
A minimum of twenty (20) spare terminals shall be provided for connection to the current
and voltage transformers.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with Local/Remote selector switch. The selection of
local operation shall inhibit the operation of the circuit breaker from any remote source
and selection of remote inhibits operation from local operation.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with a local switch for Open/Neutral/Close
Operation.
Mechanically operated indication to show the status of the circuit breaker operations
(open/close and springs charged/discharged) shall be provided.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with suitable terminals for connecting clamps for up
to 3 outside diameter copper tubes.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with means to prevent contact pumping while the
closing circuit remains energized, should be circuit breaker either fail to latch or be tripped
during closing due to operation of the protective relays.
Mechanical interlock key arrangement shall be provided on the mechanism such that it
will not be possible to withdraw the interlock key with circuit breaker in closed position.
For the 132 kV line circuit breakers, the mechanical interlock keys from each pole shall be
such that they will be closed in a block of 4 keys so that the 4th key only come out when
the other three are on in the block. That 4th key will be used to inter lock the 2 separately.
For the 132kV transformer circuit breaker, the mechanical interlock key will come out only
when the circuit breaker is off and this key will be used to operate the 132kV transformer
bay disconnectors.
Circuit breaker shall be provided with duplicate trip coils in order to facilitate duplication
of protection tripping, where required.
The circuit breaker shall have separate operating mechanism for each pole.
From local position (only on middle phase) the operation of all the 3 poles should be
possible with CLOSE/NEUTRAL/TRIP Switch.


3.2.5 RATINGS
The circuit breaker shall be of the following ratings:

Nominal System Voltage 132 kV
Highest Voltage of equipment 145 kV
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated normal current 2000 Amps
Rated short-time withstand current 40kA
Rated duration of short circuit 3 Sec.
Rated short circuit making current 80kA
First pole to clear factor 1.5
Operating sequence 0-0.3 sec CO 3 min - CO
Auxiliary D.C Voltage for closing & tripping coils 110 V d.c.
Auxiliary A.C Voltage 415/240 V, 50 Hz
Impulse withstand voltage 750 kV peak (1.2/50s, dry)
One minute power frequency withstand voltage 325 kV r.m.s. (50Hz 60s, wet)
Creepage distance of insulator 3625 mm
Minimum clearance between phases 1475mm
Minimum clearance to earth 1270mm
3.2.5 TESTS
The manufacturer shall be responsible for performing or for having performed all the
required tests specified in this specification. Tenderers shall confirm the manufacturers
capabilities in this regard when submitting tenders. Any limitations shall be clearly
specified.
Type and routine tests shall be carried out as per the requirement of IEC 56.
Test certificates issued by a recognized short-circuit testing station, certifying the
operation of the circuit breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of
the circuit breaker shall be submitted.
Tender documents shall be accompanied by copies of Type test and Routine test
certificates for similar rated equipment. These certificates shall be certified by the National
Testing or the National Standards Institute of the country of origin.
A detailed list & contact addresses of previous customers shall be submitted with the
tender.
The manufacturer shall indicate the monthly & annual production capacity and
experience in the production of the equipment he is offering.

3.2.6 DRAWING AND MANUALS

Two sets of operational manuals and drawing detailing dimensions, panel layout, wiring
and schematic shall be provided.

3.2.7 PACKING AND INFORMATION

The circuit breaker and associated components shall be packed in a manner as to protect
it from any damage in transportation and repeated handling.
Each assembly and package of items associated with the circuit breaker shall be suitably
marked.
Where an item includes a number of components to form a complete assembly, all
component parts shall be included in one composite package which shall be firmly
strapped and bound together.
Draft design and construction drawings shall be submitted to KPA before the
manufacturing of circuit breakers commence. KPA undertake to submit their comments or
approval for the drawings within three weeks of receiving the draft copies.
Sufficient relevant technical details and drawings shall be submitted for the purpose of
Tender Evaluation. Tenders which do not meet this requirement will be considered
nonresponsive.


To facilitate comprehensive technical evaluation of the tenders, a clause by clause
statement of compliance with the specification shall be submitted with relevant
manufacturers specification sheets, catalogues and brochure.
3.2.8 TECHNICAL SCHEDULES
The appropriate Technical guarantees in appropriate Technical schedule section shall be
completely filled
3.3 132 kV THREE POLE DISCONNECTORS:
3.3.1 SCOPE
This specification is for 132kV, 1600 Amps Isolator for use on line disconnection, isolation
of substation apparatus.
This specification covers both the 132 kV isolators with and without earth switch.
3.3.2 REFERENCES
may be referred to in case of conflict; the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
Unless otherwise specified, the latest revision, edition and amendments shall apply IEC
129: Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches.
IEC 144: Degree of protection of enclosures for low - voltage switchgear and control
gear
IEC 60273: Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000V
BS 729: Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles.
3.3.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.3.3.1 The isolator shall be horizontal side opening, double side break rotating post type for use
on a 132kV, 50 Hz, 3 - phase system.
3.3.3.2 The isolator shall be complete with supporting base, phase coupling details, operating rod,
unions and guides.
3.3.3.3 The operating mechanism shall be provided with a universal joint to allow for a reasonable
degree of out-of alignment of the operating rod.
3.3.3.4 The isolator shall be motorised and also fitted with manual operation facility. There should
be a remote selection to allow for operation of the isolator from the control room. The
remote selection should block any local electrical or manual operation.
3.3.3.5 The supporting under-base shall be hot dip galvanized steel as per the requirement of BS
729. The under-base shall be suitable for mounting on a steel structure.
3.3.3.6 All the three switches shall be arranged so that the phase units are mounted
independently and then finally interconnected with coupling tubes so as to ensure
simultaneous operation of all switches by drive rods and operating handle for both
manual and motor operation.
3.3.3.7 The operating mechanism shall be fixed at the base frame, in a weather proof, vermin
proof and dust proof housing. The degree of protection shall be class IP 54 as per IEC 144.
3.3.3.8 Auxiliary dry contacts, five normally open and five normally closed shall be provided for
electrical interlocks such that the isolator and associated 132 kV circuit breaker can be
interlocked with each other. The contacts shall be rated to continuously carry at least
10Amps at voltages up to 500V dc/ac
3.3.3.9 Each phase shall be mounted on a spiral type solid core post insulator conforming to IEC
60273, and shall be fitted with clamp connector for the suitable conductor/connector.
3.3.3.10 The isolator shall be designed such that in fully open position, it shall provide adequate
electrical isolation between the contacts on all the three switches.


3.3.3.11 All current carrying parts shall be made of electrolytic hard drawn copper with switch
contacts silver plated.
3.3.3.12 The earth switch shall consist of a hinged type earthing switch fixed at the base frame.
The earth switch shall have the same rating as the isolator.
3.3.3.13 The isolator shall be provided with both mechanical and electrical interlocking devices
between the isolator and earth switch so that during operations, it is only possible to
operate the earth switch with the isolator in the open position and the isolator with
the earth switches in the open position.
3.3.3.14 Ten normally open and ten normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided on the
switch for future use.
3.3.3.15 Five normally open and five normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided on the
earth switch for future use.
3.3.3.16 The isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a padlocking facility such that the
mechanism can be locked in OPEN or CLOSED position.
3.3.4 RATING
The ratings of the isolator, including its operating devices and auxiliary equipments shall
be as indicated below.

Nominal Voltage and frequency 132 kV, 50Hz
Highest Voltage 145 kV
Normal current 1600 Amps
Rated short circuit withstand current & time 31.5 kA, 3s
Rated short circuit making current 80 kA
Auxiliary Voltage A.C. 415/240 V, 50 Hz
D.C. 11010%
Lightning impulse
withstand voltage
With contacts closed 750 kV peak
Across open contacts 870kV peak
One minute power
frequency withstand
voltage
With contacts closed 325 kV r.m.s.
Across open contacts 370kV
Minimum creepage distance of insulator 4495mm
Minimum clearance phase-to-phase 2900mm
Minimum clearance phase-to-earth 2900mm
Mechanical endurance (number of close-open cycles
without using spare parts)
2000 (minimum)
3.3.5 TESTS
3.3.5.1 The isolator shall be inspected and routine tested in accordance with the requirement of
IEC 129.
3.3.5.2 Certified type test certificates issued by the relevant National Testing Authority confirming
compliance of the isolators on offer with the specifications shall be submitted.
3.3.6 TECHNICAL SCHEDULES
completely filled
3.4 132kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVTs):
3.4.1 SCOPE
3.4.1.1 This specification is for voltage transformers for use with electrical instruments and
electrical protective devices on system with maximum operating voltage up to 145kV.

3.4.2 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS


3.4.2.1 The voltage transformers will be connected to overhead system operating at a nominal
voltage of 132kV and a maximum voltage of 145kV which are generally of earthed
construction.
3.4.2.2 The voltage transformer will be connected between line and earth of a 3-phase 3-wire
system with the neutral point solidly earthed.
3.4.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.4.3.1 The voltage transformer shall be out-door oil-immersed capacitor type and shall comply
with the requirement of IEC 186.
3.4.3.2 The voltage transformer shall be suitable for installation on steel structure. The voltage
transformer shall be fitted with lugs.
3.4.3.3 The porcelain portion of the voltage transformer shall be made of high-grade brown glazed
porcelain. All other external parts shall be either inherently resistant to atmospheric
corrosion or hot-dip galvanized.
3.4.3.4 The voltage transformer shall have primary, secondary and earth terminals.
3.4.3.5 The primary terminal shall be tin-plated, suitable for both copper and aluminum
connectors. The secondary terminal shall be brought out to a separate terminal box,
complete with protection MCB. The MCB should have auxiliary contacts for indication,
alarm and distance relay input.
3.4.4 RATINGS
The voltage transformer shall be capable of continuously carrying 50% burden above the
rated capacity without damage. The rating of the voltage transformer shall be as indicated
herein:-
Parameter Value
1 Rated primary voltage 132000/3 Volts
2 Rated secondary voltage 110/3 Volts
3 Rated frequency 50 Hz
4 Minimum creepage distance of
insulator
3988 mm
5 Lightning impulse withstand voltage 685kV at 1500M above sea level
6 Power frequency withstand voltage 6 290kV
7 Rated burden 100 VA
(a) Rated voltage factor 1.5 for 30 seconds (1.2 continuous)
(b) Accuracy class 1.0
(c) No. secondary out put 2 (metering, protection)
3.4.5 MARKING
The voltage transformer shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-
The manufacturers name or identification mark.
The voltage transformer serial number or designation.
The rated primary and secondary voltage.
The rated frequency.
The burden and accuracy class of each secondary output.
The highest system voltage (e.g. 145kV).
The insulation level.
The rated voltage factor and corresponding rated time.
The terminals shall be marked clearly and indelibly.
The marking shall be in accordance with IEC 186.
3.4.6 TEST


3.4.7 REFERENCES
may be referred to. In case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
IEC 186: Voltage transformers.
BS 3941: Specification for voltage transformers.

3.4.8 TECHNICAL GUARANTEES
completely filled

3.5 132 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
3.5.1 SCOPE
This specification is for current transformers for use with electrical instruments and
electrical protective devices on systems with maximum operating voltage of 145kV.


The current transformer will be connected to overhead system operating at a nominal
voltage of 132 kV and maximum voltage of 145kV (with aerial earth wire) construction.
3.5.3 CONSTRUCTION
The current transformer shall be outdoor, oil-filled, hermetically sealed and shall comply
with the requirement of IEC 185. The current transformer shall be suitable for vertical
installation on steel structure.
3.5.3.1 The porcelain portion of the current transformer shall be made of high-grade brown-glazed
porcelain. All external ferrous portions shall be hot-dip galvanized.
3.5.3.2 The current transformer shall have primary, secondary and earth terminals.
The primary terminal shall be tin-plated, suitable for both copper and aluminium
connectors.
The secondary terminal shall be covered with removable plate. The terminal box shall be
capable of accommodating up to 12 secondary terminals suitable for conductor of up to
4.0mm2.
3.5.3.3 The current transformer shall have four cores. The protection cores shall be suitable for
conventional over current requirements and for true transformation of the fully
asymmetrical fault currents.
Measuring cores shall have high accuracy (low loss) and low saturation levels.
3.5.4 RATINGS
The short circuit rating of the current transformers shall be 31.5kA.
The current transformers shall be capable of passing rated primary current without
damage with the secondary open circuited.
The rating of the current transformers shall be as indicated herein:-
Parameter Values
1 Rated primary current (Amps) 600/400/200
2 Rated secondary current 1 AMP
3 Rated frequency 50Hz
4 Minimum Creepage distance of insulator 3988 mm
5 Lightning impulse withstand voltage 685kV
6 Power frequency withstand voltage 290kV
7 Rated burden and accuracy class
Core No. 1 20VA, 5P20
Core No. 2 20VA, 0.2
Core No. 3 20VA, X
Core No. 4 20VA, 5P20
The knee point voltage shall not be less than 250 Volts at 8mA.
3.5.5 MARKING
The current transformers shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-


The current transformer serial number or designation.
The primary and secondary currents.
The highest system voltage (e.g. 145kV).
The output and accuracy class of the cores.
The terminals shall be marked clearly and indelibly.
The marking shall consist of letters followed by numbers.
The letters shall be in block capitals.
3.5.6 TESTS
3.5.6 REFERENCES
may be referred to. In case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
IEC 185: Current Transformers.
BS 3938: Specification for current transformers.
completely filled
3.6 132 kV SURGE ARRESTERS:
3.6.1 SCOPE
This specification is for 132kV metal-oxide type surge arresters without spark gaps for a.c.
system.
3.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
3.6.2.1 The surge arrester shall be metal-oxide type without spark gaps and constructor as per
the requirement of IEC 99-4.
3.6.2.2 The metal-oxide used shall be of quality to ensure thermal stability under service duty of
the surge arrester.
3.6.2.3 The completed surge arrester shall be housed in a silicone rubber. The silicone rubber
insulator shall be dimensioned to provide a leak free interface with the end caps. The
housing shall withstand the lighting impulse voltage of the arrester.
3.6.2.4 The surge arrester shall be sealed (end caps) with a controlled permanent seal to ensure
no moisture absorption or deterioration of the metal-oxide element for the surge arrester.
3.6.2.5 The surge arrester shall be supplied with fixing accessories and fitted with pad type clamp
connectors suitable for both copper and aluminium tubes of up to 76.2mm
diameter.
The steel plates or straps shall be galvanized as per the requirement of BS 729.
The mounting brackets shall be suitable for both horizontal and vertical mounting on a
steel channel.
3.6.3 RATING
The rating of the surge arrester shall be as indicated herein:-
Parameter Rating
1 Rated Voltage. 108 kV
2 Nominal discharge current 10 kA
3 Long duration discharge class..... 3


4 Creepage distance of insulator 3630 mm
5 Continuous operating voltage. 84 kV
6 Rated frequency.. 50 Hz

3.6.4 MARKING
The surge arrester shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-
The surge arrester serial number or designation.
The nominal discharge current.
The continuous operating voltage
The rated voltage
3.6.5 TESTS
Type, routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out as per the requirement of IEC 99-4.
3.6.6 REFERENCES
The following documents were referred to during the preparation of this specification. In
case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take precedence.
IEC 99: Surge Arrester.
Part 4: Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c. systems.
IEEE Std.:C62.22 1991
IEEE Guide for application of metal-oxide surge arresters for alternating current
systems.
completely filled
3.7 132/11 kV POWER TRANSFOMERS:
3.7.1 SCOPE
This specification is for newly manufactured outdoor oil type power transformer as
described below:
15 MVA, 132/11kV, 50 Hz, ONAN/ONAF three phase power transformer.
The specification also covers inspection and test of the transformer as well as schedule of
Guaranteed Technical Particulars to be filled, signed by the manufacturer and submitted
for tender evaluation.
The specification stipulates the minimum requirements for 15MVA, 132/11kV power
transformer acceptable to the Kenya Power and Lighting Co. for use by the Authority and it
shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to ensure adequacy of the design and good
engineering practice in the manufacture of the transformer for KPA.
The specification does not purport to include all the necessary provisions of a contract.
3.7.2 REFERENCES
The following standards contain provisions which, through reference in this text constitute
provisions of this specification. Unless otherwise stated, the latest editions (including
amendments) apply.
ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles
Specifications and test methods.
IEC 60076: Power transformers.
IEC 60044: Instrument transformers.
IEC 60296: Specification for unused mineral insulating oil for transformers and
switchgear.
IEC 60354: Loading guide for oil immersed power transformers.
BS 171: Power transformers
BS 381C: Specification for colours for identification coding and special purposes


3.7.3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The terms and definitions given in the reference standards shall apply.

a) The primary HV system is 132,000 Volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 50Hz, with neutral point
solidly earthed.
b) The secondary MV system is 11,000 Volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 50Hz, with neutral
point solidly earthed.
c) The Transformer shall be operated at a high loading factor.
3.7.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.7.5.1 The transformer shall be outdoor, oil-immersed, of ONAN/ONAF classification and core
type (lamination stackings). All offers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60076.
Any deviations/additional requirements shall be as stated in this specification.
3.7.5.2 The transformer shall be a two winding type three-phase integral unit.
3.7.5.3 The transformer shall be of the free breathing type. A dehydrating cobalt free breather of
approved design shall be provided.
3.7.5.4 The transformer and accessories shall be designed to facilitate operation, inspection,
maintenance and repairs. All apparatus shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation
under such sudden variations of load and voltage as may be met with under working
conditions on the system, including those due to short circuits.
3.7.5.5 The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all
those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment keeping in view the
regulatory requirements in Kenya.
3.7.5.6 All material used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for
working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperatures
and atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions without undue distortion or
deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part, and also without affecting
the strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform.
3.7.5.7 Corresponding parts liable to be replaced shall be interchangeable.
3.7.5.8 All outdoor apparatus, including bushings insulators with their mountings, shall be
designed so as to avoid pockets in which water can collect.
3.7.5.9 All connections and contacts shall be of ample section and surface for carrying
continuously the specified currents without undue heating and fixed connections shall be
secured by bolts or set screws of ample size, adequately locked. Lock nuts shall be used
on stud connections carrying current. All leads from the winding to the terminals and
bushings shall be adequately supported to prevent injury from vibration including a
systematical pull under short circuit conditions.
3.7.5.10 All apparatus shall be designed to minimize the risk or accidental short-circuit caused
by animals, birds or vermin.
3.7.5.11 In tank on-load-tap changers shall be located such that the space above the diverter
switch chamber will be free of inter-connecting pipes etc. for lifting the diverter switch unit
for inspection and maintenance purposes.
3.7.5.12 Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot-dipped process to ISO 1461 and for all parts
other than steel wires shall consist of a thickness of zinc coating equivalent to not less
than 610g of zinc per square meter of surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, clean
and of uniform thickness and free from defects. The preparation of galvanizing and the
galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the coated
material. The quality will be established by tests as per ISO 1461.
3.7.5.13 All bolts, nuts, and washers exposed to atmosphere and in contact with non-ferrous
parts which carry current shall be of phosphor bronze.


3.7.5.14 If bolts and nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary
spanners, suitable special spanners shall be provided by the supplier.
3.7.5.15 Except for hardware, which may have to be removed at site, all external surfaces shall
receive at least four coats of paint. The total dry film thickness shall be between 100 and
130 microns.
3.7.5.16 Descriptive labels for mounting indoors or inside cubicles and kiosks shall be of
material that will ensure permanence of the lettering. A matt or satin finish shall be
provided to avoid dazzle from reflected light. Labels mounted on dark surface shall have
white lettering on a black background. Danger notices shall have red lettering on a white
background.
3.7.5.17 All interior surfaces of chambers or kiosks that are in contact with air shall receive at
least three coats of paint, of which the topcoat shall be of a light shade.
3.7.5.18 The design and all materials and processes used in the manufacture of the transformers
shall be such as to reduce to a minimum the risk of the development of acidity in the oil.
3.7.5.19 Every care shall be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of the
transformers and auxiliary plant shall be such to have minimum noise and vibration levels
following good modern manufacturing practices. The maximum noise levels shall be stated
in the bid
3.7.6 Ratings
3.7.6.1 The windings of the transformer shall be rated at 15MVA (ONAF), with a minimum ONAN
rating of 11 MVA. These ratings shall be for the operating conditions stated in clause
2.6.The rating specified in this clause shall be the continuous rating at the maximum
ambient temperature and altitude given in clause 2.6
3.7.6.2 (a) The transformer shall be capable of carrying its full normal rating continuously at any
tap under the conditions stated in clause 2.6 without undue stress, overheating, or the
temperature rise in the hottest region exceeding 55C and 60C in oil and windings
respectively.
(b) The loading capabilities shall be demonstrated by a temperature rise test. This
test shall be done in the presence of KPA Representatives during factory visit.
3.7.6.3 The transformer shall be capable of withstanding the maximum fault level at its rated
voltage and impedance for 2 seconds. The design should cater for the expected lifetime of
the transformer.
3.7.7 Winding and connections
3.7.7.1 The transformer shall be wound Dyn11 with respect to the 132 kV and 11 kV windings as
per IEC 60076.
3.7.7.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular tapping
at the rated MVA when the voltage may vary by 10% of the voltage corresponding to the
tapping.
3.7.7.3 The windings and connections as well as the insulating material shall not soften, ooze,
shrink or collapse during service. The materials shall be non-catalytic and chemically
inactive in transformer oil during service.
3.7.7.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness.
The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize eddy currents and
equalize the current and temperature distribution along the windings.
3.7.7.5 The windings and connections shall be properly braced to withstand shocks during
transportation or due to short circuit and other transient conditions during service.
3.7.7.6 Adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board material
having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by the
manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to frequent
short circuits on the transformers.


3.7.7.7 All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the
construction of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated with hot
oil.
3.7.7.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel
laminations.
3.7.7.9 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material, which will
not soften while in contact with oil or fray out into fibres or edges. The slots should be so
dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots.
3.7.7.10 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and
load fluctuations.
3.7.7.11 KPA will inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight of copper, insulation and overall
weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor used for different windings shall also be
checked during stage inspection to check the current density.
3.7.7.12 The transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of
harmonic voltage, especially the third and fifth, so as to eliminate wave-form distortion
and from any possibility of high frequency disturbances, inductive effects or of circulating
currents between the neutral points at different transforming stations reaching such a
magnitude as to cause interference with communication circuits.
3.7.7.13 The windings shall be designed to reduce to a minimum the out-of-balance forces in the
transformer at all voltage ratios.
3.7.8 Tapping
3.7.8.1 Tapping Range
The transformers shall be provided with tapping on the 132 kV winding for a variation of
no load primary voltage for parallel operation, with Tap No. 1 having the highest voltage
assignment, as follows:
132000 Volts +8*1.67%
-8*1.67%

3.7.8.2 Tapping Method
Tapping shall be carried out by means of an on-load tap changer as described in clause
3.7.14 below.

3.7.9 Core and flux density
a) Core
3.7.9.1 The core shall be constructed from the laminations of high grade cold rolled non-aging,
grain oriented silicon steel known as M4 High B Grade or superior grade CRGO steels of
maximum 0.27mm or less lamination thickness especially suitable for transformer
core. The grade of CRGO shall be stated in the bid.
3.7.9.2 The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges,
development of short-circuit paths within itself or to the earthed or to the clamping
structure and the production of flux components at right angles to the plane of the
laminations which may cause local heating.
3.7.9.3 Every care shall be exercised in the selection, treatment and handling of core steel to
ensure that as far as practicable, the laminations are flat and the finally assembled
core is free from distortion.
3.7.9.4 Adequate oil ducts shall be provided in the core for cooling. Tinned copper strip bridging
pieces shall be used for maintaining electrical continuity wherever the magnetic circuit is
provided into pockets by such ducts or insulating material thicker than 0.25mm.
3.7.9.5 There shall be no movement of the core assembly relative to the tank during transport,
installation as well as in service due to sudden jerks caused by short circuits and
fluctuating loads.


3.7.9.6 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted or shot
blasted after cutting, drilling and welding. Any non-magnetic or high resistance alloy shall
be of established quality.
3.7.9.7 Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable core and winding to be lifted.
3.7.9.8 Supporting framework of the Cores shall be so designed as to avoid the presence of
pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain valve, or
cause trapping of air during filling.
3.7.9.9 The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plate shall be such as to
withstand a voltage of 2kV AC for one minute.

(b) Flux Density

3.7.9.10 The primary voltage variation, which may affect the flux density at every tap, shall be
kept in view while designing the transformer.
3.7.9.11 The transformer shall be so designed that the working flux density shall not exceed 1.6
Tesla at normal voltage, frequency & ratio. Tenders with higher flux density than specified
shall not be considered.
3.7.9.12 Tenderers shall indicate the continuous allowable maximum flux for one minute and
five seconds.
3.7.9.13 The limit of flux density at which core material used saturates shall also be stated in the
tender. The name and grade of core material shall be stated in the tender.
3.7.9.14 The successful tenderer shall be required to furnish magnetization curve of the core
material, design calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit by the purchaser
for being satisfied that flux density is as desired.
NOTE: The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the core
due to temporary over voltage of the orders of 25% for one minute and 40% for five
seconds that may appear in abnormal conditions such as the one obtained following
sudden loss of large loads.
3.7.10 Losses, Regulation and Impedance
3.7.10.1 Losses of the transformer shall be stated and shall be subject to tolerances in
accordance with IEC 60076. The fixed losses shall be as low as is consistent with
good design, reliability and economical use of materials.
3.7.10.2 Voltage regulation from no-load to continuous rated output at unity power factor, at
0.8 lagging and 0.8 leading power factor with constant voltage across the higher
voltage windings shall be stated in the bid.
3.7.10.3 The impedance voltage at extreme tappings and at principal tapping shall be stated
and shall be subject to tolerances in accordance with IEC 60076.
3.7.10.4 Terminals: Arrangement & Bushings
3.7.10.5 The 11kV and 132kV windings shall be brought out separately through open bushings
of outdoor, weatherproof design in accordance with the latest IEC standard.
3.7.10.6 Bushings for 132kV terminals shall be of oil-filled condenser type construction, draw-
out type and shall each have a capacitance test point. Bushings for 11kV terminals shall
be of the solid porcelain type.
3.7.10.7 The neutral bushing of the transformer shall be identical to the corresponding phase
terminal bushings for 11kV Bushings.
3.7.10.8 Spacing and air clearances shall be so co-ordinated as to render the probability of a
flashover from the terminal of one winding to the terminal of another winding negligible.
3.7.10.9 Leakage distance of bushings shall not be less than 25mm/kV, based on operating
phase to phase voltage.


3.7.10.10 Bushing terminals shall be clamp type suitable for both copper and aluminium Bus
bars of sizes up to 76mm diameter.
3.7.10.11 Each bushing of the 132kV windings shall be mounted on a turret. Each turret shall
be suitable for accommodating at least two sets of current transformers.
3.7.10.12 Each bushing of the 11kV windings shall be mounted on a turret. Each turret shall be
suitable for accommodating at least three sets of current transformers.
3.7.10.13 Terminal arrangement on the HV and LV sides shall be A, B, C and n, a, b, c
respectively.
3.7.11 Current Transformers to be fitted
3.7.11.1 Current transformers shall be installed in the bushing turrets and shall be of the
following quantities, ratios, ratings and class:

(a) 132 kV Phase Bushings CTs

CORE 1
HV side-line - ph 1A ; 15VA, 100/1A, cl.3 - for winding thermocopy.
HV side-line - ph 1B ; 15VA, 100/1A, cl.0.5 for measurements.
HV side-line - ph 1C ; 15VA, 100/1A, cl.3 for winding thermocopy

CORE2
HV side-line - ph 1A ; 15VA, 100/1A, Class X, Vk >250V for differential protection.
HV side-line - ph 1B ; 15VA, 100/1A, Class X, Vk >250V for differential protection.
HV side-line - ph 1C ; 15VA, 100/1A, Class X, Vk >250V for differential protection.

CORE 3
HV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 100/1A, 5P20 O/C.
HV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 100/1A, 5P20 O/C.
HV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 100/1A, 5P20 O/C
CORE 4
HV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 300/1A, 5P20 Bus prot.
HV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 300/1A, 5P20 Bus Prot
HV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 300/1A, 5P20 Bus Prot

(b) 11 kV Phase Bushings CTs
Core 1
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 1000/1A, Class X, Vk >250V Differential.
MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 1000/1A, Class X, Vk >250V Differential.
MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 1000/1A, Class X, Vk >250V Differential.
Core2
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 1000/1A, cl.3 - for winding thermocopy
MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 1000/1A, cl.3 for AVR supply
MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 1000/1A, cl.3 - for winding thermocopy.
Core3
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 1000/1A, 5P20 O/C.
MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 1000/1A, 5P20 O/C.
MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 1000/1A, 5P20 O/C
Core 4
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 1000/1A, CL X REF
MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 1000/1A, CL X REF
MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 1000/1A, CL X REF
33kV NEUTRAL
Core 1
Neutral side -; 15 VA 1000/1 cl. X - for Restricted Earth fault.
Core 2
Neutral side -; 15 VA 1000/500/1A cl. x - for Earth fault Protection.


3.7.11.2 Current transformers of suitable rating and class for winding temperature
indicators shall be installed to adequately cover the transformer as indicated above for
guidance.
3.7.11.3 Current transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60044.
3.7.11.4 Full technical particulars of current transformers offered, including type test
results from an International reputable Testing Authority or a National Standards
and Testing Authority, shall be submitted with tender.

3.7.12 AIR CLEARANCE

3.7.12.1 When totally assembled, as in service, electrical clearances in air shall be adequate
to withstand the assigned impulse withstand test voltages.
3.7.12.2 Care shall be taken to ensure that all fittings are suitably positioned so as not to
interfere with the external connection to the bushing terminals.
3.7.12.3 Minimum external air clearances shall be as shown under.

NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE BETWEEN
PHASES

11 kV 132 kV
Minimum clearance phase-to-earth
and phase-to-neutral
mm 485 1270

Minimum clearance phase-to-phase
between phases of the same winding
mm 485 1475

Minimum clearance between a line
terminal of the high voltage winding
and a line terminal of a lower voltage
winding
mm 485 1475

Minimum clearance from live metal to
oil pipework including conservator
and pressure relief device
mm 480 1630

3.7.13 INSULATION LEVELS

The complete transformer arranged for service, shall be capable of withstanding the
following voltages and shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC 60076 Part 3,
including the latest amendments.

Nominal system
voltage
(kV, rms)

Highest system
voltage
(kV, rms)

Lightning Impulse
withstand voltage
(kV, peak)

Power frequency
withstand voltage
(kV, rms)
11 12 70 63
132 145 685 290

3.7.14 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER AND MECHANISM BOX
3.7.14.1 The transformer shall be complete with vacuum type on-load, electrically driven tap
changing mechanism of the high-speed resistor transition type, and shall comply with
the requirements of IEC 214 and 512. The equipment shall be suitable for remote
operation from a control panel supplied with the transformer as well as `for local operation
from the Motor Drive Unit (MDU) mounted on the transformer body.
3.7.14.2 The mechanism shall be so designed as to ensure that when a tap change operation is in
progress, it shall be able to complete the task independently irrespective of operation of
any relays or switches.
3.7.14.3 Adequate means shall be provided to safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary
circuits from damage should a failure of the auxiliary supply or any other mal-operation
occur during the progress of tap changing that may prevent it from completing its
task.


3.7.14.4 Means shall be provided in the marshalling kiosk for mechanical isolation of the supply
to the Motor Drive Unit, and a suitable thermal overload device (details to be submitted
with tender) shall be provided in the MDU for the protection of the motor.
The possibility of over-running the mechanism at each end of the voltage range shall be
prevented by means of limit switches and mechanical stops. Other techniques used to
prevent tap changer runaway shall be indicated.
3.7.14.5 A mechanically operated device shall be provided to indicate the tap position locally, and
a suitable tap position transmitter shall be provided for the remote tap position indication.
3.7.14.6 A counter shall be provided on the tap changing mechanism box to indicate the total
number of operations completed by the equipment.
3.7.14.7 Contactors and associated equipment for the control circuit for local/remote and manual
operations of the tap changer mechanism shall be housed in the mechanism box.
3.7.14.8 The tap changer (diverter switch) shall be housed in a separate compartment and shall
be Vacuum Type. Sufficient documentation for the vacuum switch in form of manuals,
instructions, drawings, technical characteristics, certified type test certificates and reports
(from an International Testing/ Standards Laboratory), manufacturing and export
experience of the supplier shall be submitted with the tender for technical evaluation.
3.7.14.9 The Motor Drive Unit shall have the following in addition to what has been stated above:
(a) Isolating switch in the transformer marshalling box for the supply to the tap
changer Motor Drive Unit,
(b) Raise/lower contactors for tap changer motor operation, and associated single
phase protection/overload relay,
(c) Switch for selection of local/remote tap changer control,
(d) Switch or switches for local tap changer operation,
(e) Provisions shall be made available for hand operation in the mechanism box.
3.7.14.10 The tap changer shall be of internationally reputable manufacture and proven reliability
in service. Detailed documentation and copies of certificates shall be submitted with the
tender for evaluation.
3.7.15 Remote Tap Changer Control Panel
The remote tap changer control panel shall contain the following devices:
Automatic Voltage Regulating Relay (to be of proven design and technical details
submitted with tender).
Off/Manual/Automatic switch for the Relay.
Raise /Lower control switch.
Raise , Lower, out of step and tap change in progress indication lamps
Dial type Tap position indicator (technical details to be submitted with the tender).
Master/Follower/Independent Scheme and selector switch. The Tap Changer shall
employ, negative reactance or circulating current principle scheme for parallel
operation with other three similar transformers but of different rating.
Local /Remote switch
kV meter (technical details to be submitted with the tender)
Door operated lamp and anti-condensation heater.
Heater switch ON/OFF to control anti-condensation heater
Various control circuits controlled by Miniature Circuit Breakers
3.7.16 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATING RELAY
The relay shall be of proven design and shall incorporate the following features;
Rated voltage 110V AC.
Rated Current 1 Amp.
Initial time delay range 5-100 seconds, and ability to select Integrated delay or
Definite time delay.


Inter-tap delay 1-80 seconds
Relay voltage setting, adjustable in steps of 1V from 85 - 130V
Line drop compensation 0-20 V at rated current for both reactive and resistive
setting
Under voltage inhibit range 70%-90% & over current inhibit range 150%-250%
Bandwidth range 0.5-5 % of voltage level
Over voltage inhibit
The AVR should have a selector switch with OFF/Manual/Auto
Should be of Numeric Design.
The Relay shall be Designed to employ both Circulating Current Compensation or
Negative (Reverse) Reactance compounding to minimize circulating current for
Parallel Transformer Operation.
Tap changer Maintenance, by maintaining Tap Operation count.
Tap Changer Mechanism Failure.
Sufficient documentation in form of instruction manuals, drawings, technical
characteristics and test certificates from international/national testing/standards
laboratory of the country of manufacture shall be submitted with the tender to facilitate
technical evaluation.
3.7.17 PARALLEL OPERATION
3.7.17.1 A scheme for operating this transformer in parallel with other similar units of different
rating shall be provided and wired in the marshalling kiosk (box) by the manufacturer
ready for inter-phasing.
3.7.17.2 scheme shall maintain the transformers in stable parallel operation and limit circulating
current to a minimum.
3.7.17.3 In the event of this transformer being disconnected from the system, its reconnection
shall not result in its tap changer failing to operate automatically because of tapping
discrepancy.
3.7.17.4 Suitable selector switch shall be provided, so that any one transformer of the group can
at a time be selected as Master, Follower or Independent.
3.7.17.5 Necessary interlock blocking independent control when the units are in parallel shall be
provided.
3.7.17.6 The scheme shall be such that only one transformer of a group can be selected as
Master.
3.7.17.7 An out of- step device shall be provided for each transformer which shall be arranged
to prevent further tapchanging when transformers in a group operating in Parallel
control are one tap out-of-step.
3.7.18 MARSHALLING KIOSK (Box)
The marshalling kiosk shall be of outdoor, IP 55, weatherproof, vermin-proof type with a
hinged, lockable door fitted with a glass panel to facilitate reading of oil and winding
temperature gauges without opening the door. The kiosk shall be mounted so that its
window is approximately 1600mm above ground level; and shall accommodate at least the
following items:-
a) Winding temperature indicator for both HV and MV with a maximum pointer drag hand
type with a resetting knob and three separately adjustable mercury contacts for alarm,
trip and operation of cooler control circuits as required.
b) Oil temperature indicator with a maximum pointer drag hand type with a resetting knob
and two separately adjustable mercury contacts for alarm and trip.
c) Mechanical isolating switch for the incoming 3 phase, 4 wire, 415V 50Hz supply to the
marshalling kiosk. 415 volts and 240 volts socket outlets (square pins) shall also be
provided in the kiosk.
d) A mechanical isolating switch for the outgoing 3 phase 4-wire 415V 50Hz supply to the
OLTC Motor drive unit.


e) Suitable starters for the cooling fan motors complete with thermal overload/single phase
protection relay and normally-closed electrical auxiliary contacts for motor failure
alarm/trip circuits.
f) A selector switch with OFF, HAND and AUTO positions for cooling fan motors
g) An internal standard screw type illumination lamp and heater for the kiosk with
respective switches. The lamp shall be door switch operated.
h) Wiring, fuses, links, terminal boards and cable glands for bottom entry of multicore
cables
i) Anti-condensation heater with a switch.
j) Thermostat for anti-condensation heater control.
k) Hygrostat for anti-condensation heater control.
l) MCB control for each of the circuits.
m) Phase sequence relay for detection of wrong phase rotation for the supply to the fans and
the OLTC Motor Drive Unit.
Detailed technical details, drawings, and schematics shall be submitted with the tender
documents for evaluation.

3.7.19 AUXILIARY SUPPLIES
Equipment shall be rated for the following auxiliary power supplies:
(a) Cooler control circuits: 240 V, single phase, 50Hz
(b) Tap changer control: 240 V, single phase, 50Hz
(c) Cooling fan motors: 415 V, three phase, 50Hz
(d) Tap changer motor: 415 V, three phase, 50Hz
3.7.20 TRANSFORMER TANK AND TANK COVER
3.7.20.1 The tank shall be constructed of mild steel plates of sufficient thickness and strength
and shall be complete with all accessories. It shall be designed so as to allow the complete
transformer when filled with oil to be lifted by crane or jacks, transported by road, rail or
on water without overstraining any joints and without causing subsequent leakage of oil.
3.7.20.2 The base of the tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to move the complete
transformer unit in any direction without injury when using rollers, and/or plates
3.7.20.3 The tank and its accessories shall be so designed as to prevent collecting or trapping of
gases.Where this cannot be avoided, pipes shall be provided to vent the gas into the main
expansion pipe. The vent shall have a minimum outside diameter of 19mm except for
short pipes which may be 6.35mm minimum inside diameter.
3.7.20.4 All joints, other than those that may have to be broken shall be welded. Caulking of
unsatisfactorily welded joints is forbidden.
3.7.20.5 The main tank body shall be pressure tested and a certificate issued by the national
standards and testing laboratory ascertaining the soundness of all welded joints. A
certified copy of the certificate shall be submitted with the tender for evaluation.
3.7.20.6 Tank shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting the complete transformer with
oil. Furthermore, a minimum of four accessible jacking positions shall be provided to
enable the complete transformer to be raised or lowered using jacks.
3.7.20.7 The transformer tank and all attachments normally under oil shall be capable of
withstanding full vacuum. The oil conservator shall withstand at least 35% full Vacuum.
3.7.20.8 Tank cover shall be of such a design and construction as to prevent accumulation of
water and shall be bolted to the flange on the tank top to form a weatherproof joint.
3.7.20.9 Inspection openings shall be provided as necessary to give easy access to bushings,
tapping switch and for testing or general inspection.


3.7.20.10 Tank cover and inspection covers shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangements.
Inspection covers shall not weigh more than 25 kg apiece.
3.7.20.11 The tank cover shall be fitted with isolated pockets for oil and winding temperature
instrument bulbs. Protection shall be provided where necessary for each capillary tube.
The pocket shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent the ingress of water.
Detailed drawings shall be provided.
3.7.20.12 The pocket shall be located in a position of maximum oil temperature at continuous
maximum rating and it shall be possible to insert and remove the instrument bulbs
without lowering the oil in the tank.
3.7.20.13 Gaskets for weather and oil-tight joint faces shall be of synthetic rubber-and-cork
composition and shall have a minimum thickness of 5mm, except that where jointing faces
are precision-machined thinner gaskets may be used.
3.7.21 PAINT WORK
Cleaning and painting shall be in accordance with the following requirements. Any
deviations in methodology shall be stated and may only be those that will produce
demonstrably superior results.
A test report issued by the national standards and testing laboratory shall be produced at
the time of acceptance testing of the transformer.
3.7.21.1 Tanks and Accessories
(a) External and internal surfaces of all transformer tanks and chambers and other
fabricated steel items shall be cleaned of scale, rust and surface dirt by blast cleaning
or other suitable approved method. After cleaning, these surfaces should be
immediately covered with paint.
(b) The exterior shall be thoroughly cleaned by shot blasting or other approved method
and given priming coat followed by two coats of contrasting colours of durable weather-
resisting paint. The final coat shall be high gloss of shade No. 632 (Admiralty Grey)
according to BS 381C.
(c) The interior of all transformer tanks and other oil-filled chambers shall be cleaned of
all scale and rust by shot blasting or other approved method. Hot oil resistant varnish
on white synthetic enamel/proxy paint is to be used for painting the inside of all oil
filled chambers, including transformer tanks. The final coat shall be of a light-coloured
anti-condensation finish.
3.7.21.2 Radiators
(a) Radiators shall be thoroughly degreased and treated externally by phospating and/or
other rust-inhibiting process.
(b) Radiators shall be flood-painted with a primer and two coats of durable weather and
oil resisting paint. The final external coat shall be high gloss of shade No. 632
(Admiralty Grey) according to BS 381C. The total paint thickness shall not be less than
80m at any point.
3.7.22 COOLING SYSTEM
3.7.22.1 Radiators shall be supplied in banks as suitable. Each bank shall be fitted with gate
valves with legible labelling for OPEN/CLOSED positions and used for full isolation from
the main tank. Each radiator shall have a top and bottom isolating butterfly valve. The
radiator design shall exclude accumulation of rainwater.
3.7.22.2 Radiator banks shall be mounted directly to the transformer main tank for best use
of space.
3.7.22.3 Each radiator shall have a bleeding facility (to allow escape of air) on top.
3.7.22.4 Separately mounted a-c motor driven fans fitted with wire mesh guards shall be
provided for the radiators. The fan motors shall be totally enclosed, weatherproof, outdoor
type suitable for continuous operation and shall be fitted with terminal boxes and glands
to accommodate multicore electric supply cables. Technical details of the fan motor shall
be supplied with the tender.
3.7.22.5 Suitable starters, protection/warning devices, contactors and switches for the motors
shall be provided as stipulated in clause 2.3.3 above.


3.7.22.6 Suitable lifting lugs shall be provided for removal and assembly of radiators.
3.7.22.7 The complete cooling system and the fittings shall be fully co-ordinated. Where
necessary, the cooling fan motors shall be fired in designed groups and in such sequence
as to achieve the desired control at maximum efficiency and safety.
3.7.23 FITTINGS
3.7.23.1 Conservator
The transformer shall be provided with a conservator having a filling orifice, an isolating
valve, a drain valve and a cobalt free dehydrating breather (with oil seal) which shall be
accessible from ground level. The drain pipe shall be located at the lowest point in the
conservator in its final installed position and welded such that it can drain all the sludge
in the conservator.
The conservator shall be partitioned proportionately to separate the main tank oil and the
tap changer oil. Each compartment to be fitted with a breather and an oil level indicator
with electrical contacts for alarms. The conservator complete with drain valve shall be in
such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the transformer. An oil
gauge shall be provided at one end of the conservator marked with oil levels that can be
read by a person standing on the ground. Expansion joints may be provided in the inlet
and outlet pipes to the transformer as necessary.
3.7.23.2 Gas and Oil Actuated Relay (Transformer main tank)
Transformers shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay (Buchholz relay) of double
float type with tripping contacts to detect accumulation of gas and sudden changes of oil
pressure. Shut off valves and flange couplings shall be provided to facilitate easy removal
of the relay without lowering oil level in the main tank. A bleed valve for gas venting, a test
valve and a terminal box suitably wired to the marshalling kiosk shall also be provided.
The gas venting pipe shall be brought down to a height reachable from ground level and
shall be fitted with a gas sampling device at the end. Provision should be made on the
relay for simulation of gas and oil surge for testing purposes.
3.7.23.3 Gas and Oil Actuated Relay (Tap changer compartment)
Tap changer compartment shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay (Buchholz
relay) of double float type with tripping contacts to detect accumulation of gas and sudden
changes of oil pressure. Shut off valves and flange couplings shall be provided to facilitate
easy removal of the relay without lowering oil level in the tap changer compartment. A
bleed valve for gas venting, a test valve and a terminal box suitably wired to the
marshalling kiosk shall also be provided. The gas venting pipe shall be brought down to a
height reachable from ground level and shall be fitted with a gas sampling device at the
end. Provision should be made on the relay for simulation of gas and oil surge for testing
purposes.
3.7.23.4 Pressure Relief Device
A pressure relief device shall be provided for the main tank, complete with trip contacts
suitably wired to the marshalling kiosk. The device shall be resettable after an operation.
Details of the device shall be submitted with the offer.
3.7.23.5 Winding Temperature Indicator
(a) The transformer shall be provided with winding temperature indicator, maximum
indicator and associated current transformer. The temperature indicator shall have
a scale ranging from 20C to 150C, preferably uniformly divided and its type to be
stated in the bid. The indicator shall have two sets of independently adjustable
contacts as follows:
(i) Alarm Adjustable setting: 70C to 150C
Fixed differential: Not more than 5C
(ii) Trip Adjustable setting: 70 to 150C
Fixed differential: Not more than 5C
(b) All contacts shall be adjustable to a scale and shall be accessible on removal of the
cover for dial type devices. For purposes of (i) and (ii) above, the contacts shall be


suitable for making or breaking 150VA between the limits of 30 and 250 V a.c. or
d.c., and making 500 VA between the limits of the 110 and 250 V d.c.
(c) Isolating and test links shall be provided in a control cubicle to allow for measuring
the oil temperature and testing the heater coil.
(d) The current transformer providing winding temperature indication shall be located
at the discretion of the manufacturer, in the best position for the duty.
(e) Calibration of indicator shall be related to the winding having the maximum
temperature rise.
(f) If the value on the winding temperature indicator varies by more than 3C from the
values derived from the tests specified in clause 5, then adjustments shall be made
to the equipment to achieve these limits.

3.7.23.6 Oil Temperature Indicator
Transformers shall be provided with an oil temperature indicator with a maximum
pointer and contacts for alarm and trip signals, similar to winding temperature
indicator above.

3.7.24 ACCESSORIES

The following shall be provided:
3.7.24.1 Valves with blank flanges fitted at the top and bottom for oil filtration purposes, having
the following features:
(a) The valve located at the bottom of the tank shall also be suitable for draining oil
from the transformer tank.
(b) All valves shall close with a clockwise rotation. The main inlet and outlet valves
shall be provided with open and closed position indicators, visible from ground level.
(c) All valves shall have provision for padlocking in the open and closed position for
operation purposes. The hole for the padlock shall have a clearance of not less than
8mm and not more than 10mm. Locking pin shall be of anti-rattle design to limit noise
emissions. The locking padlocks shall be provided.
(d) Closed/Open positions of all valves must be clearly marked.
3.7.24.2 Oil sampling device appropriately located to obtain samples of transformer oil from the
top and bottom of the tank.
3.7.24.3 Two earthing terminals located at diagonally opposite corners of the tank.
3.7.24.4 Air release valves or plugs for the main tank, suitably located.
3.7.24.5 Non-deteriorating detailed diagram and rating plates.
3.7.24.6 Other Fittings/accessories
Diagram plate
Plate of valves and oil piping.
Motor drive electrical and protection diagram.
Cooling control electrical and protection diagram.
Electrical scheme for operating this in parallel with other similar units.
Detailed list of the transformer equipment & fittings including their drawings, brochures &
instruction manuals.
Shipping data
Detailed erection, installation, operation and maintenance manuals in English language.
Testing Plan.
Impact recorder for the whole duration of transit and a report provided afterwards.
2 Sets of keys for padlocking devices.
(all control boxes as well as valves to be padlocked)

3.7.25 TRANSFORMER OIL
The transformer and all associated oil immersed equipment shall be supplied oil filled. The
oil shall comply with all the requirements of IEC 296 (class 1: un-inhibited oil). Tenderer
shall provide the chemical composition and properties of the oil and the replacement cycle
over the expected life of the transformer.
3.7.26 CAPITALIZATION


3.7.26.1 Transformer losses shall be capitalized at the following rates to facilitate evaluation
and comparison of tenders.
Load (copper) losses US$ 2577 per kW
No load (Iron) losses US$ 4339 per kW
NB:- Where tenders are being compared, losses will be capitalized at the above rate and
added to the bid evaluated price of the transformer.
3.7.27 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3.7.27.1 The supplier shall include a quality assurance programme (QAP) that will be used to
ensure that the transformer design, material, workmanship, tests, service capability,
maintenance and documentation, will fulfil the requirements stated in the contract
documents, standards, specifications and regulations. The QAP shall be based on
and include relevant parts to fulfil the requirements of ISO 9001:2000.
3.7.27.2 The Manufacturers Declaration of Conformity to reference standards and copies of
quality management certifications including copy of valid ISO 9001: 2000 certificate shall
be submitted with the tender for evaluation.
3.7.28 TESTS AND INSPECTION
3.7.28.1 The transformer shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of
IEC 60076 and this specification. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to
perform or to have performed all the tests specified. Tenderers shall confirm the
manufacturers capabilities in this regard when submitting tenders. Any limitations shall
be clearly specified.
3.7.28.2 Certified true copies of previous Type Test Certificates and Type Test Reports issued by
the relevant International or National Testing/ Standards Authority or ISO/IEC
17025/ILAC accredited laboratory shall be submitted with the offer for evaluation (all in
English Language). A copy of the accreditation certificate for the laboratory shall also be
submitted. Any translations of certificates and test reports into English language shall
be signed and stamped by the Testing Authority.
Copies of type test certificates and reports for the transformer to be submitted shall
include:
Dielectric tests to IEC 60076 (Lightning Impulse and Power Frequency Withstand
Tests).
Short circuit withstand test to IEC 60076.
Temperature rise test to IEC 60076.
3.7.28.3 The transformer shall be subject to acceptance tests at the manufactures works before
dispatch. Acceptance tests shall be witnessed by two Engineers appointed by The Kenya
Ports Authority (KPA) and shall include the following:
3.7.28.4 Routine tests to IEC 60076 (to be done during acceptance testing at factory)
Measurement of winding resistance
Ratio test
Vector group
Separate source voltage withstand test
Induced over-voltage
Insulation resistance
Oil leakage test on fully assembled transformer for 12 hours
Measurement of impedance voltage
Magnetic balance
Measurement of no-load loss and current
Measurement of load loss (at normal & extreme taps)
Tests on on-load tap-changer
Tests on on-load tap-changer remote control panel
Efficiency at 50%, 75%, 100% loading at unity p.f and rated terminal voltage
(Corrected to 75C)
Lightning impulse withstand test


3.7.28.5 Type Tests to IEC 60076 (to be done during acceptance testing at factory)
Temperature rise test To be performed on the two units during acceptance testing.
3.7.28.6 Additional tests (to be done during acceptance testing at factory)
Measurement of power taken by the fans
Insulation dissipation factor
Condenser bushing capacitance and tan delta
DGA (dissolved gas analysis) of the insulating oil.- To be performed before and
after temperature rise test
Acoustic and sound level
Sweep Frequency Response Analysis
Insulation tests on the auxiliary wiring in the marshalling boxes
Measurement of zero sequence impedance
Measurement of harmonics no-load current
CT ratio and polarity
Measurement of zero phase sequence impedance
Paint thickness
Tank pressure test
3.7.28.7 Testing Facility
The manufacture shall provide current e-mail address, fax and telephone numbers and
contact person at the International or National Standards and Testing Facility of the
country where the transformer is manufactured and tested.
3.7.28.8 Test reports for each transformer (including its individual components) shall be
submitted to The Kenya Ports Authority for approval before shipment.
3.7.28.9 On receipt of the transformer KPA will inspect it and may perform or have performed
any of the relevant tests in order to verify compliance with the specification. The
manufacturer shall replace/rectify without charge to KPA, equipment which upon
examination, test or use fail to meet any or all of the requirements in the specification.
3.7.29 MARKING, LABELLING AND PACKING
3.7.29.1 The transformer and associated components shall be packed in a manner as to protect it
from any damage in transportation and handling.
3.7.29.2 Each assembly and package of items associated with the transformer shall be suitably
marked.
3.7.29.3 In addition to markings and labels required elsewhere in the specification, each
equipment and component shall be marked in accordance with the relevant IEC standard.
Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate of weatherproof material, fitted in a
visible position, showing the appropriate details listed in IEC 60076. The entries on the
plate shall be indelibly marked (either by etching, engraving or stamping).
3.7.29.4 In addition, the name plate shall include load and no load losses for the highest, lowest
and principle tap positions, temperature class of insulation, connection diagram and the
inscription PROPERTY OF KPA.' all marked indelibly.
completely filled.

3.8 SUB STATION LOCAL TRANSFORMER
3.8.1 SCOPE


This specification is for a 200kVA, 11000/433 volts three phase distribution transformer
for substation auxiliary supply.
A changeover control panel shall be installed in the control room to enable supply
changeover from either of the station transformer to the distribution boards.
3.8.2 GENERAL
3.8.2.1 The transformer shall be outdoor, oil immersed core type and shall be manufactured and
tested as per IEC 76.
3.8.2.2 The complete transformer shall be painted and the final colour shall be Dark Admiralty
Grey colour No.632 as per BS 381C. The inside of the tank shall be coated with oil
resisting varnish or paint so that oil cannot come into contact with tank or metal at any
point.
3.8.2.3 The 200kVA transformers shall be fitted with skids and provided with 40.0mm diameter
axle hole for jacking lugs and suitable for concrete plinth mounting.
3.8.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.8.3.1 The transformer tank shall be constructed of corrugated mild steel plates fabricated by
pressing or rolling.The transformer tank shall be sealed by means of suitable gasket or
welding and be fitted with dial type thermometer and earth terminals.
3.8.3.2 The cores shall be constructed of high quality low loss grain oriented electrical steel
laminations. The design shall ensure no hot sections due to overfluxing or circulating
currents. The flux density at any point shall not exceed 1.65 tesla.
3.8.3.3 The windings shall be of electrolytic copper wires capable of sustaining short circuit forces
on the transformer.
3.8.3.4 The high voltage winding shall have tappings at 2 X 2.5% operated by an off-circuit
switch with marked position indicators.
3.8.3.5 The three-phase transformer shall be wound to IEC vector reference Dyn11.
3.8.3.6 Outdoor weatherproof bushings, provided with screwed stem and nuts shall be mounted
on the tank cover, arranged to be changed without opening transformer. The high voltage
bushing shall be fitted with adjustable double-gap arcing horns set at 2 X 55mm gaps.
The minimum creepage distance of the bushing shall not be less than 990mm for 11kV.
3.8.3.7 Cooling of the transformer shall be by natural circulation of oil and natural circulation of
air (ONAN).
3.8.3.8 The transformer shall be filled with oil as per IEC 296.
3.8.3.9 The transformer shall be provided with a metallic name plate giving the required rating
and other particulars.
3.8.4 STANDARD SIZES
The standard size for the Substation local supply transformers shall be 200kVA; three
phase 11000/433 Volts.

3.8.5 RATINGS
3.8.5.1 The transformer shall be capable of carrying its full normal rated current continuously
under the tropical conditions stated, and at any tappings without the temperature rise in
the hottest region exceeding 60C and 65C in oil and winding respectively.
3.8.5.2 Transformer shall be capable for sustaining a three-phase symmetrical short circuit on
the low voltage side with power maintained on the high voltage side without damage or
distress for 2 seconds.
3.8.5.3 The impedance voltage measured at the normal tap shall not exceed the value indicated in
the following table.

RATING (kVA) PHASE HIGHEST SYSTEM
VOLTAGE (kV)
Maximum %
IMPEDANCE



200

3

12

4.0

The guaranteed losses shall be as indicated in the following tables, subject to a tolerance of 10%
on total losses.
RATING (kVA) PHASE HIGHEST
SYSTEM
VOLTAGE (kV)

NO LOAD
LOSSES $/kW

FULL LOAD
LOSSES
$/kW

200

3

12

2577 4339

NB:- Where tenders are being compared, losses will be capitalized at the above rate and added to
the bid evaluated price of the transformer.
3.8.6 TESTS
3.8.6.1 Type and routine tests shall be carried out as per IEC 76.
3.8.6.2 All transformers shall be subjected to inspection and routine tests.
3.8.6.3 Test reports shall be completed for each transformer and made available after the tests
have been carried out.
The following spare parts shall be supplied for the transformer:
1 bushing of each type with conductor and terminals
1 set of gaskets
1 dial type thermometer.
All other accessories necessary for full installation and maintenance shall be provided for
the Transformer.

completely filled
3.9 11kV UNIT SPECIFICATIONS (Refer to part B. of this section for the Technical
Specifications for 11kV switchgear )
3.10 CONTROL, MEASURING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYING EQUIPMENT
3.10.1 SCOPE
This subsection covers the design, detailing, manufacture testing before shipments,
packing, transport to site, erection and tests at the site of the following equipment:
Set of Protective relays, controls and accessories for 132kV switchgear
3.10.2 Requirements for Design
The equipment for the control system shall be highly reliable, durable and suitable for
continuous operation.
The equipment shall be designed to be fail safe for the possible failure of any major
circuit during the operation and shall provide a safe guard against possible surges, fail
safe against disrupted surges against disrupted signals due to outside interference that
would normally be associated with the cable communication lines and any other
provisions necessary for the efficient operation of the equipment.
All instrument scales, coils, relay contacts and other features shall be suitable for the
apparatus controlled or the purpose intended.
The control and relay panels provided under this subsection shall be located in the control
rooms of the substation.
It shall be the contractors responsibility to properly design the electrical control, protective
relaying, alarm and indication schemes related to all equipment to be provided under this
contract and to co-ordinate with the existing control and relaying system.


The Contractor shall prepare arrangement and detailed drawings, equipment lists and
wiring diagrams based on the requirements for meters, relays, control switches, indicating
lamps and other devices including those to be supplied under other subsections.

3.10.3 Protection and Alarm
General
Protection against electrical faults and abnormal conditions on 132kV switchgear shall be
conducted by the protective relays and switches.

3.11 ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND PANELS
3.11.1 General
The electrical Measuring protective relays for the 132 kV line shall be of Numeric Design
type suitable for operation with the current transformer secondary of 1A and the voltage
transformer secondary of 110V, as shown on the single line diagrams.
Auxiliary relays of Static or ELECTROMECHANICAL DESIGN are acceptable.
The protective relays and their auxiliary relays shall operate successfully for any value of
the DC supply voltage between 85% and 120% of the rated voltage of 110V without
exceeding the temperature rise limits for the operating coils.
The protective relays and necessary auxiliaries shall be housed in the metal enclosed
cubicle.
Each protective relay shall be of the flush mounted, back connected, dustproof switch
board type with rectangular case. Each relay shall have a removable transparent cover or
cover with a transparent window, with provision for sealing. It is preferred that each
measuring relay shall be of a withdrawable type from the front of the panel with sliding
contacts, without opening the current transformer secondary circuits, disturbing external
circuits or requiring disconnection of leads on the rear of the panels. Each protective relay
shall be equipped with a red operation indicator and contacts for operation on 110 Volt DC
for each phase, and external, front operated, manual-resetting device.
Each protective relay shall be equipped with adequate electrically independent contacts of
adequate rating for trip and alarm functions. Test facilities shall be provided as an integral
part of each protective Switchgear relay panel for testing of current and voltage
transformer secondary circuits and trip circuit using secondary injection test equipment.

3.12 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS FOR RELAYS, ENERGY METER, TRIP BATTERY &
CHARGER.
These specifications indicate the required performance characteristics.
3.12.1 PROTECTION RELAYS.
This must satisfy the requirements for distance, Three Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault
Relay and Sensitive Earth Fault Relay.
NB: See detailed specifications for each of the above protection functions, below.
Restricted Earth fault relay
Relay must be of Numerical type
Relay should reject harmonics produced by C.T saturation
The offer should include the associated stabilising resistor and voltage dependent
resistor (metrosil)
Current setting range 0.05-0.8In
Operating time < 25ms at 5 times the setting
Three phase overcurrent and earth fault relay
Should incorporate the following Features;
Relay must be of Numerical Type


Current setting range for overcurrent relay 0.5In-2.4In
Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.05In-0.8In
I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS142 or IEC255 i.e. SI,VI,EI,LTI, including
definite time for the high-set Elements.
Time setting multiplier 0.05 - 1.0
Broken conductor protection feature
Negative sequence Protection Feature
High set Element for both overcurrent and earth fault
Protection, with a setting range of 1-30In.
Thermal Protection
Dedicated Breaker Fail Protection.
Circuit Breaker Maintenance
Fault records, Event Records and disturbance records.
Configurable output relays with ability to output starting elements to control Tripping of
other upstream Protection relays.
Drop off /pickup ratio >90%
Low transient overreach < 10%
Earth Fault Relay.
Current setting range 0.05In-0.8In
I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS142 or IEC255 i.e. SI, VI, EI, LTI, including definite
time for the high-set Elements.
Highset Element with a setting range of 1-30In.
Sensitive Earth Fault Relay.
Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.005In- 0.8In
Definite time delay characteristic; setting range, 0- 30 Seconds.
Three- Phase Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay.
Relay must be of Numerical design.
Current setting range for overcurrent relay 0.5In-2.4In
Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.05In-0.8In
Quadrature connection for polarising voltage (Vn=110)
Applicable on the LV side of a Dyn1 transformer
High set Element, with a setting range of 1-32In
The phase and earth directional elements should be individually selectable.
I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS 142 or IEC 255 and Definite time characteristic


The normal operating boundary shall be +/-90 degrees from relay characteristic angle
Relay sensitivity should be 1% of rated value of current and current polarising voltage at an angle
equal to the relay characteristic angle.
Negative sequence Protection Feature
Highset Element for both overcurrent and earth fault Protection, with a setting range of 1-
30In.
Thermal Protection.
Dedicated Breaker Fail Protection.
Incorporate Fault records, Event Records and disturbance records.
Trip relay
High burden tripping relay, immune to capacitance discharge currents and leakage
currents
At least 8 pairs of outputs contacts two of which should be normally closed (NC) contacts
Instantaneous operation, t <12ms
Flag or target should be a red L.E.D or bulb and should be electrically reset
Trip circuit supervision Relay
The relay should have the following features
Continuous supervision of trip circuit for circuit breaker in both OPEN& CLOSE position
Trip circuit fail - Red L.E.D
Trip Circuit Healthy Green L.E.D
Contacts should be available to wired for annunciation and scada
Two normally closed and three normally open output contacts
NB: The relay L.E.Ds should be visible from the front of the panel without opening the panel
door(s).
Annunciator unit
Should have Silence, Accept and Reset
Accommodate 18 alarm Elements
Relay output for audible alarm and self supervision
Integrated event register to provide analysis of the latest five (5) events
Discrepancy switch for circuit breaker control
At least 2 pairs of contacts for CB closing
At least 2 pairs of contacts for CB tripping
For operation up to 110 V dc

Semaphore for isolator and earth switch position indication
Preferably with Red L.E.D for ON indication and Green L.E.D for OFF Indication.
Transducers:
MW Transducer:
Connection shall be 3-Phase 3or 4-Wire
Inputs 110V AC and 1Amp
Output shall be 0 - +/- 20 mA
Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC, separately connected.
MVAr Transducer:


Connection shall be 3-Phase 3 or 4-Wire
Inputs 110V AC and 1Amp
Output shall be 0 - +/- 20 mA
Current Transducer:
Input 0- 1Amp
Output 0 20 mA
Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC
iv)Voltage Transducer:
Input 0- 110 Volts
Output 0 20 mA
Breaker Failure Protection Relay
The breaker fail protection relay should have the following features:
Numeric design
Circuit breaker failure protection, single or three pole with or without current
Three phase overcurrent detectors.
Earth fault detector.
2 out of 4 check of current detectors
Independently settable delay times for operation with and without current
No current condition control using the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
Two stage delay, hence two stages of operation
Trip command input.
Necessary logic to determine breaker fail condition.
Operator keypad with display
Display of line measured current values
Serial Interface
Annunciation and storage of previous events.
Self monitoring
Pole discrepancy
Flush mounting
LEDs to show phase and stage of operation.

Biased Differential protection for a two winding transformer
This should incorporate the following Features;
Relay Must be of Numerical design
Pick up setting range, 0.1 to 0.5In
Should incorporate a high-set Element with a setting range of up to 20In.
Magnetising current inrush restraint
Integral CT ratio compensation(0.1-2) and vector group compensation
Measurement and indication on the MMI, of phase (HV&LV) ,differential and bias currents.
Storage of Fault records and Event records; the Fault flags should be accessible on the
relay LCD screen without opening the relay cover.
Separate function that performs ovefluxing protection with alarm and trip functions.
5th harmonic restraint feature on the differential Element.
Appropriate Dual Bias characteristic to ensure relay stability for heavy through faults
Should incorporate a disturbance recorder feature.
Red L.E.D to indicate Tripping
Relay Self diagnostic and Alarm feature
Ability to Latch output contacts to prevent Transformer re-energisation before carrying out
investigations.


Other specifications
i) TESTING FACILITIES
Separate Test facilities for each AC current, voltage and voltage transformer secondary circuit so
as to give access for testing of each protective relay and its associated circuits. This may consist of
either test terminals blocks for the front of the panel mounting with automatic short circuiting of
the current secondary by means of movement of links from their normal operating position, or a
relay test block mounted adjacent to each or any other suitable testing arrangement.
Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one point only. The
common Protection trip and Alarm circuit for each Panel shall be provided with an isolation link
to facilitate Testing and Breakdown Maintenance.
ii) RELAYS
All measurement relays must be of Numeric design. Static relays can be offered where there are
no equivalent relays of Numeric design.
Electromechanical relays are acceptable only for use as Auxiliary relays and contactors, NOT as
Measuring Relays.
Relays contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents, which they
may be required to control in normal service. Where contacts of the protective relays are unable to
deal directly with the tripping currents, Auxiliary Trip relays shall be provided.
Relays contacts shall make firmly without bounce and the whole of the relay mechanism shall be
as far as possible unaffected by vibration or external magnetic fields.

Relays shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels describing their application and to
include the (IEC) Device Function number. To minimize the effects of electrolysis, relay
coils operating on DC shall be so connected that the coils are not continuously connected
from the positive pole of the battery. Relays shall be suitable for operating on the station
110V DC supply without the use of dropping resistors or diodes.

The relay thermal rating should be such that the fault current clearance times on any
combination of current and time multiplier setting shall not exceed the thermal withstand
capability of the relay (Maximum Fault current=25 KA)
The relays must be IEC 60255 and EMC 89/336/EEC compliant.
iii) RELAY PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE AND CONNECTION CABLES:
Software must be provided for Programming and downloading Data for all Numerical
Relays supplied. The software Users Guide shall also be supplied. The Numerical Relays
will be equipped with an RS232 Communication Port on the front to facilitate
connection to a Laptop. There shall be two extra ports on the back for
communication to regional control and National control independently. The relevant
communication cable, between the Relay and the Laptop shall also be provided (3 cables).
Also communication facilities shall be provided on each Numerical Relay for Remote
Interrogation and Programming of the Numerical Relays. The Relays will also have an MMI
to facilitate manual Relay programming and Data access. Relay Operation due to system
fault, shall be indicated by a Red
L.E.D. and the fault details (flags) shall be displayed on the MMI. Both the Relay
Fault flags and Red L.E.D will be reset without opening the Relay Cover.
3.12.2 Control
Any computer solution proposed shall be based on hardware and software well proven in
HV installations. All data storage media shall be checked for internal faults and virus
before delivery. All data and parameters specified to the individual distributed control
units, shall be stored in a non-volatile memory so no local logic or information will be lost
due to power supply failure.

Remote and Local Control
The substations shall be provided with a microprocessor based substation control and signalling
system (SCS). The system shall accommodate control, data acquisition, alarm handling and trend


analysis. The figure below illustrates the main principles. However, the Employer wants to keep a
conventional back up control facility with indication at bay level (local control). I.e. control of
motorised breakers and switches, status indication of all breakers and switches, analogue or
digital indication of measurands (I and Imax all phases),
MW and MVAr) and alarm annunciation shall be presented by discrete components.
The control of high and medium voltage circuit breakers, isolating switches and tap changers
shall take place in a hierarchy with four levels as described in Project Specific Data Section.
From each level one may block access from higher levels. The control units shall take auxiliary
voltage form the station battery and be equipped with self-supervision systems giving alarm by
internal faults.
The system shall be fail-safe keeping all equipment in the last status by loss of communication to
higher systems.
The system shall be of the state-of-art based on IEC 61850 for operation under electrical
conditions present in high-voltage substations, follow the latest engineering practice, and ensure
long-term compatibility requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the
operating staff.
Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shut-down of the whole
substation automation system. Self-monitoring of single components, modules and
communication shall be incorporated to increase the availability and the reliability of the
equipment and minimize maintenance.
For safety and availability reasons the Substation Automation System shall be based on a
decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-oriented, distributed intelligence.
Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the process.
The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases.
The typical SA layout shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a station and a bay level.
To provide highest reliability the station HMI and the gateways shall work completely independent
meaning retrieving the process data directly from the bay level devices.
Mombasa Port 132kV Transmission line & substation project KPA
Additionally the gateway and the station HMI shall be configured fully redundant to ensure full
functionality in case of single point of failure.
The data concentrator and the station computer shall be connected to a redundant LAN.



3.12.3 Control Stations
Distributed Control Units
Outdoor switchgear shall have a control and relay panel in the control room with facilities
for Local Control. The local control for indoor breakers can be located in the instrument
cabinet.
The protection and control functions can also be combined in one unit. Signals from
protection equipment can alternatively be hardwired to bay control unit.
The bay control unit shall handle position indications from circuit breakers, disconnectors,
earthing switches and transformer tap changer. It shall control closing and opening of
circuit breakers and receive time tag, store and display alarms and measurements.
The position indication from the on load tap changer shall be taken from a potentiometer
switch supplied and mounted on the transformer.
The alarm handling capacity must be sufficient to handle all normal alarms from the
switchgear, the protection, the transformer and the tap changer.
All commands from the remote and supervisory control can be given to bay control unit,
which execute the commands. Conventional interlocks should be retained.
All microprocessor based control equipment such as bay control units shall be galvanic
ally isolated from the environments outside panels, using opto couplers or interposing
relays for signals, galvanic isolated measuring transducers for measurements and relays or
contactors for commands.
All data and parameters specified to the individual distributed control units, shall be
stored in a non-volatile memory so no local logic or information will be lost due to power
supply failure.


Editing and input of local data and parameters shall be performed locally by suitable
programming equipment to be included in the supply. Preferably it should also be possible
to edit any such local data at higher control level and download this information.
Interface with Supervisory Control and Data Facilities
In order to interface and achieve the desired functionality of the SCADA/EMS system, it should be
noted that data concentrators at the substation shall be based on standard IEC 60870- 5-101
protocol. It should be noted that the following SCADA facilities shall be available from the
substation.
Supervisory control of all circuit breakers and motorized line and bus bar isolators.
Remote control of on-load tap changers.
Status Indications of all circuit breakers, isolators, positions of on-load tap changers and
local/remote, Automatic/ Manual, Main/Follower mode of automatic voltage regulators
where applicable. These shall be reported by exception, but system shall allow scan by
demand.
Alarms; Bay alarms, Transformer alarms, Bus bar alarms, station alarms and warning
shall be collected by the SCADA.
Measurements; bus bar voltages, frequency active & reactive power, 30, 48 & 110 V DC
voltages and line currents.
Energy measurements, this shall be at interconnection points and feeders.
Where data concentrators will capture and process data for transmission to the control
centres it is expected that the following functions shall be provided:
Single command outputs, double command outputs for supervisory (on/off) control of
circuit breakers, isolators etc with check-before-execute function.
Regulation command outputs e.g. raise/lower command outputs for transformer tap
changer control and set point transmission with validity check before execution.
Single and double state digital inputs. Each status (open/closed) of two state devices such
as circuit breakers or isolator position should be acquired independent from each other
and checked for validity. Undefined states like open and closed or neither open nor closed
shall be alarmed with run-time monitoring adapted to the HV equipment operation
parameters.
Transformer tap changer position indication should be processed as coded signals, by
digital measurement input modules.
Analogue measured inputs with pre-processing including validity check, local limit
supervision and measurement transmission on exception (only if a significant individually
selectable change occurs).
Measurement transmission with a resolution of at least 10 bit plus sign as this is the most
economical way to increase the overall accuracy of the measurements.
Metering pulse inputs for acquisition of energy values with internal storage to allow cyclic
acquisition of meter readings.
Sequential event recording with time stamping of events (time stamp 10ms, resolution 1
ms)
Selectable priority levels for data acquisition to speed up the acquisition of circuit breaker
status changes and important measurements.
The Contractor shall as part of his supply fill in I/O lists for each substation on the format
specified by the SCADA supplier. The I/O lists will comprise the name tag, address tag
(fitted to the SCADA Contractor's system of addressing the information), ASDU type in
accordance with the agreed interoperability list and other information as required.
Protocols
The Station Controller shall be set up for communication with the Control Centre over a serial
interface with protocol IEC 60870-5-101 and network interface with protocol IEC 60870-5-101.
Switching between the two must be allowed for at any time by changing software parameters.


An international open and defined User Convention must be used (e.g. Norwegian User
Convention or similar) and the Contractor shall inform on which convention he intends to use.
Internally between bay controllers and station controller the Contractor may use an open (not
proprietary) protocol of his own choice. However, the station controller must be able to receive and
transmit information from future extensions on an IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
Communication
All communication between bay units and between bay units and station controller/workstation
shall be on a bus structure, preferably by fibre optic cable.
Indicating and Metering Instruments and Metering Transducers (if used)
Remote indication of measurands shall take place on the station controllers VDU. Local
instruments are used they shall be of the dial type which is easily legible, with black graduations
and numerals on a white background. The instruments shall have a dimension of 96 x 96 mm.
The error of the instruments shall be maximum 1.5% reckoned on the total length of the scale. All
instruments shall be of a narrow frame type.
Preferably the measurements shall be performed directly in the SCS or in the protection relays.
However, if needed, the metering transducers (converters) shall be installed in the boards and
shall be suitable for connection to the potential and current transformers. The cases shall be
hermetically sealed against moisture and dust. Transducer output shall be an impressed DC
current of 0-10 mA output. The maximum meter reading at the receiving end shall be equivalent
to 30% overload of the source value. The permitted resistive load shall be Mat least 1000 ohms.
The accuracy class shall be minimum 1%. The auxiliary voltage, if required (preferably not) shall
be 110 V or 30 V DC. The W and VAr measurements shall be of the three-element (three-
wattmeter) type when connected to primary systems with grounded neutral. W and VAr
measurements for transmission lines, shall be such that the direction of the power flow is
indicated by negative direction towards the substation and positive direction out of the
substation. The voltage shall be measured phase-phase voltage, one reading is sufficient.
The scale on the different types of instruments shall be proposed by the Contractor and be
subject to approval by the Project Manager.
Programming and Fault Finding
Editing and input of local data and parameters shall be performed locally by suitable
programming equipment to be included in the supply. Preferably it should also be possible to edit
any such local data at higher control level and download this information.
The programming equipment shall also be suitable for fault diagnostic.
3.12.4 THE ENERGY METER
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CLASS 0.2S ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS
1 The meters shall conform fully to IEC 687 for class 0.2S Energy Meters and any other
relevant specifications.
2 The meters shall be programmable and relevant software and connection cable to laptop
shall be provided. Meters complying with IEC 61334-4-4-1(DLMS Standard protocol)
shall be preferred.
3 The meters shall have memory and be capable of storage of at least 12 months load
profile and other data.
4 The meters shall be capable of bi-directional metering so as to record faithfully, both
export and import quantities. The accuracy shall be as per IEC 687 in both directions.
5 The quantities to be displayed shall be determined by the user through use of software
that shall be provided. The meters shall be configurable for use in three phase 3 /4-wire
networks systems as follows:-
3x240/415 V, 10 (100) A
3x240/415 V, /5 (1) A
3x /110V, /5 (1) A
6 The meters shall be usable on phase voltages of magnitudes ranging from 100V to 500V,
50 Hz. Meters shall be with voltage-surge protection that meets IEC 687
specifications.
7 The meters shall be for flush panel mounting


8 The meters shall have a non-volatile memory so as to ensure no loss of data during power
failures. Security passwords and switches shall be provided to prevent unauthorized
programming of the meter.
9 The meters shall be suitable for operation in any part of the Republic of Kenya where the
climate varies largely from temperatures between -5 and 40 Degrees Celsius and relative
humidity reaching 95% in some parts. Operating altitudes ranging from sea level to 2200
metres above sea level.
10 The meters shall support multi-tariff metering.
11 The Meters shall incorporate instrumentation for the following measurands: MW, MVAR,
MVA, p.f., Phase Currents, Phase voltages and the angle between individual Phase
Voltage and corresponding phase current. This measurands shall be visible on the Meter
display.
12 The meters MUST have a capability of freezing billing readings on any selected date of the
month.
13 The meters will measure maximum demand for MW, MVAR and MVA and these will be
accessible on the Meter display. The Demand integration period will be programmable.
14 The CT and VT ratios shall be programmable.
15 The meters shall have an accurate internal quartz controlled clock. It should be possible
to reset the clock without loss of billing data.
16 The supplier shall show proof of ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 standards compliance.
17 The meters shall be provided with adequate sealing facilities to prevent tampering.
18 The nameplate and meter details shall be clearly marked using materials and colours that
are durable and indelible.
19 In addition to requirements of IEC 687 the name-plate shall carry the following
particulars:
(a) The inscription The property of Kenya Ports Authority.
(b) Owners serial numbers as directed with a minimum 5mm figure height.
(c) Year of manufacture.
20 The meter base cover shall be of non-metallic, non-hygroscopic, flame retardant, polished
material having high impact-resilience and low dirt absorption properties.The front cover
may be of translucent material with a clear transparent front.
21 The meter shall have a minimum of three sealing - provisions for the meter body,
terminal cover and front cover (where applicable).
22 The meter terminal cover shall be the normal short length with provisions of easy bottom
breakage for cable entry. The terminals shall be of bottom entry, and the arrangement
shall be:-
L1 L 1: L2 L2: L3 L3: N or
I1 V1 I1: I2 V2 I2: I3 V3 I3: N
23 The accuracy shall be Class 0.2
24 The meter errors shall comply with the requirement IEC 687 and shall be adjusted at the
manufacturers works to be within 0.2% between low and high load and shall exhibit good
stability.
25 The meter shall have a warranty against any defects, which may develop due to faulty
material, calibration, transportation or workmanship for a period of not less than
eighteen months from the date of delivery. All defective meters shall be replaced at the
suppliers cost.
26 The following drawings and information shall be required with the tender:
(a) Meter drawing giving all the relevant dimensions.
(b) Wiring diagrams.
(c) Description leaflet including details of programming of the meters
(d) Users and service manuals.
3.12.5 BATTERIES & CHARGER (110 & 48 Volts)
I) PROTECTION AND CONTROL BATTERIES.
The Batteries should be Valve Regulated maintenance free with the following Specs:
1. Capacity 400 Ah at 10 hour discharge rate to 1.85V minimum @20
C.
2. Cells should be complete with all corrosive resistant terminals, links fasteners and terminal
covers and cell record book and labels. Terminals also clearly indicated positive (+) and
negative (-). Specifications data are to be attached to each cell.


3. 2.0 Volts nominal voltage per unit
4. Cells should be capable of delivering 100% capacity at 20C.

5. Container need not to be transparent.
6. Each cell should be of robust construction all round, having fire and mechanical shock
resistant lid/cover assembly.
7. Documentary evidence of the Design Service life at 20C of the batteries must be attached.
Those under 12 years service life will not be considered.
8. All cells of a bank should be of the same dimensions, weight, make,voltage and ampere hour
capacity.
9. The Batteries to be used for protection and control in power stations whose standby
requirement is 10 hours minimum.
10. The chargers to be used with the batteries are constant potential chargers.
11. Supply should be accompanied by a set of detailed instruction manual on maintenance,
Design and operation in English and should include any special instructions. The manuals
to include operational curves and data limits.
12. The Units should have low internal resistance which should be indicated in the manuals.
13. The batteries should have low gas emission whose volume should be indicated in the manual.
14. A list of previous supply to power utilities with quantities for the same battery function should
be included in the tender as documentary proof.

II). BATTERY CHARGER 110 VOLTS
Type
Automatic constant voltage float/boost battery charger
Input
i. Input Voltage 240V Single phase +/- 13%
ii. Frequency 50 Hz +/- 5%.
DC Output
i. Nominal 110V
ii. Current 75A min.
iii. Float setting 129V
iv. Boost setting 156V
DC Output Voltage Regulation (rms)
i. Float mode: +/- 1%
ii. Boost mode: +1%; -4%
iii. For 0- 100% full load and within the input supply limits
iv. 7% of the battery capacity
Operation
i. Altitude: 0 100m a.s.l
ii. Temperature: 0 to 40C
iii. Humidity: 20 90%
iv. Natural air convection
Fault Protection
i. AC mains input MCB
ii. DC output fuse for reverse polarity protection
iii. Automatic current-limiting into load fault condition
Current Limit
i. Set at 100% of full load current
Instruments
i. DIN 72 flush mounting DC output ammeter scaled 0 75A
ii. DIN 72 flush mounting DC voltmeter scaled 0 160V
iii. DIN 72 flush mounting AC voltmeter scale 0 250 V
Controls
i. Illuminated AC on/off mains input MCB fitted on the front panel
ii. Manual float/boost selection switch fitted on the front panel
iii. Alarm cancellation push button
Alarms
i. Mains failure
ii. DC failure


iii. Positive E/fault
iv. Negative E/fault
v. All the above to have LED indication fitted on the front panel
Distribution
i. At least 4 pairs of unfused terminals for the protection circuits.
General
i. The charger should be of free standing type
ii. Technical specifications data, and detailed instruction manual on erection,
commissioning, operation, maintenance, trouble shooting, spares catalogue and including
any special instructions shall be provided. The manual must be in English.
III) BATTERY CHARGER 48 VOLTS
Type
Automatic constant voltage float/boost battery charger
Input
i. Input Voltage 240V Single phase +/- 13%
ii. Frequency 50 Hz +/- 5%.
DC Output
i. Nominal 48V
ii. Current 45A min.
iii. Float setting 54V
iv. Boost setting 60V
DC Output Voltage Regulation (RMS)
i. Float mode: +/- 1%
ii. Boost mode: +1%; -4%
iii. For 0- 100% full load and within the input supply limits
iv. 7% of the battery capacity
Operation
i. Altitude: 0 1500m a.s.l
ii. Temperature: 0 to 40C
iii. Humidity: 20 90%
iv. Natural air convection
Fault Protection
i. AC mains input MCB
ii. DC output fuse for reverse polarity protection
ii. Automatic current-limiting into load fault condition

Current Limit
i. Set at 100% of full load current
Instruments
i. DIN 72 flush mounting DC output ammeter scaled 0 55A
ii. DIN 72 flush mounting DC voltmeter scaled 0 75V
iii. DIN 72 flush mounting AC voltmeter scale 0 250 V
Controls
i. Illuminated AC on/off mains input MCB fitted on the front panel
ii. Manual float/boost selection switch fitted on the front panel
iii. Alarm cancellation push button
Alarms
i. Mains failure
ii. DC failure
iii. Positive E/fault
iv. Negative E/fault
v. All the above to have LED indication fitted o the front panel
Distribution
i. At least 4 pairs of unfused terminals for the communication circuits.
General
iii. The charger should be of free standing type


iv. Technical specifications data, and detailed instruction manual on erection,
commissioning, operation, maintenance, trouble shooting, spares catalogue and including
any special instructions should be provided. The manual must be in English.
completely filled
3.13 TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
It is proposed to have a 48 fibre OPGW on the line its associated Terminal equipment, RTU
for SCADA and a telephone extension.
3.13.1 OPGW, COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT AND SCADA REQUIREMENTS
The Scope will include Supply and Installation of communications, telephones,
teleprotection and SCADA equipment for the efficient supervision, control, operation and
maintenance of the transmission system.
3.13.2 SCOPE OF WORK
The Scope will include Supply and Installation of communications, telephones,
teleprotection and SCADA equipment for the efficient supervision, control, operation and
maintenance of the transmission system. Optical fibre communication link with its
associated terminal equipment is required from the Kipevu Substation to the new
Mombasa Port Substation. The contractor shall include detailed system design,
manufacture, supply, installation, testing, commissioning, remedying of defects,
maintaining the works during the defects liability period and any incidental work
necessary for the proper completion of the work in accordance with this contract.
FATs shall be carried out for fibre, OLTE and RTU as per cls 1.24. Training shall be carried
out for RTU and SDH equipment.
Detailed requirements are as follows:-
System design The system design and preparation of contractor's drawings to approval of
the Engineer
Supply and installation of fibre optic lead-in cables including mounting hardware and
splicing.
Supply and installation of lead in cables to the equipment terminals
Supply and installation of fibre optic terminal and multiplexing
Supply and installation of supervisory management system and cabling to the relevant
distribution frame(s)
Supply and installation of DC power supplies to the new substation.
Factory testing of the terminal equipment and supervisory prior to delivery.
Testing and commissioning of the systems up to the terminal equipment and integration to
existing SCADA system. The OLTEs shall be incorporated in the existing network
management system.
Multiplexed signals for permissive and direct inter-trips for the 132 circuits
3.13.3 OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW)
The transmission line earth wire integrating optical fibres shall be of design and
construction to ensure long service with high economy and low maintenance costs. It shall
be suitable in every respect for continuous operation at nominal parameters as well as in
transient operating conditions under the climatic conditions peculiar to the site.
The OPGW shall incorporate at least 48 optical fibres. The OPGW constitution shall be of
stranded aluminum-clad steel (ACS) wires or Galvanized steel wires (GS). Other OPGW
types are acceptable if the required performance characteristics are met.
All materials used shall be of the best quality and workmanship, and shall be of the
highest class throughout with the designs and dimensions of all parts such that the
stresses to which the OPGW are subjected to shall not render them liable to distortion or
damage under the most severe conditions encountered during installation as well as in
service.


Special attention shall be paid to the OPGW stranding process to ensure the necessary
tightness between different layers in order to avoid slippage or relative movement of
strands or cage formation during stringing
Stranding tolerances as well as inspection and testing shall be as per IEC 61089 as far as
applicable, and to the respective manufacturing standards.
The OPGW manufacturer shall have ISO 9000 quality assurance system certified and shall
prove a minimum experience in successful supply of similar OPGW in the last 5 years.
The OPGW installation shall include all cable fittings (tension and suspension spirals,
vibration dampers, earth connection etc.), joint boxes, termination boxes, fibre connectors
and other accessories required for a complete working fibre link.
3.13.3.1 Optical fibre parameter and performance
The OPGW, access cables and underground cables shall have at least 48 (forty-eight)
single mode optical fibres with following characteristics:
Transmission wavelength: 1310 nm and 1550 nm
Mode field diameter: 9.0 to 11.5 micrometers (mm), including tolerances
Optical cladding diameter: 125 mm 2.4%
Cable Attenuation: not greater than 0.38 dB/km for every fibre in every drum at
optical wavelength of 1310 nm; and not greater than 0.25 dB/km for every fibre in
every drum at optical wavelength of 1550 nm
Joint attenuation: not greater than 0.1 dB at optical wavelength of 1310 nm and
not greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm for every fibre, measured on the fully installed
joint
Total dispersion: not greater than 3.5 ps/km.nm at optical wavelength of 1310 nm
and not greater than 19.0 ps/km.nm at optical wavelength of 1550 nm
Core numerical aperture: less than 0.23
Life span: greater than 30 years
The Contractor is required to supply a graph of attenuation versus wavelength over the
range of 1200 nm to 1600 nm
No joints shall be allowed in any fibre in any drum length.
Discontinuities will be acceptable if:
Less than 0.10 dB in magnitude measured at 1310 nm, and
OTDR traces from both ends of the cable at 1310 and 1550 nm wavelength show a
difference of less than 0.05 dB/km for every fibre in every drum.
Power Meter & Light source. The test shall be used to verify that the measured loss
is in average equal or less than the calculated link budget.
The Contractor shall state the refractive index of the optical fibres at 1310 nm and 1550
nm.
3.13.3.2 Splice Boxes
The OPGW shall generally be cut and jointed at angle towers, but not at all angle points. It
shall be continuously strung with OPGW sections as long as possible. At all angle points
the prescribed minimum bending radius shall be observed. If necessary, special tandem or
multiple stringing blocks have to be used for stringing the OPGW at angle points.
Bidders shall supply detailed information, including physical dimensions and weights, of
joint, gantry and termination boxes that they propose using. Joint boxes shall be used to
join sections of the OPGW together along the route.
The joint boxes shall be of the 'hood' type with encapsulated cable entry and they shall be
mounted within the framework of the transmission towers not less than 8 m above the
base.
Note: All fibre jointing and testing shall be carried out at ground level, after which the joint
box shall be lifted into position and the cable loops carefully secured to the tower members
in such a manner that there is no risk of damage to the cable from persons climbing the
towers.



3.13.3.3 Cable Accessories
Contractors shall provide detailed specifications for all types of cable accessories (anchor
and suspension spirals, vibration dampers, earth connections and clamps, etc.) used in
the installation of the OPGW.
Optical ground wire suspension and tension assemblies shall be based on pre-formed
spiral armatures according to the OPGW cable manufacturer's specification so as to assure
the required minimum bending radius of the ground wire and to avoid concentrations of
mechanical stresses applied to the cable.
The suspension assemblies (armor grip suspension) shall be based on helical rods made of
high-tensile, corrosion-resistant aluminum alloy. For the tension assemblies the helical
rods shall be of aluminum clad steel for the ACS type OPGW.
It is understood that all other small parts, for instance for fixing the OPGW along the tower
structure from the earth wire peak up to the OPGW joint box and cable accessories are
supplied under the contract.
The safety factors for the OPGW suspension and tension assemblies shall be at least equal
to those prescribed for the earth wire as per VDE 0210.
The manufacturer of the spiral armatures shall have experience of at least 5 years
successful production of the offered type of fittings.
Fibre standard ITU-T G.652 D

3.13.4 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
The terminal equipment shall be the type SDH STM-1 optical terminal equipment.
Communication equipment in Mombasa Port Substation:
SDH (STM-1) multiplexer shall be installed in racks that are EMC compatible and suitable
to work in HV system environments.
The multiplexer shall be based on the SDH technology, working on the basic transmission
Bit
Rate of 155.520 Mbit/s (STM-1). It shall be in accordance with the latest ITU-T SDH
recommendations such as: G.703, G.704, G774, G.783, G.784, G.785, G.811, G.812,
G.813, G.823, G.825, G.826 and M.3010.
The equipment shall be able to perform both, multiplexing and line terminating functions.
The SDH Equipment (Terminal Equipment, Add/Drop Multiplex, Synchronous Digital
Cross- Connect) to be offered shall meet the following requirements:
It shall have at least all the functions outlined in ITU-T G.783.
The PDH electrical tributary interfaces to the SDH equipment shall conform to ITU-
T G.703.
The SDH electrical and optical interfaces shall conform to ITU-T G.703 and G.957.
The cross-connect offered shall be capable of providing non-blocking connection
between virtual containers.
The Optical Power to be offered shall be such that under normal operating condition,
the BER of the system at the receiver is better than 1x10-10. Error performance versus
the receive signal shall be verified during the factory acceptance tests.
The multiplex structure shall conform to ITU-T G.707. Details of the Multiplex structure
for the offered equipment including the usage of the overhead bits shall be detailed with
the offer.
The synchronous optical interface protection shall be achieved by having 1+1 protection.


The laser shall automatically cut-off when the link is disturbed. Redundant cross connect,
where failure on either one shall not cause link outage, and path protection on the traffic
interface and the 2 Mbit/s levels shall also be provided.
Timing and synchronization shall conform to ITU-T G. 783, G.811, G.812 and G.813.
Timing references, number of timing references available, switching time to a different
timing reference, type and level of clocks shall be stated in the offer.
The equipment shall automatically switch to another clock if the reference timing is lost
and automatically revert back upon restoration. The accuracy of the internal clock as well
as the details of the clock signal distribution shall also be stated in the offer.
The equipment shall be capable of diverting timing references between the STM-1, 2
Mbit/s and a G.703 tributary interfaces.
The SDH equipment shall be wired for the full STM-1 capacity, however equipped under
the scope of this specification to receive at least four (4) PCM tributaries as specified below.
However, if higher PDH signals other than the 2 Mbit/s are required to be routed through,
the same shall be possible just by adding the respective interface cards and no extra
wiring needed.
It shall have 2 Mbit/s outputs where it can directly be connected to digital telephone
exchanges or teleprotection equipment.
The jitter and wander tolerance for PDH and SDH interfaces shall conform to ITU-T G.823
and G.825. Jitter and wander characteristics of SDH multiplex and line equipment shall
conform to ITU-T G.783.
The Contractor shall submit the details of the power budget calculations stating the
following (based on 0.25 dB/km optical fibre attenuation at 1550 nm):
Transmitter Power
Minimum receive Signal @ BER 1x10-10
Connector Loss
Repair Splice Loss
Power Penalty (Chromatic dispersion and LD reflection Loss)
Maintenance Margin (> 2dB)
Other Loss
System Margin
The SDH equipment to be offered shall provide the followings:
A data communication channel to the Telecommunication Management Network, in
accordance with ITU-T G.773 for the purpose of integration of the new equipment into
the Telecommunication Network Management System.
A Craft interface in accordance with ITU-T G.773 to allow a local terminal to access the
network element.
An engineer orderwire which shall have conference and selective calling features.
Performance monitoring in accordance with ITU-T G.784 and G.826.
Optical safety as per ITU-T G.783.
The alarm functions shall include but not limited to:
Alarms classified as critical, major, minor, and information.
Indications of loss of incoming signal.
Visual and audible indication of alarms.
Test function of alarm indicators to ensure workability of alarm indicators.
Alarm functions shall be detailed by the Contractor, e.g. if implemented in Telecommunication
Network Management System.
Test functions of the equipment shall include as a minimum:
Transmit output
Receive Sensitivity
BER
Protection switching
Engineer Order-wire


Alarms
Supply Voltages
Test loops
The Contractor shall give details of all other functions available on the equipment / system.
The equipment shall have a proven record by submitting a reference list, that it has been
installed and operated in similar environment.
The power supply voltage and range shall comply with the characteristics of the DC
system, the rated voltage being 48 Volt DC 15.SCADA and voice communications,
including all necessary interface cards. This will provide for new protection. SCADA
and voice signals installed under this project as well as any existing services which the
client required to be carried on the optical fibre.
Lead in cable shall be provided at the new Substation to connect the OPGW to the terminal
equipment.
DC power supplies will be provided at the new substation.
Optical Distribution Flames (ODF)
Each Optical Line Terminal Equipment (OLTE) or SDH multiplexer shall include an optical
distribution frame, installed in a own wall mounted fixed cubicle.
Assignment between station fibre cable and OLTE's shall be made by using patch cords
between the termination box and the optic distribution frame. Capacity of the optic
distribution frame shall allow free assignment between each individual fibre of the station
fibre optic cables and the relevant optical I/O ports of the OLTE's.
The optic distribution frame shall be equipped with low loss optical connectors (< 0.3 Db
including the loss in the bulk head, loss in the connector splice & the loss in the pig tail) of
the screw-on type. Auxiliary connectors shall be provided to facilitate testing and maintenance
of the fibres/equipment. All spare fibres shall be properly terminated and spliced on
connectors of the same type within the frame.
3.13.5 SPEECH EQUIPMENT
Its proposed to connect two remote extensions from this exchange to each of the new
substation through the proposed communication Link. Seller shall provide the Telephone
sets at the new substations
3.13.6 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS
Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) shall be installed at the new substation, purposes of
Control/supervisory of the substation. New RTUs shall be equipped with a 25% spare
capacity.
The following signals if available, shall be collected via SCADA
Control of circuit breakers and isolators
Supervisory control of all 132 kV, Circuit Breakers (CBs) Supervisory control of all 132
kV motorised line and busbar isolators.
Voltage control / voltage regulation:
Remote control of all on-load tap changers for all 132/11 kV transformers
Status Indications:
Status indication of 132 kV circuit breakers at substations equipped with RTUs. For
acquisition of and 132 kV CB status indications the auxiliary contracts of only one pole
shall be wired for CB closed position and for open position. Status indication of all
132 kV and line and busbar isolators Position indication of on-load tap changers of
132/11 kV transformers,
Status indication of "Local / Remote", "Automatic / Manual" and "Master / Follower"
mode of automatic voltage regulators where applicable
Alarms:
Bay Alarms: For each bay, the following protection signals shall be acquired individually if
available:


"Main Protection 1 Trip" (MP1)
"Main Protection 2 Trip" (MP2)
"Backup Protection Trip" (BPT)
"Permissive Trip Signal A Send" (PAS)
"Permissive Trip Signal A Received" (PAR)
"Permissive Trip Signal B Send" (PBS)
"Permissive Trip Signal B Received" (PBR)
"Blocking Signal Send" (BSS)
"Blocking Signal Received" (BSR)
"Direct Transfer Trip Send" (DTS)
"Direct Transfer Trip Received" (DTR)
"PT Fail A" (PTA)
"PT Fail B" (PTB)
"Trip Circuit Faulty" (TCF)
"Protection A Faulty" (PAF)
"Protection B Faulty" (PBF)
"SF6 Low 1st Step (SF1)
"SF6 Low 2nd Step (SF2)
"CB Failure Protection Operated" (FPO)
"CB Spring Charging Failure" (SCF)
"Local Control Position of Selector Switch" (LCP)
"CB Pole discrepancy protection" (CBD)
Depending on the type of bay (line, transformer, bus coupler), the voltage level and the
respective protection philosophy, the Main and Back-up Protection Alarms may be a "Distance
Protection 1 trip", "Distance Protection 2 trip", "Differential Protection trip", "Overcurrent
Protection trip", "Overload protection trip", "Directional earth fault protection trip" etc.
Other alarms generated for the individual bays or circuit breakers shall be grouped at the
station level and then transmitted to the respective Control Centre "Circuit Breaker Faulty"
(CBF) as one common (grouped) alarm for other failures that do affect the operation of the
circuit breaker and need immediate attention / repair. "Bay faulty" (BFY) as one common
(grouped) alarm for all other failures that do not affect the operation of the circuit breaker.
Transformer alarms:
"Temperature Alarm" (TTA) oil and winding temperature as grouped alarm
"Temperature Trip" (TTT) oil and winding temperature as grouped alarm "Buchholz Alarm"
(TBA) tank and OLTC as grouped alarm
"Buchholz Trip" (TBT) tank and OLTC as grouped alarm
"Transformer Oil Level (Low and High)" (TOL)
"Transformer Cooling fan Trouble" (TCT)
"Transformer Bank out of Step" (TBS)
"Transformer Bank Independent" (TBI)
"Transformer OLTC Control/Supply Failure" (TCC)
"Transformer OLTC Loss of Sensing to HS" (TCS)
"General Alarm" (TGA) all other alarms except the above as one grouped alarm
"General Trip" (TGT) all other trip signals except the above as one grouped alarm
Busbars Alarms:
Busbar differential protection trip (BDT)
Busbar voltage status (BVS)
Busbar supervision operated


Station alarms and warnings:
110 V DC alarm (DA1)
110 V Battery Charger Trouble (BCT)
48 V DC alarm
48 V Battery Charger B Trouble
Protection Panel Under voltage (PPU)
Protection Panel DC Supply Trip (PPS)
Auxiliary supply fault (AUX)
Smoke detected in Control room (SCR)
Station Control Disabled (SCD)
RTU alarm (RTU)
Communication alarm (COM)
The RTU shall be synchronised by use of a GPS.
The new RTU shall be programmable, with real time clock, synchronised by an external
source, process Input and Output (I/O) modules, CPU, memory and data transmission
equipment.
The new RTU to be supplied and installed under the project shall provide at least the following
functions:
single command outputs, double command outputs
regulation command outputs e.g. raise/lower command outputs for transformer tap
changer control
analog setpoint transmission and output
single, double and multiple state digital inputs
analogue measured inputs
metering pulse inputs for acquisition of energy meter values
Sequential Event Recording (SER) with time stamping of events at the RTU
RTU time synchronization
self testing and diagnostic functions for detection and reporting of any error
automatic re-starting function
Mombasa Port 132kV Transmission line & substation project KPA
database and parameter setting by menu-controlled dialogues from a local PC and
remotely from the corresponding control centre with downloading function.
Bidders shall with their offer inform about the different types of data transmission protocols
available and for the proposed type of RTU.
Telecontrols
The RTU shall have the capability for the SCADA system master station to select and
control specified power system devices. The following power system devices will be
controlled by the RTU:
two-state devices such as circuit breakers and isolators
multi-state devices such as transformer tap changers
Telecommands
The RTU shall ensure that only the correct output is selected for two state devices before
command execution.
Operation of control outputs shall be via a select-check-execute command sequence.
The control sequence shall include the following:
The SCADA system shall transmit a command message addressing the proper RTU and
the control point within the RTU, and indicate the control action desired.
The RTU shall initialize its control logic, reassemble the command message, and transmit
the reassembled message to the SCADA system. The message sent to the SCADA system
shall be generated by the RTU's point selection logic.


The SCADA system shall check the returned message for validity and, if valid, shall issue
an execute command to the RTU.
The RTU shall operate the control point selected only after the execute command has been
received.
The control action shall be executed only if the select-check-execute sequence is performed
without error or interruption. The RTU shall reset its control logic upon any error in the
sequence or if the execute command is not received within a pre-defined time after the
command message is received at the RTU.
The impedance of the output circuit shall be measured to detect jammed contacts.
The point selection logic for the control output shall be designed to preclude operation of an
unselected output under single component failure conditions. That is, no single component
shall be capable of selecting and operating an output point by itself.
In no case, any unwanted telecommand shall be given to the process in case of an RTU power
failure.
The RTU communications protocol shall also support "immediate execute" contact outputs
(where an operation can be commanded without the validity check and execute message
exchange) for control output types such as On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) raise / lower
command outputs.
Teleindications
Teleindication refers to status information of operational equipment monitored by the system.
Such teleindications include status information of switching devices, event information,
alarms, etc.
The RTU shall report teleindications by exception but shall also allow the SCADA system to
demand - scan status data even if the data has not changed.
Status indications
The status (open / closed) of two state devices such as circuit breakers or isolators shall be
acquired by 2 independent, potential - free contacts or by 2 interposing relays, one for each
position. Position indications shall be checked for validity and undefined states like open and
closed (1 | 1) or neither open nor closed (0 | 0) shall be alarmed. The RTU shall provide for
run-time-monitoring, adjustable to the HV equipment operation parameters, to avoid alarming
of undefined states while the equipment (e.g. isolator) is operating.
Alarms
Alarms shall be acquired as single indications via potential - free contacts which are either
available at the initiating equipment or to be generated by paralleling relays to be provided
under the project.
Digital parallel input
The RTUs shall have the ability to handle digital measurands, e.g. four digits BCD.
Transformer tap position shall be coded by means of a diode matrix to a BCD code before
connecting to the digital parallel inputs of the RTU. The Tender shall include complete
functional and electrical specifications of possible input codes and input circuits in the
tendered system.
Telemeasurements
In analogue measurands the information to the RTU is given in the form of an analogue
current supplied by the output of an analog measuring transducer.
The analog signals shall be converted to digital mode by an analog-to-digital converter, to
which the inputs are connected. All inputs of a module shall be measured within one cycle,
regardless of the number of inputs in use. Thus new points can be added to the RTU without
reprogramming.
Analog measurements shall be transmitted to the master station with 12 bits or 11 bits + sign
bit.


Telemetering
The transmission of integrated totals refers to the transmission of measurable quantities
which are integrated over a specified period of time. The integration shall take place before
transmission.
The measured quantity such as active or re-active energy (kWh, kVarh), which is presented as
defined pulses which are read into an integrating register of the RTU from a pulse output or a
closing contact of an energy meter.
Transfers of the accumulated counts into a storage area shall be initiated every 1 minute by
the RTU clock. In case of a failure to scan, e.g. due to failure of the telecommunication system,
1-minutes integrated totals over a period of not less than 1 day shall be stored at the RTU
Pulse accumulator data shall be assigned to a scan group for scanning of the accumulated
values from the SCADA system.
Sequence of Event Recording (SER)
The RTU shall be capable of Sequence-of-Events (SER) data collection at a time resolution less
than the operating speeds of the power system devices. Any digital input points in the RTU
may be assigned, programmable as an SER data point. In general, a breaker position change
and any alarm from a protection device that has initiated a trip signal is defined as an event
for SER. Multiple transitions of a device, such as the tripping and subsequent reclosing of a
breaker, shall be considered as a series of separate events. Each time an event is detected, the
RTU shall time-tag the event and store it together with the time-tag of the event for
transmission to the SCADA system with the next scan.
The buffer shall be sized to store, as a minimum, a number of events equal to three times the
number of SER points implemented in the RTU.
The time-tag recorded with each event shall be generated from a clock internal to the RTU.
Separating capability
The RTU shall be capable of correctly determining the sequence of events for which their
occurrence is separated by >= 1 ms (separating capability class SP4 of IEC 60870-4)
Time resolution
The resolution of the time tag shall be 10 ms.
Common time base
The internal clock of each RTU shall be synchronized either from an internal, Contractor
supplied and installed time synchronization source, such as a Global Positioning System
(GPS) or an omega synchronizing signal.
The synchronization shall be done periodically such that the time-tags in each RTU shall be
within five milliseconds (5 ms) accuracy between all RTUs.
Tenderers shall clearly indicate the method used for time synchronization and describe in
detail how the required accuracy is achieved.
In the RTU there shall be a digital output from which time synchronization messages can be
forwarded to external devices. The frequency of the activation of the message shall be
adjustable.
Data transmission
The data transmission network will consist of dedicated data channels and/or TCP/IP
network utilizing fibre optic transmission media, power line carrier and radio transmission.
The new RTUs shall be capable of dual port function, utilizing different protocols on at
minimum 2 separate RTU communication ports simultaneously. Communication protocols
shall be implemented by modifiable firmware in the RTU. Reconfiguration of the RTU database
may be necessary when an RTU's communications protocol is changed due to the difference in
the functions supported by the protocol.
The Contractor shall provide and implement RTUs with standard IEC 60870-5-101
communications protocol as well as IEC 60870-5-104 communications protocol. Both
protocols shall be included and shall be selectable for each of the RTUs by parameterization.
The interfaces to the different communication media for IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-
104 shall be provided by the RTU hardware.


The RTU protocol shall be non-proprietary for use within KPA. The Contractor shall provide all
details and parameter settings used under the IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5- 104
protocols. KPA shall be authorized to disclose the RTU protocol to third party suppliers.
3.13.6.1 Functional requirements for adaptation works
This Section is dealing with the interfacing equipment and works to be performed at
substations and power stations.
Analogue and digital input data to RTU
Power system analogue and digital input data shall be collected from the substation field
instrumentation and provided to the RTUs. Interfacing shall be designed to minimize
electromagnetic and electrostatic interference.
Analogue measurements
The interfacing shall consist of analogue transducers, isolating/test devices, wiring,
cabling and terminations to the secondary PT/CT circuit in the control or relay cabinets.
The output signal from the analogue transducer shall be transmitted to the appropriate
input at the RTU.
This refers i.e. to MW/MVAr, Current and Voltage measurements.
Status indications
The interfacing shall use spare potential free contacts where available or auxiliary
paralleling relays to be provided under the Contract, (one independent contact / relay for
each position) actuated by the switchgear equipment, isolating and test devices, wiring,
cabling and terminations to the digital input point at the RTU.
Alarms
Input wiring to the RTU from alarm points shall use spare contacts available on the
actuating device wherever possible. Where spare contacts are unavailable, auxiliary
"contact multiplying" relays shall be supplied and wired to provide the required digital
input signal to the RTU.
Pulse accumulation
The pulse accumulation interfacing shall utilize potential-free pulse contacts or pulse
outputs of electronic meters if available, isolation and test devices, wiring, cabling and
terminations to the RTU. Where potential free pulse contacts or pulse outputs are not
available, new meters shall be provided under the Contract.
Supervisory control interface
The outstation adaptation works for device control will be required to take an output signal
from the RTU, actuate an auxiliary control relay, and have a contact from the control relay
to initiate a control action such as breaker trip/close, etc. on the substation equipment by
the appropriate connections to the substations equipment control circuits.
The supervisory control interface shall consist of outputs from the RTU, interposing relays,
isolating/test devices, and wiring, cabling and terminations to the appropriate control
circuits and control relays and switches in control cabinets.
Each RTU control output shall drive an auxiliary control relay, which shall be located in
the control panel or locally. The interposing relay shall be normally de-energized during
normal operation. A normally open contact of these interposing control relays shall actuate
a breaker tripping/closing coil. In no cases shall the relay contacts supplied in the RTU
directly control any equipment.
In no case shall the closing commands for circuit breakers by-pass any station internal
interlocking.
For OLTC devices, appropriate latching relays shall be utilized.
A key type selector switch shall be installed for each feeder equipped for remote control
from the corresponding Control centre. The switch shall allow selection of control from the


Control centre or from the substation and its position shall be indicated at the
corresponding Control centre.
The Contractor shall provide and install suitable test switches or isolating devices for all
control points, to allow for proper control isolation, testing, safety procedures.
Remote terminal units hardware
Enclosures
The Contractor shall provide enclosures meeting the following requirements:
Swing racks supported by heavy gauge hinges shall be provided so that only front
access to components and wiring is required for routine maintenance and
troubleshooting.
Provisions for top and bottom cable entry. Cable entries shall be provided with
protection against insect and animal entry, and sealed to prevent dust and sand
contamination.
Protection class of the enclosures shall be
for indoor cabinets IP52 minimum
for outdoor cabinets IP64 minimum.
Suitable signal and safety ground networks within the enclosure.
Convenience outlets at 230 V AC, shall be provided.
Power supply
The Contractor shall supply any hardware required to convert the 48 V battery voltage to
the required internal voltages for the RTU hardware. The RTUs shall be capable of
operating with ungrounded or grounded (either polarity) input power.
In RTU DC distribution, Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) with alarm contact shall be
used, i.e. fuses are not accepted.
Interconnections
All connections between the RTU's termination facilities and signal wiring shall be through
barrier-terminal blocks with knife-switch isolation, mounted in the RTU panel or an
adjacent marshalling cabinet, if not already exist in the Substation. Terminal blocks shall
be screwtype, with full depth insulating barriers.
Distributed RTUs
RTUs shall have the capability to gather data from other smaller or distributed RTUs or
local intelligent substation instrumentation using directly connected RS-232C- or RS 485-
channels with or without modems. The distance between the different control locations
may reach up to 500 m.
Digital inputs
The digital inputs shall be opto-isolated, signal voltage 48 V DC. Other voltages shall also
be possible by changing the matching resistor in the input circuit.
Contact bouncing of the interposing relays shall be filtered. The bounce filtering time shall
be 7 ms. Input circuits with selectable bounce filtering time setting are preferred.
The indications shall preserve the chronological order of events inside the RTU.
Oscillating inputs as a result of e.g. a faulty relay chattering shall be blocked locally at the
RTU.
Analogue inputs
In analogue measurements, the information to the analog input modules of the RTU is
given in the form of analog current supplied by the output of measuring transducers.
Measuring transducers shall normally be installed in the switch/control gear.
In analog input modules, the following current input ranges shall be available:


unipolar 0-5 mA, 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA
bipolar +/- 5 mA. +/-10 mA, 4-20 mA.
It shall be possible to change the input range for each individual input, preferably by
software means, instead of changing the input resistor.
The analog input circuit shall have a precise DC impedance less than 200 ohms for
current inputs. This impedance must not vary more than half of the accuracy of the
Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) with influence values such as temperature, etc.
In the input circuit galvanic isolation shall be provided from mechanical earth and
electrical earth, and, preferably, between different inputs.
The circuits of the analog input module shall be protected against disturbances caused by
switching transients and against disturbances from power and radio frequencies present
at outstations.
The scanning of each input shall not introduce any error on the analog information.
For each input it must be possible, without disturbing the other inputs,
to isolate the input from the ADC and close the analog circuit,
to connect, on the ADC side, a test set for maintenance or adjustments,
to measure the analog input value without disturbing the measurement (addition of
an mA meter over a link which is then disconnected).
The analog information shall be converted into digital value by the ADC which can be
common for all inputs. Analog measurements shall be transmitted to the master station
with at least 11 bits plus sign bit.
The total accuracy must be better than 0.5% of the nominal range of a measurement
calculated from RTU's analog input up to Control Centre. A calculation of the total
accuracy in the wide sense as well as in the restricted sense as per IEC 870 - 4 shall be
included in the Tender.
The input circuits must withstand a permanent overload of 30% without any damage.
In case of input overload the output message shall be either
the exact value corresponding to the input or
the maximum value that is possible to code (with the correct sign).
Pulse inputs
The counter register shall be 16 bit. The maximum input frequency shall be 25 Hz.
In practice, the pulses will be dimensioned in a way that max. frequency is less than 5 Hz.
Interposing relays will not be used.
RTU firmware requirements
The RTUs shall meet the following characteristics of the firmware to support the functions
of the RTUs. The Contractor shall use standard firmware as much as possible.
All firmware shall be completely and consistently documented. It shall not be necessary to
perform modification to firmware, logic, or data for expansion within the sizing parameters
defined for the RTU.
At the time the RTU is accepted, all firmware delivered must be up to date and in final
form, including all standard firmware changes and field changes initiated by the
Contractor or the Contractor's suppliers prior to acceptance. The firmware documentation
must reflect these changes.
Firmware shall be loadable by service notebook locally at minimum, download of firmware
and parameter sets through SCADA system, using the data communication links will be


referable. In any case changing of EPROMs or similar devices shall not be necessary when
updating RTUs firmware.
Initialization / restart program
Firmware shall be provided to enable the RTU to restart itself upon manual request and
automatically under the conditions of power restoration, memory parity errors, and
hardware failures. The firmware shall initialize the RTU and begin execution of the RTU
functions without intervention by the SCADA system. All RTU restarts shall be reported to
the SCADA system.
Fail safe processing
In the case of irrecoverable faults such as power supply failures, firmware malfunctions, or
any other detected condition that may affect the security of indications and controls, the
RTU shall place itself in a secure state that prohibits the transmission of false indications
or the execution of erroneous control outputs. The detection of these error conditions shall
be the responsibility of the RTUs self-test and operations monitoring firmware.
Database maintenance
The Contractor shall supply software to configure each RTU's database where this
information is located in software and/or firmware at the RTU. The software shall
completely generate or modify the database of the RTUs. The database software shall have
error detection services and shall produce a printed listing of the input data and the
resulting RTU database configuration.
Down loading of database from SCADA system
The RTU shall support the change of the RTU's configuration and processing parameters
by messages from the SCADA system. These changes shall include, but not be limited to
scan group definitions, analog limits, SER point allocation and buffer definitions.
Diagnostic firmware
The Contractor shall supply diagnostic firmware for both off-line local tests and on-line
selfdiagnostic capability built into the RTU. The RTU shall enter an off-line state during
the execution of off-line diagnostics, and this off-line state shall be reported to the SCADA
system.
The RTU shall include a remote diagnostics communication port and shall be capable of
executing off-line diagnostics from an external computer terminal connected to this remote
diagnostics port.
A SCADA interface Marshalling cubicle shall be supplied to interface all power system data
i.e. status indication alarms, analogues, interposing relays for control outputs etc. to the
RTU.
This cubicle shall also house transducers for analogue inputs and interposing relays for
control outputs. 48 volts DC power supplies shall be supplied to power the RTU,
interposing relays, telephones equipment

Special Tools and Measuring Equipment
Special tools and measuring equipment which are used to set up the equipment properly
and which are essential for maintenance shall be provided. This includes service laptops
Fibre Optic and RTU.

completely filled



3.14 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
3.14.1 SCOPE
This subsection covers the design, manufacture, testing before shipment, delivery to Site
and erection and testing at Site of the following materials.
(a) Electrical conductors, cables and fittings
(b) Insulators and fittings
(c) Steel structures
(d) Earthing materials
(e) Other material
(f) Lighting facilities for outdoor switchyard.
3.14.2 CABLES
3.14.2.1 600V Cables
Low-tension circuit from station local transformer to AC distribution panel: 600V cable
shall be copper conductor, polyvinyl chloride insulated PVC sheathed, 600V 300sqmm x 4-
cores.
Low-tension motor circuit from AC distribution panel to each motor:
The sectional area of the 600V cables shall be ample for each motor capacity and shall be
decided by the Contractor taking into account the voltage drop for starting current.
3.14.2.2 Control Cables
Control cables shall be copper conductor, of jacket type, 600V, polyvinyl chloride insulated
PVC sheathed, multi-cores copper. The cross-sectional area of core shall not be less than
2.5 mm. and the cables shall be armoured.The cross-sectional area of core for current
transformer circuit control cables shall not be less than 4 sq mm and shall be armoured.
3.14.2.3 Insulated Wire
600V PVC insulated wire shall be considered stranded copper conductors and used for
power and heater for indoor wirings.
3.14.2.4 Cables Drawn into Ducts
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide ducts and pipes.
Immediately before pulling the cables, the Contractor is to remove any loose material from
the ducts and prove them by drawing through a material of slightly less diameter than the
duct. The ducts shall be water and vermin proof sealed and for indoor installations
fireproof.
3.14.2.5 Cables Installed in Concrete Trenches
In substations concrete trenches and cable ducts shall be provided and installed by the
Contractor. These trenches shall not be filled with sand. All cable duct entries to
buildings, whether or not for cables, shall be protected against entry of water, oil and
vermin with a suitable filling material supplied and installed by the Contractor on the
approval of the Employer.
All cable routes in concrete trenches shall be suitably supported by means of cleats or
racks and raised from the trench floor by means of suitable spacers. All cables shall be
run in a neat and orderly manner and the crossing of cables within the trench shall be
avoided as far as possible.
The Contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing the trench covers free of
charge during the execution of his work as directed by the Engineer.
3.14.2.6 Bus Conductors
Following conductors shall be provided as outdoor bus and jumper conductors:
For 132 kV bus bar and jumper
(i) Pipe bus: Copper pipe 75mm (diameter) x 5mm (thickness)
(ii) Jumper and droppers: AAC. 400 mm2
3.14.2.7 Galvanized Steel Wires
Galvanized steel wires of 55 mm2 (7/3.2 mm) shall be used for overhead ground wires, of
which ultimate tensile strength shall be more than 90 kg/.mm.
3.14.2.8 Fittings
Suitable compression clamps and spacers for conductors, suitable terminals for the
equipment to conductor, and suitable clamps for galvanized steel wire shall be supplied
and installed.


Connecting clamps shall be free from electrolytic corrosion and designed for bi-metal
against the connection between aluminium and copper.
The following tests, as applicable, shall be carried out at the Contractors plant:
(a) Construction test
(b) Tensile strength test
(c) Elongation test
(d) Resistance test
(e) Insulation resistance test
(f) Withstand voltage test
(g) Characteristics

3.14.3 INSULATORS AND FITTINGS
3.14.3.1 Substation Disc Insulator Units
Each suspension and strain insulator string shall be of 12 units for 132kV circuits
without arcing horn. The insulator unit shall be standard 254 mm porcelain, with ball and
socket, and have a spacing of 146 mm between discs, complying with IEC publication 305-
1974. The connection between units shall be such as to allow sufficient flexibility for
freedom of movement, and to prevent the possibility of becoming separated accidentally
either during or after the erection.
The interlocking sockets shall be designed to allow easy passage of the ball into the socket
and retaining or locking devices required to keep in the socket under all service conditions.
The dimensions of socket and pin shall be in accordance with IEC. Recommendation 120,
16mm socket and pin.
The insulator units shall be brown glazed porcelain.
Each insulator unit shall have the following characteristics:

Withstand voltage:
Power frequency, dry 70kV
Power frequency, wet 40kV
Impulse voltage 110kV
Puncture voltage 110kV
Minimum breaking load 70 kN
Minimum creepage per unit 295mm
Minimum creepage for insulator string shall be 3988mm
Minimum breaking load of insulator string with fittings shall be 70 kN.
3.14.3.2 Station Post Insulators
Station post insulators shall be provided for supporting the connecting lead wires of
switchgear equipment to bus. The insulator shall be of brown coloured porcelain rated as
follows:
System voltage 145kV
AC withstand voltage (wet, 1 min.) 290kV
Impulse withstand voltage 685kV
The station post insulator shall comply with IEC.273-1968, IEC 720.
3.14.3.3 Fittings
All fittings shall be malleable iron hot dip galvanized to BS 729.
Suspension and tension clamps shall be as light as possible and of approved types.
All clamps shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded conductors
and separating the individual strands. Tension clamps shall be bolted type, and shall not
permit slipping off or damage to conductors or any part thereof.
Suspension clamps shall be free to pivot in the vertical plane containing the conductor.
Clamps shall not exhibit excessive heating by magnetization or otherwise.
U-bolts, ball hooks, socket-eyes and other necessary fittings required for the above
insulators and clamps shall be provided.
The following tests shall be carried out before shipment:
(a) With stand and flashover voltage


(b) Mechanical strength
(c) Dimensions of insulators and fittings
(d) Galvanizing

3.14.4 STEEL STRUCTURES
3.14.4.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish all steel structures required, including framework of outdoor
equipment.
3.14.4.2 Details of Design
The steel structures shall be designed in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) Vertical loading
The weight of the conductors, ground wires, insulator strings, workers, the structures themselves
and equipment to be supported, if any, shall be considered.
(b) Wind pressure:
(i) On conductors and earth wires: 385 N/m on projected area
(ii) On insulators and all other circular: 385 N/m on projected area section
(iii) On lattice structures or beam structure: 590 N/m on projected area
(c) Working tensions of conductor and wire:
(i) Conductors for 132kV buses-700kg per conductor and for 132kV lines
700kg per conductor
(ii) Overhead ground wire- 500kg per wire
(d) Seismic co-efficient: 0.16
(e) Factor of safety: 2.5
The structures shall be designed so that no failure or permanent distortion shall occur when the
load equivalent to 2.5 times the maximum simultaneous working loads are applied.
(f) Slenderness ratio:
The slenderness ratio shall not exceed 200 for main and web members and 250 for nominal
members.
(g) Member size
No leg members less than 5mm in thickness and 60mm in width of flange for main, and 4mm in
thickness and 45mm in width of flange for web and nominal members shall be used.
(h) Bolts and nuts
All the members shall be connected by bolts and nuts. The size of the connection bolts shall be
not less than 16mm for leg member. The suitable anchor bolts shall be provided. The size of step
bolts shall be 16mm.
The Contractor shall submit full details and drawings for the steel structures to the Employer for
approval prior to commencing fabrication.
3.14.4.3 Foundation
The Contractor shall place the concrete foundation for steel structures and switchgear equipment
on the switchyard.
The Contractor shall supply installations drawing giving erection particulars.
The foundation shall be anchor bolt type.
Such members as to be buried in the foundation concrete block shall not be provided.
Size of block-out hole for anchor bolts shall be indicated on the drawing so that the concerning
work can be performed prior to the erection of supports.
Safety factor of concrete for up lifting force shall not be less than 2.5. The allowable bearing
strength of earth will be assumed to be 2.0 ton/m, however, it shall be confirmed by the
Contractor. The weight of earth shall be assumed to be 1.6 ton/m and weight of concrete to be
2.3 ton/m.
If required, pile foundation shall be provided, and the cost of piling shall be deemed to be included
in the Bid Price.
The angle of repose will be reckoned as 10 degree.
3.14.4.4 Materials
All steel employed for the structures have high yield point and high ultimate tensile strength and
shall be subject to the approval of the Employer.
Diameter of both holes shall not be more than 1.5mm larger than the diameter of the bolts.


All members shall be stamped or marked in an approved manner with numbers and/or letters
corresponding to number and/or letters on drawings or material list approved by the Employer.
The erection marks shall be stamped before galvanizing and shall be clearly legible after
galvanizing.
The following tests shall be carried out before delivery to site.
(a) Mechanical strength of materials
(b) Galvanized test
(c) Shop assembly

3.14.5 EARTHING MATERIALS
In addition to the conductors and fittings to be used for the works to be erected under the
contract, the Contractor shall supply and install the following materials for the grounding system
of each substation and complete the grounding system.
The Contractor shall submit full details and drawings for grounding systems to the Employer for
approval. Grounding resistance shall be 1-ohm at the maximum or the value calculated and the
Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the specified value.
(a) Bare annealed high conductivity copper stranded wire:
95mm for main grounding mesh, local transformer, arresters, etc. And 35.mm for other
equipment and materials.
(b) Copper plates of 3mm thick, 1 meter by 1 meter size, equipped with copper lead conductor 95
mm, 3 meter long
(c) Grounding rod of 25mm diameter, 3 meter long, copper clad steel rod equipped with copper led
conductor, 35.mm, 3 meter long.
(d) Clamps needed for connecting each conductor shall be provided.

3.14.6 OTHER MATERIALS
All other miscellaneous materials, such as conduct pipes, steel plates, fabricated cable ducts,
cables supporting brackets sand/or cable racks, pipe hangs, angle steels, channels steels, bolts
and nuts and other items, required for putting into service the works to be covered under this
Contract, shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor as required. These materials shall
comply with the highest grade specified in the relevant standards.
Coloured phase mark plates and bus identification marks shall be fitted on each beam of steel
structures of incoming feeders, outgoing feeders, main buses and transformers buses.
Colour of phase marks shall be red, yellow and blue.

3.14.7 LIGHTING SYSTEM
A complete lighting system for the switchyard at the KPA substation shall be supplied and
installed by the Contractor.
Station lighting components of approved type shall be supplied and installed. These shall include
but not limited to:
(a) Lighting Fixtures
(i) Outdoor type mercury lighting fixtures for AC 240V shall be equipped with screwed base lamp
holders, and shall be of high-power factor suitable for stable operation in tropical climate and
weatherproof type.
(ii) Outdoor type incandescent lighting fixtures for DC 110V for emergency use shall be complete
with all fittings.
(iii) The type of lighting fixtures used should be available locally.
(b) Lighting supports
Lighting supports shall be steel poles painted with suitable colour, which will be instructed by the
Employer. Ballast, cut out, and terminals shall be equipped in the pole and other attachments
necessary for wiring and fixing of the lighting fixtures shall also be provided with the pole. The
ground level shall be marked on the support for easy installation.
600-volt PVC insulated wires of 2.5 mm in size shall be laid in the lighting pole for connection
from the terminal box to the lighting fixtures.
(c) Cabling and wiring shall be of approved type as well as all required installation materials.
(d) Lighting panel for outdoor lighting system shall be installed in each station or extended in the
relevant stations. The lighting panel shall be indoor metal enclosed, wall mounting type, dust and
vermin proof construction and shall contain the following equipment.
Identification name plate


Twenty single pole moulded case circuit breakers 600 V, 30A
Pole moulded case circuit breakers 600V, 100 A
Magnet contactor for emergency lighting
Internal wirings
Neutral links
Terminal boards
(e) Spare Parts.
The following spare parts shall be supplied for the station- 3 sets of each type of complete
lighting fixtures with all accessories.
Lighting for outdoor switchyard and access roads constructed under this contract shall
also be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Employer for approval the calculation
sheets, the facilities drawings, the installation drawings and wiring diagram.
The power shall be supplied from the low tension AC distribution panel in the control
building.
The mean illumination level of each location for AC power shall be as follows:
Outdoor operating area 30 lux
Outdoor switchyard 5 lux
Street lighting 10 lux
3.14.8 MARSHALLING BOXES
Marshalling boxes shall be used for outdoor switch bays and control building for the
stations.
The boxes shall be of outdoor or indoor, metal enclosed, air insulated, self standing type,
dust and vermin-roof construction and containing the terminal blocks, internal wiring,
space heater with thermostat for moisture protection, and other necessary equipment.
Those for outdoor use shall be of weather-proof construction.
3.14.9 AC POWER OUTLETS
An AC power outlet shall be installed in the adjacent place of local service transformer.
The AC power outlet shall be of outdoor, metal enclosed, air insulated, self standing or
structure mounted type and dust, vermin and weather proof construction and containing
a 3 pole moulded case circuit breaker, 600V, 100A power plug cable gland, and other
necessary accessories.

3.15 CIVIL ENGINEERING AND BUILDING WORKS

3.15.1 GENERAL
The works comprise the topographical survey of site, subsoil investigations, detailed
design, production of working drawings, provision of labour, plant and materials, and
construction of the civil engineering and building works.
The works include site clearance and earthworks; Cabro (Minimum 80mm or 49N/mm)
paved Substation and access road, surfaced water drainage, switchgear and structures,
Drained indoor/outdoor cable trenches, perimeter fencing with 750mm razor wire on top
and gates, etc. The framed structure control buildings will be completed with control and
relay room, communications equipment room, office, washroom, drainage infiltration
tanks, septic tank, water supply with minimum head 3m tower tank and ground storage
tank with pumping boost . The new Control building at the KPA Substation shall have a
minimum floor area shall be 384m.

3.15.2 SITE SURVEY AND SUBSOIL INVESTIGATION
The Bidder shall visit the site to satisfy himself that information given in the Bid
Document is accurate and also to collect additional data, which he may require for
preparation of his bid.

(A)Site Survey
The Contractor shall survey the site of the switchyard associated with control building, to
obtain the following:


(1) Accurate volume of ground to be cut and levelled.
(2) Accurate positions of switchgears, structures, ducts, drainage, buildings, fences, etc.
(3) Drainage pattern of the site
A site survey plan shall be prepared in the scale of 1:500 showing the survey results and
proposed layout of the work.

(B) Sub-soil Investigation
The Contractor shall ascertain for himself the nature of the sub-soil conditions over the sites
of the works for his design purposes, by means of sounding tester and trial excavations, etc.
The following should be considered as a minimum requirement, but should be extended if
many inconsistencies are encountered:
(1) Depth of sounding tests shall be less than 5 metres unless rock is encountered; in which
case the thickness shall be proved to be greater than 1.5 metres on two boreholes. Where
weak soils are encountered, the test shall be taken down to a load bearing stratum and
adequate thickness.
(2) Test records shall describe and indicate level of all soils encountered and indicate the
natural water table level. Rock core records should specify total core recovery, solid core
recovery and quality of the rock cored.
(3) Electrical resistivity of the soil shall be verified on four samples, in accordance with
approved practice. (e.g. British Standard Code of Practice CP 1013-1965):

3.15.3 DESIGN OF WORKS
a) Design and Drawings
The Contractor shall design the civil engineering and building works and prepare design
report complete with working drawings in size A3 as necessary for the construction of the
works.
The Contractor is required to produce full design calculations for the foundations, building
structures, etc. and detailed working drawings. He shall be responsible for the detailed
designs, strength and safety of the structures, to meet the structural, acoustic and
environmental requirements of the buildings and other works. He shall be responsible for
ensuring that the design satisfies the requirements of all authorized local and natural
bodies. Design calculations and detailed drawings must be submitted to the Employer for
approval before the relevant construction work is carried out. Design calculations shall be
in accordance with an approved method of computation and should take into account the
most unfavourable combination of dead load, live load and wind load.
b) Detail Requirements for Design
(1) Calculations
Calculations shall clearly identify the subject of the calculations and shall include but not
be limited to providing the following information:
(2) (a) Assumption used for design purposes
(b) Codes or standards used
(c) Loading used
(d) Calculation
(e) Technical specification section and paragraph number
(2) Drawings
Drawings and data sheets prepared by the Contractor shall include complete construction
details.
The drawings shall include but not be limited to the following information or detail as
applicable: construction joints, reinforcement details and bar bending schedules, details
for unusual or special items of architectural, form work, trenching, structural steel details,
etc.



3.15.4 GENERAL SITE WORKS
A. Setting-out
The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting-out, irrespective of any checking by the
Employer. The accuracy of all setting-out is to be better than 1part in 3,000.
The Contractor shall advise the Employer within 24 hours whenever a new setting-out peg is
established or an existing one destroyed, and shall regularly furnish the engineer with layout
plans showing all current setting-out and survey stations.
The tolerances shown below shall rule on site unless otherwise agreed upon by the Employer and
the Contractor.

Block work
(1) Position in plan
Fair-faced or specified side from the designed position 15mm
(2) Length
Up to and including 5m 15mm
Over 5m up to and including 10m 20mm
Over 10m 25mm
(3) Height
Up to and including 3m 15mm
Over 5m up to and including 6m 20mm
Over 6m 25mm

(4) Thickness
More than one block 15mm
(5) Level of bed joints
Length up to but not exceeding 5m 10mm
Over 5m but not exceeding 10m 15mm
Over 10m but not exceeding 20m 20mm
Add for every 5m 5mm
(6) Straightness
In any 5m (not cumulative) 10mm max
(7) Verticality
In any 3m 15mm
Permissible Deviation on In-site Concrete
(1) Plant and other foundations
(a) Position of centre line on plan from nearest building grid line 10mm
(b) Dimensions on plan -5mm + 20mm
(c) Formation level 25mm
(d) Surface level -5mm + 0mm
(e) Sleeved bolt location 15mm
(f) Sleeved bolt vertically 1 in 100
(g) Cast-in bolt location 2mm
(h) Cast-in bolt vertically 1 in 300
(i) Bolt levels 0mm + 20mm
NB: Where tolerances (e) and (f) conflict with (g) and (h) the latter shall govern.
(2) Components above foundation (excepting items in (c) below)
(a) Position of centre line on plan from
Nearest building grid line 19mm
(b) Verticality: Plumbers in height of up to 0.5m 5mm
Over 1.5m to 1.5m inclusive 10mm
Over 1.5m to 3m inclusive 15mm
Over 3m to 30m inclusive 20mm
(c)Cross section and linear dimensions of beams, slabs, columns and walls.
Up to 300mm 5mm
Over 300 to 600mm 10mm
Over 600mm to 1.5m 15mm


Over 1.5mm to 3m 20mm
Over 3m 30mm
(d) Level of specified surface relative to the nearest
Bench Mark 10mm
(3) Overall dimensions of a concrete framed building
(a) Length and width measured at external ground level
For dimensions up to and including 15m 15mm
For dimensions over 15m up to 30m 50mm
For each subsequent 30m 20mm
(b) Height of structural roof level with reference to the transferred
Bench mark 40mm
The Employer may at his discretion alter or specify new tolerances as necessary.
The Contractor shall submit for the Employers approval, his proposed finished site levels, road
levels and building floor levels. Following approval by the Employer the Contractor shall level the
sites to suit.
B. Drainage
Drainage shall be designed in accordance with relevant Codes for Practice published by
authoritative Standards Organization such as the British Institution, e.g. BS 8301, BS 6031 and
CP 2005.
A surface water drainage system covering the switchyard shall be installed. The number of runs
and outfalls and pipe sizing must be sufficient to cope with the severest precipitation, with a
factor of safety of 1.2. Within switchyard and other areas in which maintenance will be carried out
the drainage must allow uninterrupted access.
Embankments and cuttings are to have drainage facilities at their top or bottom. The formation
level of switchyard areas is to be formed with uniform cross-falls of about 1 in 300 in the same
direction as the natural drainage path of the surrounding country.
Surface water from roofs of buildings shall be drained to down pipes, which connect with the site
drainage system.
C. Cable Ducts and Trenches
The Contractor is responsible for all civil engineering works required for the cable runs between
switchgear and buildings, in concrete cable trenches. Cable entries into buildings shall be
through ducts or in concrete cable trenches. Trench covers outside buildings shall be of
reinforced concrete, designed for the maximum likely imposed loads appropriate to their location.
Concrete cable trenches shall be adequately drained to underground infiltration tanks of adequate
capacity.
Power cables and control cables shall be laid on suitable cable racks in trenches.
Cable entries into buildings shall be sealed to prevent the entry of dust, vermin, etc., using
suitable materials.
D. Perimeter Security fencing and Gates
The perimeter of the site is to be fenced with galvanized chain link or equivalent fencing, 2.4
meters high above ground level, attached to reinforced concrete supporting posts and struts. The
posts shall have three strands of galvanized barbed wire attached to cranked tops. Double leaf
gates shall be provided at the entrance to the site.
E. Station Building
The reinforced concrete framed structure control buildings will be completed with control and
relay room, communications equipment room, furnished office , washroom, drainage infiltration
tanks, . Control building minimum floor area shall be 384m and a minimum height of 3.5m.
Walls and partitions shall be dressed stone masonry with minimum compressive strength of
12N/mm. Control building floor layout shall be approved by the employer before detailed
drawings production. The buildings shall have prefabricated steel roof, with walls of concrete
block-work, rendered outside and plastered inside. All walls and roofs shall be fully insulated, to
produce maximum thermal transmittance (U.) values of 1.14 (watts/m.) for walls and 0.57 for
roofs. Architectural treatment of the buildings shall be in accordance with the Employers usual
standard or preference.


The buildings will have been designed with ease of operation and maintenance as a major factor.
Materials, workmanship and finish must be of an appropriately high standard. In considering the
various materials, details, and construction methods, Contractors must investigate the
availability, delivery and transportation to the site of all materials, plant, and labour, to enable
the programme to be maintained.
Internal partition walls shall be generally for concrete block work with emulsion painted smooth
plastered finish. The equipment areas shall have screened floors finished with a surface hardener.
All finishes shall be fireproof or flame retarding. Floor shall be sand-cement screed throughout.
Room heights shall be governed by the criteria that there should be 1-meter clearance between
the top of cubicles or panels and ceilings.
Particularly, attention must be given in the design of the building to fire prevention and safety of
the personnel at all times. Access doors and escape doors shall be provided and fitted with panic
bolts where necessary, so that operating and maintenance staff can always exit safely from the
buildings in fire emergencies of any nature or location.
All windows shall be dustproof. A number of opening lights shall be provided in all rooms,
including air-conditioned rooms. Internal doors shall be flush-faces, solid-core, timber doors, with
painted timber frames and architraves. External doors shall be made of steel as appropriate.
F. Site Clearance and Excavation
The Contractor shall clear from all areas required for the works all unwanted materials, debris,
etc., but shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing road construction
and to existing surfaces, buildings and other facilities in the area which do not need to be
demolished.
The whole of the excavations shall be carried out to the widths, lengths and depths shown on the
approved drawings. No unlicensed or indiscriminate digging will be permitted.
The Contractor may excavate by any method he considers suitable, subject to the Employers
approval, and shall allow for the use of types of plant most suited for excavation in any location
and at any time.
The Contractor shall allow for risk of meeting and having to excavate through any sort of material,
which may be encountered, including rock.
Materials from the excavation may, if approved by the Employer, be used by the Contractor in the
construction of the Works. Other excavated material shall be backfilled where required or
deposited where directed anywhere on site. Surplus materials shall be removed from the site by
the Contractor to the approved place. Backfill material shall not be borrowed from the site, site
deterioration due to backfill borrowing on site shall be restored to Employer satisfaction with no
additional cost. Whereas Employer acquired plot might be bigger than Substation site
requirement, the Contractor shall only use the Substation site as will be in the approved
Substation layout drawing, use of land outside this area will require Employer approval.
The Contractor shall at all times keep the site free from all surplus materials, rubbish and
offensive matter.
In excavations for foundations, a bottom layer of excavation 150mm in thickness shall be left
undisturbed and subsequently removed only when the concrete is about to be placed in order that
softening or deterioration of the surfaces of the bottom of the excavated area by exposure may be
avoided as far as possible.
The bottom of all excavated areas shall be trimmed, levelled and well rammed. Concrete shall not
be deposited thereon until the bottom has been inspected and approved by the Employer.
All excavation works are to be kept dry and clean, in order that work is not affected or interfered
with by water entering the excavations.
The arrangements made for dealing with water in excavations must be approved by the Employer,
and they must ensure that the de-watering of excavations can continue during the placing of
concrete or the execution of any other works that could be affected by water in excavations.
Adequate precautions must be taken against washing out of cement and concrete or to prevent


the work being disturbed in any way. No concrete, masonry, brickwork or other materials shall be
placed or built until the surfaces are properly drained.
G. Filling and reinstatement
Filling for trenches, excavations and leveling for the Site shall be deposited in layers not exceeding
250mm uncompacted thickness. Where excavations, whether in rock or other material, are made
to a greater depth than detailed, the intervening space shall be brought up to the proper level in
plain concrete.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of the embankments where formed either by
cutting or filling, and precautions taken to protect the earthworks from deterioration under
adverse weather conditions. Wherever applicable the recommendations contained in the following
codes of practice shall be followed in calculations, detailing and performance of the earthworks
and drainage:
(1) Earthworks British Standard Code of Practice BS 6031 1981
(2) Civil Engineering Code of Practice No.2 on Earth Retaining Structures, Issued by institute of
Structural Engineers, U.K.
(3) Soils - British Code for Civil Engineering Soils BS 1377.
Embankments shall not be formed over inclined ground surfaces without previously forming the
founding surface, on which the fill material will be placed, to a benched profile.
All earthwork top surfaces shall be finished off level and regular and the sides of cuttings and
embankments shall be properly trimmed to the detailed slopes as they become consolidated.
The Contractor is to allow for embankments and cutting slopes to be well forked, raked and
stabilized as protection from erosion.
H. Explosives
Explosives may only used when specified. Their use shall comply with the following:
(1) Approvals required by CAP 115 Laws of Kenya on Mining.
(2) Blasting design to ensure controlled blasting as an excavation method.
(3) All local bylaws and regulations.
(4) The Contractor shall store explosives in a licensed store or magazine provided with a separate
compartment for detonators.
(5) Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the manufacturers.
The written approval of the Employer shall be obtained for each location or series of locations
where the Contractor wishes to use. Such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of
his liabilities under the Conditions of Contract.
(6) When blasting is carried out, the Contractor shall ensure, by adherence to proper safety
distances and by the use of heavy blasting mats where necessary, to prevent the dispersal of
material, that no damage is caused to persons, animals or property on or off the Site. Special care
shall be taken when blasting in wet ground to ensure that individual explosions are reduced to
such a size as to preclude damage to any buildings or structures.
3.15.5 CONCRETING WORK SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Authoritative Standards and Codes Practice
The following authoritative standards are referred to hereinafter:
B. S. Date Title
A 12 1989 Portland Cement (Ordinary and rapid hardening).
B 812 Methods for sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand and fillers
C 882 1983 Aggregates from natural source for concrete (including granolithic)
D 1881 Methods of testing concrete
E 5328 1981 Method of specifying concrete
F 2499 1973 Hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements
(4) G 3148 1980 Tests for making concrete
H 3921 1985 Clay bricks
A 4251 1974
(1980)
Trunk type concrete mixers
B 4449 1988 Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete


C 4466 1981 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement of concrete (old
edition )
D 4483 1985 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
E 5075 Concrete Admixture
F 6073:Pt.1 1981 Precast concrete blocks
G 8810.Pt. 1&2 1985 The structural use of concrete
H 5950 The use of structural steel in buildings
I KS 95 2003 Specification for Natural Aggregates for use in Concrete
J 8007 1987 The structural use of concrete for retaining aqueous liquids
K 3110 1972 Safe use of cranes (cranes, tower cranes and derrick cranes)
MATERIALS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Concrete for concrete foundation and pile shall have the minimum required breaking
strengths as specified in the technical schedules.
(b) Cement used shall be Portland or other approved composition obtained from an approved
maker. Portland cement shall conform in all respects to BS-12.
(c) Aggregates shall be clean and free from dust, earthy or organic matter or salt. Coarse
aggregate shall be of approved grading to be retained on a mesh not less than 5mm, and of a
maximum size to pass a mesh not more than 40mm, subject to KS 95:2003. Where specially
approved in writing by the Employer, coarse aggregate of uniform size not larger than will pass
a 25mm mesh may be used throughout. Fine aggregate shall be coarse, sharp, clean and free
from dust, salt, clay, vegetable matter or other impurity and shall be screened through a mesh
not more than 5mm in the clear. It shall be a well-graded mixture of coarse and fine grains
from 5-mm gauge downwards.
(d) Water shall be clean and free from all earth, vegetable or organic matter, salt, soil, oil acid
and alkaline substances either in solution or in suspensions. Quality shall be confirmed by
lab test.
(e) At least four weeks before commencing any concreting work; the Contractor shall make trial
mixes using samples of cement and fine and coarse aggregates. The test specimens for the
trial mixes shall be of cube type. Preliminary test specimens shall be taken from the proposed
mixes as follows:
For each proposed mix a set of 6 specimens shall be made from each of 3 consecutive batches.
Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of seven (7) days and three (3) at an age of
28 days. The test shall be carried out in a laboratory approved.
Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be altered without the
prior approval of the Employer except that the Contractor shall adjust the proportions of mix
as required, to take account of permitted variations in the materials, such approval shall be
subject to the execution, to the Engineers satisfaction, of trial mix procedures set out herein.
(f) Concrete cubes are to be taken and tested to verify the concrete strength during the
concreting works. The Contractor shall provide the cube moulds at site for the purpose,
accordingly. The test specimens shall be 150mm cube and the mould shall be of metal with
inner faces accurately machined in order that opposite sides of the specimen are plane and
parallel. Each mould shall be provided with the metal base having a smooth machined
surface. The interior surfaces of the mould and base should be lightly oiled before concrete is
placed in the mould.
(g) Concrete strength
Grade 35, 30, 25, and 20 concrete shall have the minimum strengths as given by Works
Cubes Tests shown below. The grade of concrete stated is concrete characteristic strength
below which not more than 5% of the test results may fall, Concrete target mean strength
Fcu.o = Grade in N/mm+ 1.645 where = standard deviation of the strength tests, 1.645 is
the probability factor and 1.645 is the design margin. Target mean strength shall exceed
required characteristic strength by the design margin value, and concrete production shall
aim to attain this mean,


Minimum Crushing Strengths
Grade 35 Grade 30 Grade 25 Grade 20
7 Days 23.5 N/ mm 20.0 N/ mm 16.5 N/ mm 13.5 N/ mm
28 days 35.0 N/ mm 30.0 N/ mm 25.0 N/ mm 20.0 N/ mm

The average strength obtained from cube tests shall be 10 per cent higher than the Strength
shown above. Subject to design the minimum grade for structural concrete shall be Grade 25,
Grade 15 will be allowed for blinding concrete, precast concrete minimum grade shall be
Grade 30.
(h) Tests required and Sampling
Sampling of materials
Approved sources, graded aggregates, sampling and testing to BS 812,
Workability
Fresh concrete slump test. Slump range 25 50mm, - mechanical vibration and
maximum 1.5m fall method of placing.
Strength/durability
Compression/cube (150mm) test, three after seven days and three at twenty-eight
days. Test to BS 1881.
Works cubes are to be made at intervals as required by the Employer. The cubes shall
provide a continuous record of concrete work. The cubes shall be made in approved
150mm moulds in strict accordance with code of practice.
Three cubes shall be made on each occasion from different batches, the concrete being
taken from the point of deposit. Each cube shall provide a distinguishing number
(numbers to run consecutively and the date, and a record shall be kept on site, giving the
following particulars:-
(I) Cube number
(II) Date made
(III) Location in work
(IV) 7 day Test
Date;
Strength
28 day Test..
Strength
Cubes shall be forwarded, carriage paid for, to an approved Testing Authority in time to be
tested two at 7 days and one at 28 days and the remaining one at the discretion of the
Employer. No cube shall be dispatched within 3 days of casting. Copies of all work Cube
Test results shall be forwarded to the Employer within one week after test and one shall be
retained on site office file.
If the strength required above are not attained, and maintained throughout the carrying
out of the contract, the contractor will be required to increase the proportion of cement
and/or substitute better aggregate so as to give concrete which does comply with the
requirements of the contract .The contractor may be required to remove and replace at his
own cost any concrete which fails to attain the required strength as ascertained by Work
Cube Tests.
The contractor must allow in his rates for concrete test cubes for all expenses in
connection with the preparation and conveyance to the Testing Laboratory and of test
cubes and no claim in respect of his failure to do so will be entertained.
Piling and Other Special works.
Piling will be carried out using an approved procedure throughout. The actual length and
numbers of piles required at any location will be approved by the Employer on the basis of
the final agreed design data; and payment made for departures form the assumed tender
design quantities on the basis of the difference of quantities times the schedule variation
rates. Tender Prices shall include for all necessary casings, pumping, depreciation of piling
machines, materials, transportation and others.


Where special ground conditions exist which do not allow for any of the designs in an
original or modified form special types of foundations may be employed which will be paid
for on the basis of schedule rates where applicable. To this extent the schedule variation
rates for concrete, steel and excavations shall apply throughout irrespective of special
conditions.
Where ordered by the Employer, the contractor shall carry out pile bearing and uplift test
for all types of pile generally in accordance with the method given in the BSCP-2004. Such
tests shall be carried out to determine the ultimate uplift and bearing values.
Following special requirement shall additionally be considered:
(A)Construction Joints
Construction joints shall be permitted only at the position predetermined on the Drawings or
as instructed on the site by the Employer. In general they shall be perpendicular to the lines of
principal stresses and shall be located at points of minimum shear, viz. vertically at or near,
mid-span of slabs, ribs and beams.
Suspended concrete slabs are generally to be cast using alternate bay construction in bays not
exceeding 15.000M in length. No two adjacent bays are to be cast within a minimum period of
48 hours of each other. The joints between adjacent bays are to positions agreed with the
Employer.
Joints shall be water tight and use of water bars and appropriate sealant shall be specified in
all cases.
(B)Construction Bays
The Contractor shall agree with the Employer, prior to the commencement of concreting, upon
the sequence of placing concrete and the positions of vertical and horizontal joints, whether
shown or not on the drawings.
In general, slabs in excess of 6 meters in length and/or width and walls exceeding 6 meters in
length shall not be poured in one operation and subsequent adjacent shall not be concreted
within 7 days. The maximum are of any pour shall be 100- mm.
In the light of experience the Employer may consider the above pour size limits to be excessive
and will have the authority to reduce them.
Expansion joints shall be fully detailed on construction drawings for approval.
Expansion joints shall be filled with bitumen-impregnated fiberboard to full depth and width.
The infilling will be permitted to be used as permanent formwork only for the second casting.
Where the fibreboard is exposed it shall be cutback for a depth of at least 2cm from the
chambered edge, filled and pointed with a resilient liquid polysulfide polymer sealant to the
manufactures instructions.
Where dowel bars are indicated on the Drawings forming part of a joint, they shall be held
securely horizontal and perpendicular to the joint during concreting.
(C) Formwork
All, forms, falsework or shuttering shall include all temporary moulds forming the concrete
to the required shape and size together with any special lining that may be required to
produce the concrete finish specified.
A. All timber for formwork, falsework and shuttering shall be sound wood, well seasoned and
free from lose knots, shakes, large cracks, warping and other defects. Before use on the
work, it shall be properly stacked and protected from injury from any source.Any timber
which becomes badly warped or cracked prior to the placing of concrete shall be rejected.
B. If the contractor proposes to use steel shuttering, he shall submit to the Employer
dimensioned drawings of all the component parts, and give details of the manner in which
he proposes to assemble or use them. Steel shuttering will only be permitted if it is sturdy
in construction and if the manner of its use is approved by the Employer.


C. Struts and props shall, where required by the Employer, be fitted with double hardwood
wedges or other approved devices so that the moulds may be adjusted as required and
eased gradually when required. Wedges shall be spiked in to position and any adjusting
devices locked before the concrete is cast.
D. All forms shall be wood and shall be built grout- tight and of sufficient rigidity to prevent
distortion due to the pressure of the concrete and other loads incidents to the construction
operations. Forms shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent warping and the
opening of joints due to shrinkage of the timber.
E. All formwork shall be approved by the Employer before concrete is placed within it. The
contractor shall if required by the Employer provide the latter with copies of his
calculations of strength and stability of the formwork or false work but not withstanding
the Employers approval of these calculations, nothing shall relieve the contractor of his
responsibilities for the safety or adequacy of the formwork.
Form of construction joints
F. Where permanent or temporary joints are to be made in horizontal or inclined members,
stout stopping off boards shall be securely fixed across the mould to form a grouting joint
The form of the permanent construction joints shall be as shown on the Drawings.
G. Where reinforcement or water stops pass through the face of construction joint the
stopping off boards shall be drilled so that the bars or water stop can pass through or the
board shall be made in section with a half round indentation in the joint faces for each bar
so that when placed, the board is neat and accurate fit and not grout leaks from the stops.
H. The forms shall be restrained and unyielding and shall be so designed that the finished
concrete will conform to the proper dimensions and contours. The design of the forms
shall take into account the effect of vibration of concrete as it is placed.
I. All sharp edges inside the forms shall be provided with 25mm triangular fillets, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings or directed by the Employer.
J. Openings for the inspection and cleaning of the inside of shuttering for walls, piers and
columns shall be formed in such a way that they can be closed conveniently before
commencing.
K. When concrete is to be deposited to a steeper slope than 45 deg. to the horizontal, top
forms shall be used to enable the concrete to be properly compacted.
L. Form, clamps, tie bolts and anchors shall be used to fasten forms. The use of wire ties to
hold forms in position during placing of concrete will not be permitted. Tie bolts and
clamps shall be positive in action and of sufficient strength and number to prevent
spreading or springing of the forms. They shall be of such type that no metal part shall be
left within the specified concrete.
M. The cavities shall be filled with grout mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and
uniform in colour, All forms form for outside surfaces shall be constructed with stiff wales
at right angles to the studs and all form clamps shall extend through and fasten such
wales.
N. The shapes, strength, rigidity, water tightness, and surface smoothness of re-used forms
shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged timber must be replaced. Forms,
which are unsatisfactory in any respect, shall not be re-used.
O. All forms shall be treated with approved mould or similar oil or be soaked with water
immediately before placing concrete to prevent adherence of concrete. Any materials which
adhere to or discolour concrete shall not be used.
P. All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designed until the concrete is
sufficiently hardened. Forms shall remain in place for periods which shall be as specified
hereinafter. When forms appears to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during


the placing of concrete, the Employer shall order the work stopped until the defect have
been corrected.
Release Agent
Q. Only approved chemical release agents, mould creams (emulsions of water in oil) or oils
containing a proportion of surfactant not exceeding 2% will be permitted. Water-soluble
emulsion and oils without surfactant shall not be used. Oil based release agents shall be
applied at a ratio of 7m/litre, 24 hours in advance of concreting, preferably by spray or
roller. Chemical release agents shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
R. The greatest care must be taken that all sawdust shavings, ships and debris is removed
from the formwork before concrete is placed in position and the necessary arrangements
must be made by leaving out a board in the bottom of the formwork or otherwise required.
S. The erection, easing, striking and removal of all formwork must be done under the
personal supervision of a competent foreman, and any damage occurring through fault
formwork or its incorrect removal shall be made good by the contractor at his own
expense.
T. All projecting fins on the concrete surfaces after removal of formwork shall be chipped off,
and any voids or honey combing to any surface made good to the requirements of the
Employer.
U. No patching of the concrete is to be done before inspection of the concrete surfaces as
stripped.
V. Traffic or loading must not be allowed on the concrete until the concrete is sufficiently
matured and in no case shall traffic or loading be of such magnitude as to cause deflection
or other movement in the formwork or damage to the concrete members. Where directed
by the Employer props may be required to be left in position under slabs and other
members for greater period than those specified hereinafter.
W. It shall be the Contractors responsibility that no distortion, damage overloading or undue
deflection is caused to the structure by the striking of formwork, but the Employer
reserves the right to delay the time of striking in the interest of the work. Formwork shall
not be struck until the concrete has sufficiently hardened. Approval of the Employer shall
not relieve the Contractor of his liability to make good any concrete damage by premature
removal or collapse of forms. In no circumstances shall forms be struck until the concrete
reaches cube strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected
at the time of striking. The following times given in days (24 hours) are the absolute
minimum that will permitted:-
Striking Times
Forms Ordinary Portland
Cement
Rapid Hardening
Cement
Walls, Columns (unloaded Beam sides 2 2
Slabs props left under 7 2
Beams soffits props left under 14 5
Slabs props 14 5
Beams props 18 8

The time for removal of forms as set out shall not apply to slabs and beams spanning more
than 10 metres. For such spans appropriate times shall be recommended or advised by
the Employer.
The periods given above are based on the removal of all props and formwork using
ordinary Portland Cement under average weather conditions. Adverse weather conditions
or different cement may cause the above periods to be increased. Should the contractor
wish to make use of reduced striking time then he must satisfy the Employer that the
strength of the concrete at such time and the structural system is adequate to withstand
the dead and imposed loads applied to it. Before making use of reduces striking times the
Employers agreement must be obtained in writing.


Finishes
Saw finish- The shuttering shall consist of saw boards, sheet metal or other materials to give a
support to the concrete. Appearance is not of primary importance for this class of formwork. It
shall be used for surface against which backfill or further concrete is to be placed. The treatment
of the shuttering or concrete to provide a bond for the further surface treatment of the concrete
shall be directed or approval by the Employer. Masonry or similar material used for facing
concrete shall only be used as shuttering where directed by the Employer.
The Employers approval shall be obtained to the use of blocks or slabs when used as permanent
forms in foundation and other similar location.
A. Wrought finish.
The shuttering shall be wrought with boards arranged in a uniform pattern. Alternatively,
plywood, metal panels or other approved materials may be used, subject to the Employers
approval. Joints between boards or panel shall be horizontal or vertical unless otherwise
directed. This shuttering shall give a good finish to the concrete and will normally be used
for all faces where a high-class finish is not necessary.
B. Fair-faced finishing.
Standard steel panels, hardboard and boarding will not be permitted for the face of this
shuttering. The shuttering shall be faced with resin-bonded plywood, faced with matt
finished plastic or equivalent material in large sheets, which shall be arranged in an
approved uniform pattern. Whenever possible, joints between sheets shall be arranged to
coincide with features such as stills, jambs or changed in direction or the surface areas of
formwork between features in walls, between beams in horizontal surface or other similar
arrangement, shall where possible, be divided into panels of uniform dimensions, without
the use of make-up pieces. All joint between panels on vertical or inclined surfaces shall be
vertical or horizontal unless otherwise directed by the Architect; those on horizontal
surfaces shall be at right angles and wherever possible they shall be parallel to walls and
beams. The shuttering shall give a high class finish to the concrete with no lips, fins, or
irregularities, and shall give a completely true and even surface, which will be prominently
exposed to view where good alignment is of special importance. It is for use in both in-situ
and pre-cast concrete.
C. Texture finish.
This is an all-over finish of high quality as may be directed by the Employer. Sample
panels may be constructed on site prior to commencement of the works, to compare
different textures. The shuttering shall be such that the concrete finish give a surface that
will be prominently exposed to view a good appearance and alignment are of special
importance.
D. Where other finishes, apart from the above are specified, the contractor shall provide a
sample panel at least 2.4m x 1.2m in vertical surface area including a typical horizontal
and vertical joint in the shuttering. The sample panel shall be construction techniques
that the contractor proposes for the actual works. This sample when approved will form
the standard for the entire works. All unsuccessful samples shall be removed from the
site.
Floor Finish
E. Where tamped finish is specified it will be obtained by an edge board to the Employers
approval. Board works are so be made to a true pattern and will generally be at right
angles to the traffic flow. Haphazard or diagonal tamping will not be accepted.


3.15.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL
QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
(A) The quality of all materials and workmanship used in the execution of this contract shall
comply with the requirements of the most recent issues of the following British Standards
and code of practice, including all amendments.
B.S 4 (part 1) Hot Rolled Sections
B.S 4 (part 2) Hot Rolled Hollow Sections
B.S 449 The use of Structural Steel in Buildings
B.S 638 Arc welding plant equipment and accessories
B.S 639 Covered Electrodes for manual Metal Arch Welding of Mild Steel and
Medium tensile steel
B.S 916 Black Bolts, Screws and Nuts
B.S 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip
B.S 1775 Steel Tubes for mechanical, structural and General
Engineering Purposes
B.S 2994 Cold rolled Steel Sections
B.S 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
B.S 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes
B.S 4360 Weldable structural steel
B.S 4848 Hot rolled structural steel sections
B.S 4872 Approved testing of welds when welding
Procedures approval is not required
B.S 5135 General requirements for the Metal Arc Welding of Structural steel
B.S 5493 Protection of iron and steel structures from Corrosion
BS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel.
TOLERANCES
All members shall be fabricated with a tolerance in length of + 0mm and -3 mm, all shall
not deviate from straightness by more than 1 in 400.
The allowance for angular twist shall be (3 + 0.6L) in the length of the member under
consideration in metres. Twist shall be measured by placing the member as fabricated
against a flat surface measuring the differences between the two corners of the opposite
end.
The above tolerances shall be adhered to unless otherwise specified on the Engineers
drawing.
(A) Materials
All metals and metal work components whether fabricated on or offsite shall conform to
the requirements of the relevant British Standards and other standards to the approval by
the Employer.
Metalwork articles shall have a first class finish, and be free from scale, rust, damage or
other defects.
Components shall be properly assembled and joined in a neat and functional manner.
Welded connections shall be ground off as necessary to present a clean smooth finish
without detriment to the strength of the connection.
Particular attention shall be given to the protection of metalwork from degradation caused
by the environment in which it is to be used. This shall be accomplished by galvanizing,
surface coating or such other treatment suitable for the metalwork under consideration.
(1) Mild Steel
Mild steel shall comply with the relevant standard and shall be galvanized for parts, which
are not accessible, or in open air, or come in contact with moisture. All other parts, except
reinforcement to concrete, shall be primed as described under the Clause for painting.
(2) Copper
Copper and copper alloys shall comply with the British Standards and approved standards
and approved standards relevant to the form and use for which the material is intended.


Copper components shall be placed so that in no case shall they come in direct contact
with aluminium nor shall it be possible for water or condensation to pass off copper on to
aluminium.
(3) Zinc
Zinc sheet shall be of good colour, free from cracks, dross, overlaps, scales and any other
defects, which might be detrimental to its working properties. All zinc shall be at least 0.8
mm thick. No iron or copper shall be used in contact with zinc.
(4) Aluminium Sheeting
Aluminium for profiled roof sheeting and flashing shall be manufactured from alloy in hard
temper conforming to BS 1470 Ns3 Specification not less than 0.7 mm thickness and with
a colour coasted surface finish. Profiled sheeting shall conform to BS CP 5427.
Fastenings shall be by means of aluminium hook bolts or other approved fixes in
accordance with BS CP 143 Part 1 and recommendations of the manufacturer.
Laps shall be sealed as necessary.
(5) Galvanizing
Where steel members are specified to be galvanized they shall be so treated after all
cutting, drilling, punching and removal of burrs has been carried out.
Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a coating of zinc
weighing not less than 610 g/m of surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, clean, of
uniform thickness and free from defects. The preparation for galvanizing itself shall not
adversely affect the mechanical properties of the steel.
The testing of the zinc coating on galvanized articles shall be carried out in accordance
with BS 729.
(B) Steel External Doors
Steel external doors shall be fabricated from steel sheet covering a framework of steel
angles and galvanized after fabrication. Door frames shall also be galvanized steel. All
external doors shall be insulated and fitted with panic latches, which are lockable from
outside.
External doors shall be effectively sealed to reduce the ingress of dust as far as practicable,
using heavy duty seals which shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of five years from
date of commissioning. Doors and seals shall be designed so that replacement of worn
seals can be achieved easily on site.
(C) Workmanship
All plates and sections shall be true to form, free from twist and straightened before any
fabrication work is started on them. Each piece of work shall be distinctly marked before
dispatch in accordance with a marking diagram to be provided by the Contractor.

3.15.7 BLOCK WORK
A) Materials
(1) Cement
Cement shall be Sulphateresisting and of a quality as described in the section for
concrete. The clause in that section referring to cement storage shall also apply.
(2) Sands an aggregates
Fine and course aggregates for forming blocks shall be aggregates from natural sources of
hard, durable material or other approved, free from deleterious substances. Sand shall be
graded 2 mm down and coarse aggregate shall be as specified for concrete.
(3) Lime
Lime for mortar shall be hydrated gray-stone lime in accordance with BS 890 for hydrated
calcium limes. Magnesia lime shall both be used in mortar for brickwork below the damp-
proof course.
The Contractor shall forward copies of Manufacturers certificates to the Employer, which
in addition to certifying compliance with BS 890 shall give details of the type of lime. If
lime is delivered as lime putty, the certificate shall state whether quicklime or hydrated
lime was used in its manufacture.


All lime shall be efficiently protected against deterioration during transport and whilst
stored on site. Different type or brands of lime shall be stored separately in dry conditions
in a manner that allows it to be used in the order of delivery.
When lime putty is to be used the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Employer of
his arrangement for transport handling and storage. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
contamination and drying out of lime putty stored on site. Lime putty made from
quicklime should mature for at least 14 days before being used. Where it is made from
hydrated lime (powder), lime putty should stand for at least sixteen hours before use.
(4) Concrete Blocks
Concrete blocks shall be solid or hollow blocks to comply with the relevant standard as
previously mentioned and shall be solid hard, true to size and shape and sharp arises in
accordance with Ministry of Works Standard Specification for Metric sized concrete block
for building dated September, 1972.
They shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer or manufactured on site in
approved block making machines. The mix used shall be less than (1:9) by volume and
maximum size of aggregate shall be 12mm size. The blocks on removal from the machine
shall be laid on edge or racks under sheds erected by the Contractor and left for 3 days
during which period they shall be kept constantly wet.
After this initial period they shall be placed on edge in the open racks and protected by
sacking or other approved covering and kept wet for further 5 days.
Thereafter the blocks shall be left in the same position without wetting for a further 20
days. No blocks shall be used in the works until 28 days old and until samples have been
tested approved by the Employer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the blocks are stocked separately in their respective
categories in the structure in the position shown on the drawings.
Any stone for walling shall be good hard local stone equal in standard and quality. Stone
shall be squared, dressed and joints chisel dressed on the face. Stone to receive render,
shall be so dressed to reduce dubbing-out to a minimum.
The coursed stone shall both be less than 150mm deep and 305 mm long. All stone shall
be laid on their natural or quarry bed lines.
Block Laying
All blocks shall be kept completely filled with mortar. The thickness of the horizontal
mortar joints shall not exceed 40mm to every four joints. Where block work is to be
plastered or rendered, joints shall be struck off and left rough to provide a key.
Movement joints shall be provided where required. They shall incorporate a joint filling
strip and sealant Gaps in movement joints shall be left free from debris and shall not be
pointed with mortar.
Block work shall be built with three courses to 600 mm in a uniform manner, in truly level
courses and truly vertical or battered. Corners and other advanced work shall be racked
back and not raised above the general level more than one meter. Toothing shall be used
only where provision has to be made for a future extension. Both leaves of cavity shall be
built up simultaneously. Galvanized flat twist wall ties of an approved pattern shall be
bedded with a slight fall towards the outer face and shall be provided in alternate courses
at intervals of 900mm and staggered horizontally. Additional ties shall be used near the
sides of all openings at the rate of one for each 300mm of opening height. The cavity shall
be kept clear of mortar droppings and rubbish, and the inside mortar joints shall be
finished flush as the work proceeds. Cavities shall be 50-75 mm in width.
Both holes shall be built into the external skin of cavity walls in the form of sand filled
vertical joints at 1m centres and are to be racked out on completion. Weep holes shall be
laced over all lintels.
Walls shall be constructed with an approved metal reinforcement every second course.
Additional horizontal reinforcement shall be provided in bed joints in walls for each
2courses above and below all openings greater than 300mm wide. The reinforcement shall
extend a minimum of 900mm beyond the opening on both sides.


Below ground level and at the jambs of all openings, the hollow concrete blocks shall be
filled with weak concrete, well taped down and carried from base slab to top of such
openings. Cavities shall be kept clear of mortar droppings or other debris, by the use of
lifting batters or other suitable means.
Where external block work abuts concrete surfaces and where indicated elsewhere, the
blocks shall be tied to the concrete every second course with adjustable galvanized steel
ties fixed in slots cast into the concrete.
Concrete abutting external block work shall be coated with two coats of bitumen paint.
Holes and chases shall be cut out or left in the walls as required and provision shall be
made for making good to the satisfaction of the Employer.
On completion, all block work shall be cleaned down and mortar dropping and other
marks removed. Defective blocks or workmanship shall be made good.
(6) Reinforcement
When required, vertical reinforcement for hollow concrete blocks shall be high yield
deformed steel conforming to BS 4449 requirements. The minimum to be provided shall be
10mm diameter bars at 150mm centres.
Lap lengths for vertical reinforcement shall be a minimum of 50 diameters.
Horizontal bed joint reinforcement shall be made from hard drawn steel wire to BS4482
consisting of two wires with diameter a minimum of 5 mm and separated by cross wires
welded at 304-mm centers. The main wires shall be at 50 mm centers and 160mm centers
for 100 and 200mm block work respectively. Alternatively, approved expanded mesh
reinforcement may be used.
(7) Lintels
The block work over all openings in walls shall be supported on reinforced concrete grade
25 lintels.
All lintels shall be the same width as the block work into which they are being built.
Building in Frames
Openings in masonry for doors, widows, air conditioning units ventilators and fans etc.
shall be properly marked out and built in as the work proceeds with approved anchors.
The fittings shall be propped and strutted where required.
The back surface of steel and galvanized fittings shall be coated with a bituminous paint
before fixing.
All fittings shall be bedded in 1:3 sand cement mortar 12mm thick.
Precautions during Inclement Weather
Newly laid masonry work shall be protected from the harmful effects of sunshine, rain,
drying wind, running or surface water and shocks. Any work that may be damaged shall
be taken out and pointed as directed by the Employer. Any costs incurred in carrying out
such remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor.
Damp Proof Course (DPC)
A damp proof course shall be laid in walls, above ground level so as to exclude rising
moisture.
Damp-proof courses shall be from one of the following materials:
(1) Lead and copper DPC complying with the requirements of BS 743.
(2) Asbestos base bitumen DPC complying with the requirement of BS 743 Type C.
(3) Asbestos base lead cored bitumen DPC complying with requirements of BS 743
Type F.
Damp-Proof Membrane
An approved bitumen/PVC waterproof membrane shall be placed on the blinding under concrete
floor slabs, to exclude rising moisture. The membrane shall be taken up walls and lapped with the
wall DPC.
All floor finishes shall be protected from damage by following trades and other causes and any
damage, howsoever caused, shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the
satisfaction of the Employer.


3.15.8 FLOOR LAYING
(A) Screeded Beds
Concrete floors, which are required to be surfaced with screed, shall have a roughened surface,
produced by hacking and wire brushing. The roughened concrete floor shall be cleaned, wetted
preferably overnight, the surplus water removed and 1:1 cement/sand grout brushed into the
surface, keeping just ahead of the screeded bed. The screeded bed shall be 40mm thick and shall
be well compacted and leveled with a screeding board and steel trowelled smooth. If the screed is
the finished surface, it should be treated with an approved silicate of soda solution hardener to
prevent dusting. The screed shall be mixed in the proportions of 1:2:4 (cement, sand, and 10mm-
pea shingle) by volume with the minimum quantity of water necessary to give a good hard
smooth, steel trowelled finish.
The section hereof concerning concrete applies, but the sand shall satisfy the requirements of BS
1199.
Rigid screed battens shall be fixed on continuous beds of mortar to prevent movement when
screeds are being laid and compacted. The screed batten shall be fixed to true lines and levels.
The bay sizes shall not exceed 15 square meters and the length of any one bay shall be limited to
1.5 times the width. The bays shall be laid alternately, ie. in chequerboard fashion, a minimum of
24 hours being allowed to elapse between the laying of adjacent bays.
The bays shall be separated by strips of hard plastic or other suitable material. Screeded beds
shall be cured for at least seven days, using polythene sheeting or other approved method. Floor
finish shall be terrazzo, granito tiles and ceramic tiles mixture as approved.

3.15.9 CABLE DUCTS, DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE DISPOSAL
(A) Cable Ducts
Cable ducts may be constructed of in-situ concrete or pre-cast concrete duct. In each case,
the material shall be in accordance with relevant sections of this Specification.
All cable ducts shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients between cable pits, as
directed. All ducts shall be kept clear from earth, debris and other obstructions during and
after laying.
(B) Drainage
All drainage shall be designed for common use with cable ducts, in accordance with
approved standards and Codes of Practice.
All drains shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients as described or directed.
Great care shall be exercised in setting out and determining the level of the drains. All
drains shall be kept clear from earth, debris, superfluous cement and other obstructions
during and after laying.
Underground drains shall be provided with inspection well at appropriate sections and
connected to common underground infiltration tank.
C) Sanitary Fittings
Wash hand basins shall be supported on cantilever brackets cut and pinned to the walls
or screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards, which shall be plugged and screwed
to the walls. They shall be provided with 35mm bottle traps with brass cleaning eye and
lining soldered on, or alternatively, a similar PVC fitting.
Cistern supporting brackets shall be screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards,
which shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. Overflow pipes from WC cisterns shall be
20mm bore.
Glazed ware shall be of best quality and type and manufacture approved by the Employer.
Fittings shall be securely fixed in an approved manner. Cisterns shall be plastic wherever
possible.

D) Overhead Reservoir water tank
The contractor shall provide for an overhead plastic water tank with a capacity of not less
than 2,500 litres.

3.15.10 PAINTING AND DECORATING
Paints for priming, undercoat and finishing shall be ready mixed paints of the best quality
for the intended use and comply with BS 6150. Paint for use on concrete or block work
shall be of a type specially prepared for this purpose.


All work shall be properly cleaned and rubbed won between each coat in a way, and using
materials, recommended by the manufacturers of the paints concerned. No coat shall be
commenced until the Employer has passed the previous coat a dry, hard and satisfactory.
Each coat shall be of a distinct colour from the preceding one and all colours shall be
approved by the Employer. Spray painting will not be permitted except for internal faces of
walls and ceiling. All other paint shall be thoroughly brushed into and completely cover the
surface.
All timber required to be built into bedded or fixed against brickwork, masonry or concrete
shall be given two priming coats and one undercoat on the concealed surfaces.
All woodwork shall have knots treated with two coats of a knotting solution and then
painted with aluminium priming paint prior to priming the complete surface. The wood
shall then be primed, stopped and painted with two undercoats and one high gloss-
finishing coat.
Hard wood, which is not required to be painted, shall be made perfectly smooth, prepared
and oiled twice with linseed oil. Alternatively, it shall be stained and wash-polished, or
treated with two coats of an approved varnish.
Bitumastic painted surfaces and coated pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove
grease, dirt or other deleterious matter, and then painted with one coat of sealer, one coat
of leafing aluminium, one coat of undercoating paint and one coat of high gloss finish.
When so described or directed, internal surfaces of fair-faced block work, plastered walls
and the soffits of concrete roofs shall be prepared and painted with one coat of antisuction
primer, followed by one undercoat and two finishing coat of PVA based plastic emulsion
paint.
Exterior surfaces for fair faced block work walls and concrete columns at the new
buildings shall be prepared and painted with two coats of an approved stone paint.
At the completion of all works, the Contractor shall clean down the premises; wash paving
and steps; wash and leather down wall tiling, etc. Clean all sanitary fittings; touch up
paint work; examine all roofs and leave watertight; clean out all pipes and leave the whole
of the premises in a clean, sound and perfect condition ready for immediate occupation.

3.15.11 SECURITY FENCING AND GATES
(A) Security Fencing
Chain link gauge 8 or equivalent fences shall be constructed in accordance with BS 1722,
Part 10 and shall be of such manufacture that when any one segment is cut, remaining
segments within the pattern retain their rigidity. Overall height of the fencing shall be
2.4metrs above ground level, excluding barbed wire. Posts of the fences shall be of steel
structure with concrete block foundations. The perimeter fences shall be earthed
independently of the main switchyard earthing with an adequate earthing rod at every 5
supporting posts of the fences.
The posts shall have cranked tops set at 45 to the posts, to which shall be attached three
stands of galvanized barbed wire to BS 4102. Barbed wires shall be strained between
straining posts with eyebolts and fixed to intermediate posts with stirrup wires.
Intermediate posts shall be provided at centres not exceeding 3 meters. Corner posts and
struts shall be provided at all ends, corners, adjacent to gate posts and at intervals not
exceeding 35 meters.
All fence fittings shall be galvanized.
(B) Gate
A gate shall comply with BS 1722, Part 10 and shall be constructed of galvanized chain
link mesh on galvanized extension arms. Separate man gate shall be provided beside the
main gate.
The gate shall be fitted with a vertical drop bolt on each leaf, a sliding bar lock with
padlock eyes and a padlock to prevent movement of the sliding bar lock. All these fittings
shall be galvanized. The vertical drop bolts are to drop into galvanized steel tubes cast into


the road, to secure the gate when in both closed and open positions. Gateposts shall be
made from galvanized steel RHS or tubular section shall be capped and set in concrete in
the ground.
Gate hinges (pivots) shall be heavily galvanized.

3.15.12 ANCILLARY CIVIL ENGINEERING AND BUILDING WORKS
General
The ancillary civil engineering and building works for the Project are classified as follows:-
(1) Air conditioning and ventilating works.
(2) Fire safety facilities, and
(3) Control room at KPA.
(1) Air Conditioning and Ventilating services
Air Conditioning
Supervisors office, Control room, Library, Communications equipment and battery room
shall be air-conditioned.
Air conditioning shall be provided in the form of self-contained air conditioning units, in a
designed capacity for proper operation and maintenance of communications equipment
proposed by the Contract.
The air conditioning units shall be individually thermostatically controlled to maintain
internal conditions at 20 to 22 degrees centigrade.
Mechanical Ventilation
Supply and extract ventilation shall be provided to serve the toilet/wash rooms.
Supply air handling plants shall consist of a fresh air intake louvers, insect screen, filter
and fan.
Extract ventilation shall be provided by means of wall mounted fans, roof extract units or
ducted systems with louvered discharges to atmosphere.
Design
All air conditioning and ventilation systems shall be designed for continuous operation.
Plant shall be arranged to facilitate maintenance and future replacement of equipment.
The Contractor shall calculate heat gains and losses under the local conditions, taking into
account solar radiation, thermal transmittance through roofs, walls, floors and windows,
fresh air requirements, heat emission from installed electrical equipment and lighting,
personnel, infiltration and any other sources.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the heat transfer coefficients for all
materials used in building construction. In the event of any change in materials, design or
method of building construction, the Contract shall at all times be responsible for
rechecking the design of all system to ensure that they are capable of meeting the specified
design requirements.
Self contained room air conditioners shall be of the through-the-wall pattern and complete
with adjustable grilles, heavy gauze zinc coated stove enamelled sheet steel casing with
single or two colour decorative finish.
The casing and position shall be such as to protrude not more than 250mm into the
conditioned space and not external projection beyond the building line will be permitted
other than the fixing of the condenser cooling air grille.
Compressors shall be of the fully hermetic type, fitted with resilient mountings and
complete with thermal overload protection and starting relays.
Evaporators shall be manufactured of copper tube with copper or aluminium fins
mechanically bonded. The evaporator fan shall be of double inlet double width type and
complete with continuously rated totally enclosed electric motor.
Filters shall be of the washable type, suitably positioned for easy access for cleaning.
Automatic control by means of an integral thermostat shall be provided together with the
safety controls to prevent excessive cooling.


(2) Fire Safety Facilities
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided under this Contract. Portable, wall mounted,
hand held extinguishers shall be 5.5 Kg pressurized control discharge BCF units.
The body of the extinguisher shall be seamless, welded and brazed as appropriate.
The extinguisher shall be capable of being released by means of a lever-operated valve
provided with a safety pin.
Extinguishers shall be capable of controlled partial discharge.
The type shall be of that recharge unit that is locally available.
The extinguishers shall be wall mounted and attached in a manner affording quick release
from the supporting bracket. They shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is
not more than 1.5 meters above the floor. In no case shall the clearance between the
bottom of the extinguisher and the floor be less than 0.1 meter. The extinguishers shall be
positioned so that the instructions for operation face outwards.
Automatic control by means of an integral thermostat shall be provided together with the
safety controls to prevent excessive cooling.
(3) Control room
At the new KPA Substation, the control room shall be at least 240m, and shall house the
following;
11kV switchgear
Circuit breaker control and protection relay panels room
Battery room
Battery chargers and distribution boards
Communication equipment
Fully furnished Office
A washroom ,WC, Urinal and Bath
Equipment/Utility store
Library/Records room
3.16 TESTS AT THE SITE
During the construction and after the installation of each item of equipment under the
Section 2, tests shall be performed, as specified herein, to establish the accuracy of the
assembly and to prove the adequacy of the materials and the workmanship. All tests and
tests procedures shall be approved by the Employer.
The Contractor shall perform the following tests of each subsection, for all items where
applicable, to ensure that the equipment has been correctly installed, all necessary
adjustments and settings made, and that the item is in sound condition to run under load.
(A) Inspection during erection of equipment
(a) Appearance check of all equipment
(b) Calibration of pressure gauges
(c) Protective relay check
(d) Oil tightness check and gas leakage tests
(e) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
(B) Test after the installation of equipment
1. Substation Switchgear.
a. Circuit breakers
i. Closing and opening operation test
ii. Trip-free operation test
iii. Manual operation test
iv. Remote operation test
v. Main Contact resistance test
vi. Breaker timing (closing time and opening time)
vii. Measurement of insulation resistance
b. Disconnecting switches
i. Operation test (manual and remote)
ii. Check of interlock mechanism
iii. Measurement of insulation resistance


iv. Main Contact resistance
c. Lightning arresters
i. Measurement of insulation resistance
d. Current transformers
ii. Ratio test
iii. Polarity check
iv. Magnetisation curve to confirm knee point
e Voltage transformers
ii. Ratio and Polarity check.
2. Control, measuring and protective equipment
a. Control and measuring equipment
i. Relay tests
ii. Measurement of insulation resistance
iii. Sequential operation check
iv. Calibration of meters
b. Protective relaying equipment
i. Individual relay calibration and Functional tests
ii. Residual voltage (current) measurement
iii. Measurement of burden
iv. Current and voltage transformer circuits grounding point check
v. Sequential operation test at each station by primary and secondary injection to
check sensitivity and stability
vi. Station to station operation performance tests (transmission line protective
relaying equipment only).
vii. Test on Trip and alarm circuits
viii. Stability, Operation, and Sensitivity of transformer unit schemes
. ix. Calibration Tests on all Instruments
x. Calibration Test on Energy meter
(3) Miscellaneous materials
a. Outdoor bus
b. Power cables
i. High voltage test
ii. Insulation resistance measurement
c. Control cables
i. Insulation resistance measurement

(C) ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall undertake to complete all works in accordance with statutory
requirements including those of:
i) The Kenya Agricultural Act - Concerning protection against soil erosion.
ii) Public Health Act Concerning with noise, water and air quality as they relate to
human health.
iii) Chief Authority Act Concerning the regulation of timber cutting and wasteful
destruction of trees and avoidance of damage to the public road or other
community facilities.
iv) The Local Government Act Section 145 for preservation or protection of wildlife
and Section 163 regarding noise disturbance controls.
v) Environment Management and Coordination Act - EMCA99, Kenya Environmental
Law and accompanying gazetted regulations.
vi) Energy Act 2007 Environmental provisions.
vii) Forest and Wildlife Act
viii) Clearance and disturbance of natural vegetation shall be kept to a minimum to
prevent habitat loss and to keep soil erosion in check.



3.17 SITE VISIT
In practising due diligence, the contractor is specifically advised to inspect the site &
terrain and be well acquainted with the actual working and other prevalent conditions,
facilities available, position of material and labour. The bidder is advised to visit and
examine the site where the plant is to be installed and its surroundings and obtain for
itself on its own responsibility all the information that may be necessary for preparing the
bid. The bidders shall ask for necessary clarifications required for clearly understanding
the scope & technical /commercial requirements of the tender from KPA before submitting
their offer.

B. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11kV SWITCHGEAR

These specifications lay down requirements for 11kV metal clad switchgear panels. They are
intended for use by Kenya Ports Authority in purchasing the equipment. They must be read
together with the accompanying Technical Specifications for 132 KV Switchgear, Control,
Protection and Communications Equipment.

NOTE: These specifications have been derived from the standards of the Kenya Power and
Lighting Company (K.P.L.C) and the tenderer is therefore advised to get acquainted with the said
standards.

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 SCOPE
These Specifications cover the Design and Engineering, Manufacture, Testing at the
Manufactures Factory, painting, packing for transport, insuring, shipping, delivering to
the port of Kenya, landing, customs clearing, transporting and Delivery to KPA stores of 11
KV Indoor Metal Clad Switchgear Panels .

Subsequent paragraphs will give detailed descriptions and requirements for the
Switchgear Panels, including Circuit Breakers, Current, Transformers, Voltage
Transformers, Protection relays, metering, measuring, indicating and control devices and
other equipment / devices, specified herein.

1.2 STANDARDS
Rating, characteristics, tests and test procedures, etc, for the 11kV metal-clad switchgear
panels and all the protection relays, measuring and indicating instruments and the control
and monitoring devices and accessories, including current transformers and voltage
transformers shall comply with the provisions and requirements of the standards of the
International Electro-technical Commission (IEC), and also relevant ANSI standards where
specified.

The last revision or edition in effect at the time of bid invitation shall apply. Where
references are given to numbers in the old numbering scheme from IEC it shall be taken to
be the equivalent number in the new five-digit numbers scheme. The bidder shall
specifically state the precise standard, complete with identification number, to which the
various equipment and materials are manufactured and tested. The bid document may
not contain a full list of standards to be used, as they only are referred to where useful for
clarification of the text.

1.3 UNIT OF MEASUREMENT AND LANGUAGE
In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings prepared by the
manufacturer, the metric units of measurement shall be used. On drawings or printed
pamphlets where other units have been used, the equivalent metric measurement shall be
added. All documents, correspondence, drawings, reports, operating and maintenance
instructions/manuals and nameplate details of the equipment shall be in English
language.



1.4 SERVICE CONDITION
From the geographical condition, the area where the switchgear panels shall be installed is
categorized into the tropical climate zone. In choosing materials and their finishes, due
regard shall be given to the humid tropical conditions under which the switchgear panels
shall be called upon to work. The manufacturer of the switchgear panels shall submit
details of his usual practice of tropicalization which have proven satisfactory for
application to the switchgear panels and associated equipments to prevent rusting and
ageing in the tropical climate zone. The applicable standards for tropicalization shall be
listed.

1.4.1 Climatic Conditions
Unless otherwise specifically stated in particular technical specifications any equipment or
component or assembly shall be designed for the following service conditions:
Parameter Max Min
Ambient air temperature
Outdoor +40
0
C -1
0
C
Indoor +40
0
C -1
0
C
24 hours average
maximum
+30
0
C -1
0
C
Relative humidity 90-100%

Height above sea level 2200m
EMC Class (IEC 6100) Industrial environments
Seismic coefficient 1.5
Rainfall condition
Average 800-1700 mm/year
Maximum 160mm in 24 hours
Annual mean isokeraunic
level
Max 180 thunderstorm
days

Pollution (IEC 60815) Heavy: class II
Creepage 25mm/KV

1.4.2 Switchgear Room Temperature
The switchgear should be suitable for installation in a room without air conditioning but
with ventilation to allow natural cooling. Therefore all the protection and control devices
employed shall be capable of operating in this environment without failure for their
designed life time. Particularly the power supply modules of the protection and control
devices shall be designed for minimum heat generation and effective heat dissipation to
ensure that the temperature of these devices enclosed in the relay panels at the above
listed ambient temperature shall not exceed the maximum operating temperature of the
device.

1.4.3 Tropicalization

(a) All equipment must be designed for operations in the service tropic climate conditions
and fully comply with climatic aging tests as per IEC 60932 class 2.
In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard shall be given to the humid tropical
conditions under which the switchgear will be called upon to work. The manufacturer
shall submit details of his usual practice which have proven satisfactory for application to
the parts of the switchgear panels, which may be affected by tropical conditions.
(i) Metals
Iron and steel are generally to be painted or galvanized as appropriate. Indoor
parts may alternatively have chromium or copper-nickel plates or other approved


protective finish. Small iron and steel parts (other than rustless steel) of all
instruments and electrical equipment, the cores of electromagnets and the metal
parts of relays and mechanisms shall be treated in an appropriate manner to
prevent rusting.
(ii) Screws, Nuts, Springs, Etc
The use of iron and steel shall be avoided in instruments and electrical relays
wherever possible. Steel screws shall be zinc, cadmium or chromium plated or
where plating is not possible owing to tolerance limitations, shall be of corrosion
resisting steel. Instrument screws (except those forming part of a magnetic circuit)
shall be of brass or bronze. Springs shall be of non-rusting material, e.g.,
phosphor-bronze or nickel silver, as far as possible.
(iii) Rubbers:
Neoprene and similar synthetic compounds, not subject to deterioration due to the
climatic conditions, shall be used for gaskets, sealing rings, diaphragms, etc.

1.5 WORKING STRESS AND EQUIPMENT /APPARATUS DESIGN
1.5.1 General
(a) The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that they will not
suffer damage under the most adverse conditions nor result in deflections and
vibrations, which might adversely affect the operation of the equipment. Mechanisms
shall be constructed to avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion.
(b) The equipment and apparatus shall be designed and manufactured in the best and
most substantial and workmanlike manner with materials best suited to their
respective purpose and generally in accordance with up-to-date recongnized standards
of good practice.
(c) The equipment shall be designed to cope with 0.2g horizontal acceleration of
seismology on the centers of gravity.
(d) Whenever possible, all similar parts, including spare parts, shall be made
interchangeable. Such parts shall be of the same materials and workmanship and
shall be constructed to such tolerances as to enable substitution or replacement by
spare parts easily and quickly.
(e) All equipment shall be designed to minimize the risk of fire and consequential damage,
to prevent ingress of vermin and dust and accidental contact with electrically energized
or moving parts. The switchgear panels shall be capable of continuous operation with
minimum attention and maintenance in the exceptionally serve conditions likely to be
obtained in a tropical climate and where the switchgear is called upon to frequently
interrupt fault currents on the system and also where the duty of operation is high.
1.5.2 Strength and Quality
(a) All steel casting and welding shall be stress-relieved by heat treatment before
machining and castings shall be stress-relieved again after repair by welding.
(b) Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout, especially in the design of all parts
subject to alternating stresses or shocks.
1.5.3 Design data low voltage equipment
Low voltage equipment and installation shall be designed in accordance with EMC
directives. The rating and design criteria for low voltage equipment shall be as follows:
(a) AC Supply Rating system
Rated voltage between phases 415 V AC
Connection type 3ph 4 wire
Rated voltage between phase to earth 240 V AC
Grounding system PME
Frequency 50 HZ
Voltage variation +/-10%
Frequency variation +/-2%


Power frequency 1 min, Test Voltage 3 kV
Thermal rating of conductors 120% of load
Max short-circuit current 31.5 kA

The AC supply shall be used for power circuit and for lighting, indication,motor
controls and similar small power circuits.
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment provided under this tender is to be capable
of reliable operation at voltages as low as 85% of the rated voltage, and to withstand
continuously up to 110% supply voltage above the rated value of 240V or 415 V AC.

(b) DC Auxiliary Supply Rating

Equipment/ Device Rated voltage 110 V DC
Connection type 2 wire
Voltage variation 85-137 V DC

(I) The auxiliary dc supply shall be used for controls, indication, alarm, protection
relays, and circuit breaker tripping and closing circuits, e.t.c.
(II) All equipment and apparatus including the circuit breakers, protective relays,
control, devices and accessories, measuring and indicating instruments and
electronic equipment shall be capable of satisfactory operation at 80% t0 125% of
the rated dc supply voltage.

1.5.4 Design data for Medium voltage plant and equipment
The rating and design criteria for the MV plant and equipment shall be as follows:-

ITEM Parameters SYSTEM PARAMETER
1 System description 50Hz, 3 phase, 3 wire
2 Neutral point earthing Solid earthed
3 Nominal system voltage 11 kV
4 Highest system (Service) voltage as defined by IEC 0
69938
12 kV
5 Highest Equipment Rated Voltage as defined by IEC -
60071
17.5 kV
6 Symmetrical Short Circuit Rating 31.5 kA
7 Short-circuit current withstand , not less then 3 second 31.5 kA
8 Dynamic peak current (min making current) not less
than
78 kA
9 Rated current of busbars 2000 A
10 Rated current for transformer incomers and bus coupler 1500 A
11 Minimum rated continuous current of circuit breakers 630 A
12 Insulation level according to IEC 60071:
12a Lightning impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 kV Peak 95 kV
12b Test voltage at power frequency 1 min dry and wet. To
earth and between phases
38 kV
13 For the design and erection of the busbars the following
minimum clearance shall be observed

12a Phase to earth [mm] 300
12b Phase to phase[mm] 250
13 Minimum nominal creepage distance as defined in IEC
60815, Table II
25mm /kV


1.6 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
All materials supplied under this Contract shall be new and of the best quality and of the
class most suitable for working under the conditions specified. They shall withstand the
variations of temperature and atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions
without distortion, deterioration or undue stresses in any parts and also without affecting
the suitability of the various parts of the works for which they were designed.
1.6.1 Electrical controls, auxiliaries and power supplies
(a) Responsibility for electrical control and auxiliaries. The manufacturer shall provide all
control, indication, alarm and protection devices and all auxiliary equipment with
wiring and interconnecting cable which are integral parts of or are directly associated
with or mounted on the switchgear panels to be supplied under this tender. The
design of protection and control schemes for the switchgear panels shall be subject to
approval by the employer.
(b) Operation and control
Interlocking devices shall be incorporated in the control circuit to ensure safety, and
proper sequence and correct operation of the equipment.
1.6.2 Corona and radio interference
(a) Switchgear shall electrically be designed to avoid local corona formation and discharge
likely to cause radio interference.
(b) The design of jointing of adjacent metal parts and surfaces shall be such as to prevent
corrosion of the contact surfaces and to maintain good electrical contact under service
conditions.
(c) Particular care shall be taken during manufacture of busbars and fittings and during
subsequent handling to ensure smooth surface free from abrasion . All joints on the
busbars and the circuit within the switchgear board shall be silver or tin-plated to ensue
good electrical connection.
1.6.3 Switchgear Panels
(a) The switchgear panels shall be dead-front, floor-standing, rigid welded steel frames,
completely enclosed by metal sheets and suitable for indoor installation.
(b) The floor-standing switchgear panel shall have provision for bolting to the floor.
(c) Suitable terminal blocks shall be provided for all outgoing power and control cables. All
cable terminals shall generally be located for bottom entry and connections.
(d) The switchgear panels shall be painted to RAL 7032 colour.
(e) Enclosures for the switchgear panel and for other electrical equipment shall have the
following degree of protection (ref IEC 60034, IEC 60529 and IEC 60947)
Equipment Degree of protection
Medium voltage enclosed switchgear IP 41
Indoor control and relaying equipment IP 51
(f) Interior illumination lamps operated by door switches shall be provided for each
switchgear control compartment. The Lamps should be easily available in the local
market for future replacements. One 240V socket outlet of 3-points square terminals
shall be provided for each switchgear panels in the control compartment.
(g) Space heaters for 240V AC shall be provided inside the switchgear panel, circuit
breaker and control compartments to prevent moisture condensation. A hygrostat
control unit with variable temperature and humidity control setting shall be installed
to control the heater.


1.6.4 Measuring Instruments
(a) All measuring instruments, including energy meters, shall be of flush-mounted, back-
connected, dust-proof and heavy-duty switchboard type. Each measuring instruments
shall have a removable cover, either transparent or with a transparent window. Each
instrument shall be suitable for operation with the instrument transformers detailed in
these specifications, under both normal; and short-circuit conditions.
(b) For analog type instruments, scale plates shall be of a permanent white circular or
rectangular finish with black pointer and markings. The scale range shall be determined
from the current transformer and voltage transformer ratios and is given in the detailed
specification for each instrument.
(c) All measuring instruments of analog type shall be approximately 110mm
2
enclosures and
shall be provided with clearly readable long scale, approximately 240 degree. The
maximum error shall be not more than one and a half (1.5) percent of full-scale range.
1.6.5 Indicating lamps
(a) Indicating lamps assemblies shall be of the switchboard type, insulated for 110 V
DC services, with appropriately coloured lens. The lens shall be made of a
material, which will not be softened by the heat from the lamps.
(b) For the circuit breaker, red indicating lamps shall be used for ON position, green
lamps for OFF position indication and amber for circuit breaker auto trip.
1.6.6 Nameplate and Escutcheon Plates
(a) Nameplate and Escutcheon Plates
Each cubicle, panel, meter, switch and device shall be provided with a nameplate of
escutcheon plate for identification with English description and also where
appropriate the IEC number on the front of the panel directly below each device as
appropriate. On the inside of the control compartment of the switchgear panel, a
white label, engraved in Black Letter and Numbers shall be fixed on or below each
device. The device name/number fixed in the drawings. Each equipment shall be
provided with a rating plate containing the required information as specified in the
relevant IEC standards.
(b) The plates shall be made of stainless steel and shall not be deformed under the
services conditions at the site. The entries on the plates shall be indelibly marked
by engraving with black letter on a white background or vice versa as specified.
1.6.7 Wiring
(a) General
(i) All wiring inside the switchgear panel shall be done with PVC insulated wire not
less than 2.5 sq.mm. flexible cable. A suitable wiring duct system firmly fixed on the
panel and having covers shall be installed for all inter-panel and front-to-rear panel wiring
as well as for wiring within the panels, which will provide easy access for inspection and
replacement of the wires.
(ii) Wiring between terminals of the various devices shall be point to point. Splices or
tee connection will not be acceptable. Wire runs from the duct to the device shall be
neatly trucked or clamped.
(iii) Exposed wiring shall be kept to a minimum, but where used, shall be formed into
compact groups suitably bound together and properly supported.


(iv) Instruments transformer secondary circuits shall be grounded only on the terminal
block in the control compartment. Facilities for short circuiting the current
transformers secondary windings while the switchgear panel is in service shall be
provided.
(v) Cable supports and clamp type terminal lugs shall be provided for all incoming and
outgoing power wiring terminated at each panel. All wiring conductors (wires) shall
be marked at each point of termination onto the terminal block or device. These
wire markers shall be of an approved type and permanently attached to the
conductor insulation. The method of ferruling shall be subject to approval by the
employer; it is however preferred that the wire marker (ferrule) correspond to the
device number or terminal block number and the number of the terminal where it
is connected. All the devices and the terminal block must therefore have unique
number.
(b) Phase arrangement
The standard phase arrangement when facing the front of the panel shall be R-S-T-N,
and P-N from the left to right, from top to bottom, and front to back for A.C. three-
phase and single-phase circuits. For DC circuit it shall be N-P from top to bottom and
front to back. All relays, instruments, other devices, buses and equipment involving
three-phase circuit shall be arranged and connected in accordance with the standard
phase arrangement wherever possible.
(c) Wiring colour code
All wires shall have ferrules at all terminations to distinguish each wire and terminal. In
addition, the wire shall have the following colours:
Circuit Colour
Voltage transformers / Current transformers R, Y, B, BLK
Auxiliary A.C. supply connection cables / bus-wires Brown and Black
D.C. control wiring within the panel Grey or Black
Grounding / earthing cable/wire Green with yellow stripe
(d) Phase and polarity colour code
The following coloured ferrules shall be provided on each wire in order to identify
phase and polarity.
Phase and Polarity
A.C., three-phase, for
CT and VT secondary
wiring
First phase Red
Second phase Yellow
Third phase Blue
Neutral Black
A.C., Single-phase First phase Red
Neutral Black
Ground Green with yellow stripe
DC auxiliary Supply
connection
Positive Brown
Negative Black
Cables markers and wire numbers system must be submitted to the employer for
approval before commencing the detailed design work for protection and control.
1.6.8 Terminal blocks
(a) Terminal block for control wiring shall be rated not less then 600V AC
(b) White or other light-coloured marking strips, fitted to each block, shall be provided for
circuit designation.


(c) The terminal arrangement, including the terminal blocks for VT and CT circuits
connections, shall be subject to the employers approval. A total of not less than 20
spare terminals shall be provided for future use.
(d) Shorting Links shall be provided on the current transformer (CT) circuits on the
terminal block. It shall be possible to short the CTs under live system conditions
without open-circuiting the CTs.
(e) Isolation links (sliding Links) shall be provided on the trip circuits, alarm and on the
VT circuits to allow easy isolation of these circuits without disconnecting the wires
from the terminal block.
(f) Each individual terminal block shall be market with a distinctive number, which shall
be the same number used in the drawings, for identification purposes. The TB
number shall be engraved in black numbers in white background and shall be durable
so as to last the life time of the switchgear board.
(g) Each set of terminal block shall be identified by a label to distinguish it from another
set of terminal block. The numbers used to mark the terminals on the terminal block
shall be unique. The labels used will match those used in the drawings.
1.7 EQUIPMENT AND SWITCHGEAR EARTHING
1.7.1 General
All the compartment including the hinged doors of the switchgear panels and all the
earthing points of the equipment installed/mounted in the switchgear panels shall be
connected to the grounding conductor at the bottom of the panel for external connection to
the substation earthing system.
Earthing conductors shall be of annealed high conductivity copper stranded in accordance
with Table 4 in BS.6346 and protected with extruded PVC sheath of 1000 volts grade. The
earthing conductor on the primary equipment such as the Earth Switch and also for inter-
panel earth-bonding as well as for external connection to the substation Earthing- grid
shall be adequate to carry the rated switchgears short-circuit current of 31.5 kA for 3
seconds.
1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
1.8.1 General
(a) Materials shall be new; the best quality of their respective kinds and such as are usual
and suitable for work of like character. All materials shall comply with the least issue
of the specified standard unless otherwise specified or permitted by the employer.
(b) Workmanship shall be of the highest class throughout to ensure reliable and
vibrations free operations. The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be
such that the stresses to which they may be subjected shall not cause distortion,
undue wear, or damage under the most severe conditions encountered in service.
(c) All parts shall conform to the dimensions shown and shall be built in accordance with
approved drawings. All joints, datum surfaces and meeting component shall be
machined and all castings shall be spot faced for nuts. All machined finished shall be
shown on the drawings. All screw, bolts, studs and nuts and threads for pipe shall
conform to the latest standards of the International Organization for Standardization
covering these components and shall all conform to the standards for metric sizes.
(d) All materials and works that have cracks, flaws or other defects or inferior
workmanship will be rejected by the employer.
1.8.2 Assembly
Necessary items of equipment shall be assembled in the factory prior to shipment and
routine tests shall be performed by the manufacture as per the requirements of the latest
issue of IEC as specified under each equipment in these specifications to demonstrate to
the satisfaction of the employers that the switchgear panels comply with the requirement
of the relevant IEC standards.



1.8.3 Casting
Casting shall be true to pattern, of workmanlike finish and of uniform quality and
condition, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks or other
injurious defects, shall be satisfactorily cleaned for their intended purpose.
1.8.4 Welding
Wherever welding is specified or permitted, a welding process, including stress relieve
treatment as required if necessary, conforming to an appropriate and widely recognized
professional standard shall be used. All welders and welding operators shall be fully
qualified by such a standard.
1.8.5 Colour standard
The final colour of each item shall be as described under each item.
1.8.6 Operation Details
Instructions shall be engraved on the switchgear panel, on the circuit breaker
compartment describing in simple steps how to carry our correct and safe isolation,
racking-in and racking-out switching operations on the circuit breaker. Similar details
should be provided for the operation of the earth switch.
1.9 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND PAINTING
1.9.1 Embedded Steelwork
All parts to ultimately be buried in concrete shall be cleaned and protected before leaving
the manufacturers plant by cement wash or other approved method. Before being
installed they shall be thoroughly desiccated and cleared of all rust and adherent matter,
or be treated according to a method approved by the Employer. Such cleaning or
treatment shall not detrimentally affect the strength or final operation and function of the
equipment.

1.9.2 Steel exposed to atmosphere
(a) All machined parts or bearing surfaces shall be cleaned and protected from corrosion
before leaving the manufacturers plant by the application of an approved rust
preventive coating, or a peelable plastic film. Where the latter is impracticable, such
parts shall be heavily covered with high melting points grease. After erection such
parts shall be cleaned with solvent and lapped or polished bright.
(b) All parts, other than machined parts, which will be exposed after erection shall be
thoroughly cleaned and galvanized or given with two coats of best quality approved
primer and one coat of best quality approved finish paint before leaving the
manufacturers plant and a further one coat of paint of an approved quality and colour
after erection and touching up on the site, expect such apparatus as panels and
instruments which shall be finished painted under approved procedures.
(c) All outside panel surfaces shall be primed, filed where necessary, and given not less
than two coats of synthetic undercoat. The finishing coat for the outdoor and indoor
installation shall be a gloss paint.
(d) Primer shall be applied to surfaces prepared in accordance with the plant
manufacturers instructions. The surface shall be wiped clean immediately prior to
applying the paint. The primer and finish coats of paint shall be applied using the
methods and equipment recommended by the manufacturer.
(e) The Internal surface of all pipelines shall be cleaned out by the approved methods
before installation and again prior to commissioning, to ensure freedom from dirt, rust
, scale, welding slag, etc. all exposed pipes shall be painted with identifying colour after
erection is completed. The colour code system shall be approved by the employer.
(f) All steel surfaces, which are in permanent contact with oil, shall be given three coats of
approved oil resistant.
(g) No painting or protection is required for finished or unfinished stainless steel parts.


(h) The final colour of all equipment, frames for meters and relays, and switch handle
shall be as described under each particular item.
(i) The humid and tropical conditions shall be taken into account on selection of the
paints and painting procedure.

1.10 DRAWING
(a) Before starting manufacture of the switchgear panels, dimensioned drawings and data
showing all significant details of the equipment and materials to be used shall be
submitted to the employer for approval. Four 4 weeks shall be allowed for Review of
the drawings by the employer. The employer shall indicate on the drawings whether
the drawings are Approved with comments or Not Approved. Where the drawings are
Not Approved, the manufacturer shall modify the drawings as per the Employers
comments and in line with the specifications and re-submit to the Employer for review.
Manufacturing of the switchgears panels shall not commence under any
circumstances without receipt of Approved drawings by the manufacturer from the
employer. Any delays in approval of the drawings caused by submission of incorrect
drawings by the manufacturer shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer, who
shall fully offset any associated cost.
(b) The manufacture of the switchgear shall then proceed strictly in accordance with the
approved drawings and also in accordance with the detailed specifications as
contained herein. Where conflict may arise between the specifications and the
approved drawings, the specifications will take precedence, unless its specifically
indicated in writings on the approved drawings that the conflicting clauses in the
specifications is superseded, or where followings discussions between the
manufacturer and the employer, the employer gives approval in writing to supersede
the conflicting clauses in the specification.
(c) It is to be understood, however, that approval of the drawings will not relieve the
manufacturer of any responsibility in connection with the works that the switchgear
will fully comply with the relevant IEC/ANSI standard and with these specifications.
(d) All drawings submitted for approval or sent to the Employer for any other reason shall
be in hard copy form and shall be sent by courier. Drawings for Approval shall not by
any means be forward via-e-mail or any other media except in hard copy form.
(e) On successful completion of the initial FATs and following completion of the
manufacture of the complete switchgear panels, the manufacturer shall carry out all
the tests listed under section 2.5 for the completed switch board and for current
transformers, voltage transformers, circuit breakers and for protection relays. The
above test shall be carried out on each and every switchgear panel. Any problem noted
will be rectified and the Employer will only be invited to the factory when all the test
are successful. This will ensure that the employer does not spend time in the factory
waiting for the manufacture to fix problems that arise during the FATs. While such
anomaly would have been detected and rectified by the manufacturer before hand after
conducting the above routine tests.
(f) Upon testing of the panels as in (f) above the drawings will be edited to capture any
minor wiring errors detected in order to produce the final As Built Drawings. A copy of
the final As Built Drawings and Routine test results for each panel, signed by the
Manufacturer shall be sent by courier to the employer before attendance of FATs.
(g) Each individual switchgear panel shall have its own separate drawings, with the name
of the panel included on the drawings for identification
(h) Before Approval of shipment of the switchgear panel, Five (5) copies of bound As Built
drawings (A4 size) in Hand Copy shall be forward to the employer in Durable Hard
Cover Box File. The files shall have a tag with the following inscription.


Kenya Ports Authority 11kV Switchgear Board AS Built Drawings
Also three (3) software copies (in CD ROM) of the As Built drawings in AutoCAD
Electrical 2010 SLM or later version shall be sent to the employer via courier. The CD
ROM will have the same label as above. The drawings provided on soft copy shall be
freely editable to allow the employer to incorporate any changes made in future.
All protection and control drawings shall be done on A4 size paper. The function of
each drawing shall be clearly indicated. Related drawings shall be arranged
sequentially, and have the same drawing numbers/name but different sheet numbers.
The drawing shall include the following:
Substation drawings
- AC single line drawing
- AC Schematics
- DC Schematics
- Functional Drawings
- Panel wiring, including inter-panel bus-wiring list
- Panel device layout drawing
- General layout drawings for the switchgear panels
- Relays and device list (bill of quantities) for each type of panel

1.11 MANUFACTURE OF SAMPLE PANELS
The manufacturer shall initially manufacture 3 panels as follows
- One incomer panel
- One Bus-coupler panel
- One feeder panel
Upon manufacture of the three (3) panels, the manufacturer shall invite the Employer to
inspect and conduct factory acceptance tests (FATs) on the panels. The manufacturer
shall rectify any minor defects noted during FATs. Upon successful FATs, the Employer
shall authorize the manufacturer to proceed with manufacture of all the other switchgear
board.
Where the manufactured sample panels are unsatisfactory and the manufacturer fails to
rectify the switchgear panels to satisfactory status within four weeks after attendance of
FATs, the Employer shall have the option to cancel the tender.
1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
(a) The manufacturer shall supply detailed instruction manuals concerning the correct
manner of assembling / installing, configuring, setting, testing and commissioning,
operating and maintaining the equipment and devices constituting the switchgear
board, including the board itself. The maintenance details of each component shall
also be described, including the frequency of inspections and lubrication.
The instruction manual shall include a separate and compete section describing the
normal and emergency operating procedures for the switchgear, and shall include
explanatory diagrammatic drawings to facilitate understanding of the instructions.
(b) The manufacturer shall, in preparing the instruction manuals, take into account the
lack of experience and familiarity of the operators with this type of equipment.
(c) The manual shall give specific information as to oil, grease, or any other materials
needed for maintenance operations. This information shall include brand names and


manufacturers number or designations for at least two brands available in Kenya,
preferably manufactures in Kenya.
(d) One complete set of the operating and maintenance manuals for all the plant,
equipment and accessories to be installed/ mounted in the switchgear panels
shall be sent to the employer together with the drawings for approval. The
operating and maintenance manuals shall be original copies printed and bound by the
manufacturer. Any illegible copies of the operating and maintenance manuals
submitted shall be rejected by the employer.
(e) Before approval of shipment of the switchgear panels, Five (5) Copies of the operating
and maintenance instructions/manuals shall be sent to the employers by courier. The
operating and maintenance manuals shall be original copies printed by the
manufacturer. Any illegible copies of the operating and maintenance manuals
submitted shall be rejected by the employer.
In addition, three (3) soft copies of the manuals in CD Rom shall be delivered to the
employer.
1.13 TESTING AT PLACE OF MANUFACTURE
(a) The manufacturer shall be responsible for performing or for having performed all the
required tests listed under the specification for the switchgear and all the current
transformers, voltage transformers, protection relays, energy meter, measuring and
indicating instruments.
(b) The tenders shall confirm the manufacturers capabilities in this regards when
submitting tenders. Any limitations shall be clearly specified.
(c) Tender documents shall be accompanied by copies of Type test and Routine test report
and Certificates for similar rated equipment for the purpose of tender evaluation. Type
test reports and certificates shall be certified by the National Standards and Testing
Authority (NSTA) of the country of origin or by a third party Reputable Testing
Authority. Where a body other than NSTA is used to certify the type-test reports, a
copy of the certificate of accreditation shall be attached. Current contract information
of the testing and certification authority shall be provided.
(d) Upon completion of the manufacturing process, routine tests shall be carried out as
per the respective IEC standards of each equipment as follows:-
i. Circuit Breaker IEC 62271-100 & IEC 60298.
ii. Switchgear panels, IEC 60294
iii. Current Transformers, IEC 60044-1
iv. Voltage Transformer, IEC 60044-2
v. Protection Relays and Measuring and Indicating Instruments, IEC 60255
(e) The manufacturer shall arrange for two (2) engineers from the employer attend Factory
Acceptance Tests (FATs) on the switchgear panels, where routing tests as per the IEC
standard listed above another special tests listed in this specifications shall be carried
out in their presence. The duration of the FATs shall be adequate to test all the offered
switchgear boards, Testing shall strictly be carried out during working hours from 8.00
am to 5.00 pm.
In case the equipment fails the test and has to be rectified or the manufacturer is not
able to complete the tests within the set duration, then the manufacturer shall meet
the cost of accommodation and meals for the Employers Engineers for the additional
days required for completion of the tests.
The employers engineers will only sign the Test Reports/Certificates only when the
test are conducted in their presence in accordance with the relevant IEC standard or
the procedure agreed beforehand between the employer and the manufacturer.


(f) Only upon receipts of authentic certified copies of the FATs Routine Test
Reports/certificates and special tests and satisfactory report from the engineers, shall
the employer give clearance for shipment of the switchgear boards one all other listed
requirements on drawings, operation and maintenance manuals and software have
been meet.
1.14 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT
(a) Seven (7) copies of each different type of software in a CD Rom, for the protection
relays, energy meters, transducers and other measuring devices whose configuration
and settings is software based shall be supplied with the board. Eight (8) connection
cables for each type of device shall also be supplied with the switchgear board.
Before approval for shipment of the switchgear board is granted by the employer, all
the software indicated in the completed technical schedules shall be supplied. The
software shall be for configuration, parameter setting and for data download and
analysis.
It shall be possible to load the software into at least ten (10) different laptop computers
without requirement for additional licenses. Where additional licenses are required,
the cost shall be considered to have been included in the bid.
Four (4) sets of hard covers manuals for each type of software supplied providing
detailed instructions for programming setting and configuration of the relays and other
devices and downloading of data, shall be supplied with the switchgear.
1.15 SPARE PARTS
1.15a SPARES PARTS
The manufacturer (bidder) shall furnish spare parts as listed below and indicate in the
price schedules:-
i Two (2) Feeder circuit breakers, rated at 630A, 31.5 kA, 3 second mounted
on withdraw/isolation trolley
ii One (1) Incomer circuit breaker, rated at 1500A,31.5 kA, 3 second mounted
on withdraw/isolation trolley.
iii Two (2) circuit breaker spring charging motors
iv Three (3) circuit breakers closing coils
v Three (3) circuit breaker tripping coils
vi Two (2) circuit breakers interlocking coils
vii Two (2) earth switch interlocking coils
viii Ten (10) indication lamps of each type
ix Two (2) auxiliary relays of each type
x Two (2) protection relays of each type
xi Four (4) MCBs of each type
xii Two (2) power measurement units
xiii Two (2) energy meter
xiv VT Fuses: Three (3) for primary side and three (3) for secondary side for
each switchgear board.
(a) The spare parts supplied shall be packed or treated in such a manner as to be
suitable for storage under the climate condition at the site for a period of not


less than two years, and each part shall be clearly marked with the description
and purpose on the outside of the package. The manner of storage shall be
recommended by the manufacturer.
(b) Spare parts so provided shall be delivered with the switchgear to the employers
stores. Delivery of spare parts will not be deemed to be complete until the
package have been opened and their content checked and verified by a
representative of the employer.
1.15b ACCESSORIES FOR THE SWITCHGEAR BOARDS
The following accessories shall be supplied with each separate switchgear board:-
i. Two (2) circuit breaker rack in/rack out handle/tool
ii. Two (2) circuit breaker manual spring charging handle/tool
iii. Two (2) earth switch operating handle/tool
iv. Two (2) circuit breaker withdrawal trolley

1.16 PACKING
(a) The switchgear panels and spares shall be packed properly and protected for shipment
from the place of manufacture to the employers stores.
(b) Each crate of package shall contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope and a copy
in triplicate shall be forward to the employer prior to dispatch. All items of materials
shall be clearly marked for easy of identification against the parking list.
(c) All cases, packages, etc, shall be clearly marked on the outside to indicate the total
weight, to show where the weight is bearing and the correct position of the slings and
shall bear an identification mark relating them to the appropriate shipping documents.
(d) Bolts, nuts, washers and fillers shall be bagged in sealed vinyl and packed in steel
cans. The cans shall bear the contents and be created together.
(e) The Employer shall reserve the right to inspect and approve the equipment and the
packing before the items are dispatched. However the manufacturers shall be entirely
responsible for ensuring that the packing is suitable for transit and such inspection
will not relieve the manufacturer from responsibility for any loss or damage due to
faulty packing.
(a) Consignee: KENYA PORTS AUTHORITY
(b) Name of Project: Distribution 11 kV switchgear boards
(c) Contract No:
(d) Port of destination .
(e) Item Number, if applicable,
Package number in sequences,
And quality per package
(f) Description of contents: ..
Net and gross weigh, cubic measure.
The shipping mark is finally subject to the Employers approval.

1.17 DELIVERY
(a) The manufacturer shall deliver the switchgear and spares to the designated employers
store.
(b) The notification for shipment/delivery shall include a complete shipping list if the
contents of each package to be delivered and shall indicate the anticipated date of
delivery and the serial number of each component to be used for identification and
evidence of the insurance cost arranged for it.


2. DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11kV METAL CLAD INDOOR
SWITCHGEAR PANELS.
2.1 SCOPE
This specification is for 11kV Indoor, three pole, metal clad switchgear with vertical or
horizontal isolation, horizontal draw out with circuit breaker employing vacuum
interrupter.
2.2 REFERENCES
may be referred to; however in case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
Unless otherwise specified, the latest revision, edition and amendments of the standard
shall apply.
IEC 60298 AC metal enclosed switchgear and control gear for rated voltages above 11
kV and upto 72.5 kV
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and
their accessories.
IEC 62271- 100 High-Voltage alternating circuit breakers
IEC 60044-1: Current transformers
IEC 60044-2: Voltage transformers
IEC 60255: Electrical Relays
ANSI 37: Medium Voltage AC metal enclosed switchgear and control gear
2.3 CONSTRUCTION OF EACH PANEL
a) The whole switchgear equipment and components shall be designed and constructed
in accordance with IEC 60298. The board shall be complete with all the relevant
components including, busbars, circuit breaker, cable compartment, instrument
transformers, protection relays, instruments and controls.
b) The switchgear board shall be constructed to 1P41 degree of protection in accordance
with IEC 60529. A type test report for the degree of protection of the switchgear
panels from a third party reputable testing laboratory or certified by the national
standards and testing authority (NSTA) or a laboratory accredited to the NSTA shall
be submitted with the tender for evaluation purposes.
c) The panels shall have restricted dimensions suitable for installation in limited
spaces. In particular and without compromising the insulation level, bus - bar
current rating and short circuit current performances, the width of the panels shall
not exceed 800mm.
The LV compartment shall not be less than 650 mm in height, to ensure adequate
space for mounting the relays and other devices and accessories and adequate space
for the cable trucks, terminal blocks and wiring.
The depth of the switchgear, i.e., from the front to the back shall be kept o the
minimum and in any case not exceeding 1800mm.
d) The switchgear panel or cubicle shall be built up of separate metal clad-
compartmented cubicles with earthed metal partitions. The compartments shall be
for busbar, cable connection, circuit breaker, current transformer and control (LV)
compartments. A drawing showing the layout and dimensions of each of the
compartments of the switchgear panel and the devices/components installed in the
compartment shall be submitted with the bid for tender evaluation. Also a drawing
showing the arrangement and dimensions of a complete switchgear board,
comprising two incomers, one bus-coupler and five feeder panels assembled together
shall be included with the bid for tender evaluation. The drawing shall also include
the arc venting chamber to be supplied with the switchgear board. Different drawings
shall be provided for the switchgear board rated and 31.5 kA.
e) The circuit breakers shall be mounted on an inbuilt carriage to facilitate isolation
withdrawal of the circuit breaker. Where the carriage is fixed in the compartment


and do allow complete withdraw of the circuit breaker outside it's compartment, then
a purposely trolley shall be provided equipped with a lowering/raising gear to lower
the circuit breaker to the floor, and to raise the circuit breaker to its compartment
by one person. This requirement shall be demonstrated during FATS.
f) The complete switchgear shall be such that the complete switchgear is of flush-front
design.
g) Each of the switchgear panels shall have four separate compartments as follows:-
i. LV Compartment
ii. Circuit Breaker Compartment
iii. Busbars Compartment
iv. Cable, CTs, VTs and Earth Switch compartment
The circuit breaker, busbars and cables compartments shall be provided with arc
venting outlets to the top of the switchgear board.
The top of the complete switchgear board shall be equipped with arc by-products
venting chambers to direct the arc by products outside the switchgear room. The
design of the arc chamber shall be adequate to handle arc by products at the rated
withstand level of the switchgear board of 31.5 kA, 3 seconds. The design of the arc
chamber shall be complete in every way with provision of connection to the switchgear
wall at least at two points and the terminal expansion flaps to be fitted on the switch
gear wall.
During the FATs the complete venting chamber for one of each type of switchgear
boards, i.e.31.5 kA shall be fully assembled for demonstration to the Employers
Engineers.
h) The low voltage section shall be completely separate from the high voltage section.
All the protection relays, auxiliary relays, energy meters indication lamps,
instruments, control and selection switches and any other associated accessories
will be mounted arc by-products venting requirements to be provided (built into) in
the switchgear room.
i) The switchgear shall be designed for erection with the rear side close to wall as well
as for free standing erection. The manufacturer shall provide single line layout
drawings giving the required minimum dimensions of the switchgear room, including
arc by-products venting requirements to be provided (built into) in the switchgear
room.
j) The switchgear shall be of arc resistant design as per IEEE/ANSI C37.20 and hence
ensure complete safety for switching personnel standing in-front or at the rear of the
switchgear board. A copy of the type test report shall be submitted with the bid for
tender evaluation purposes.
k) Where the venting is intended to penetrate an external wall, the vent shall be covered
such that it meets all environmental conditions (e.g. rain-proof, dust-proof, vermin-
proof).
l) The cable compartment should have an anti vermin guard plate giving protection against
rats, rodents etc.
m) The circuit breaker compartment door shall be provided with provisions for padlocking.
n) The doors shall be capable of withstanding the effects of maximum internal arcing fault
without being blown off and causing danger to personnel and other equipment. This
should be proven by successful testing, as per ANSI C37.20.7 or equivalent IEC
standards. Type test report shall accompany the bid.
o) The busbar shall be single, three phase, air insulated. The primary busbars and
connections shall be of high conductivity and electrolytic material, high grade copper, and
shall be in unit lengths. The busbars shall preferably have a PVC cover to prevent
accidental short-circuits
p) Busbars, connections and their support shall be rated 2000A as required continuously


under ambient conditions and capable of carrying the short-time current associated with
the short circuit ratings of the circuit breakers, for 3 Seconds.
q) Busbars shall be extensible at both ends, such extension shall entail the minimum
possible disturbance to the existing busbar.
r) Provision shall be made for locking busbar and circuit shatters separately in the circuit
breaker compartment. These shutters shall open and close automatically during the
racking in and racking out of the circuit breaker.
s) Provision shall be made for integral circuit earthing and for busbar earthing. Means of
earthing shall be by circuit breaker or purposely built earth switch. Mechanical interlocks
to ensure correct switching operation shall then be provided. It shall not be possible to
close the earth switch on the incomer panel, when the incoming 11kV cable is live.
t) The earth switch shall be easy to operate by one operator and be spring loaded to ensure
effective make operation independent of the operator action. The earth switch shall be
rated to make and carry for 3 seconds, the rated short-circuit current of the respective
switchgear panel of 31.5 kA.
The Status of the earth Switch shall be visible from the front of the Panel. It shall not be
possible to rack-in the circuit breaker into the service position with the earth switch in
closed position. The mechanical interlock between the circuit breaker and the earth
switch shall be strong enough to guarantee safety of the switching personnel and the
switchgear.
The earth switch shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts for local and supervisory
indication of the status of the earth switch. The earth switch operating lever shall be
covered by a shutter and shall only be accessible when it is permitted to operate the earth
switch.
u) The operation of the Earth Switch shall be set in such a way that during both the close and
open operations, a clearance of at least 22.5mm shall be maintained between the operating
handle and the bottom of the switchgear panel.
v) It shall not be possible to insert the earth switch operating handle into position except
when the circuit breaker is in the test or isolated position. The earth switch shall be
equipped with pad-locking facilities when in the closed position
w) All earthing facilities shall be rated for fault making at the rated switchgear short-circuit
current.
x) Earthing switches shall be provided for earthing each of the Busbar Sections separately. All
the interlocks required toensure safe operation of the busbar earth switch shall be built
into the switchgear board. In particular it shall not be possible to close the earth switch
when any of the circuit breakers on that part of the busbar is in service position, i.e., all the
circuit breakers shall be withdrawn for the Busbar earth to be closed. Once the Busbar
earth has been closed, it shall not be possible to rack-in any circuit breaker.
Indications for busbars earth On and OFF shall be provided and visible from the front of
the board.
The Panel wiring for protection, instruments, indication and metering circuits and other
control accessories shall be completely done. All circuits for connection to external cables
such DC & AC auxiliary supplies, external tripping, supervisory control and indications
shall be wired upto the terminal Block at the Back of the panel where external cables
shall be connected. At least 12 spare terminals shall be provided on the terminal board for
any future requirements
y) It is emphasized that Each Switchgear panel will have a terminal block at the back of the
panel where all external cables such as for 110V DC supply, 240V AC supply, connection of
SCADA, measurands/commands and alarms shall be made.
z) 110V DC, 110V AC and 240V AC supplies for circuit breaker control, alarm circuits,
protection relays, metering and motor supply for each panel, shall be controlled by suitably
rated miniature circuit breakers.


aa) The switchgear panels shall be tropical vermin proof. The plates shall be of high quality
mild steel of at least 2mm thickness thoroughly cleaned by shot blasting or other approved
methods
They shall then be given a primary coat and two coats of contrasting colour of durable
and weather resisting paint. The final coat shall be gloss and of RAL 7032. The final
thickness of the paint shall not be less that 80 Microns at any point within the switchgear
panel. The paint thickness shall be measured during the Factory Acceptance Tests.
bb) Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided inside each switchgear panel. They shall be
located so as not to cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment. The heaters shall
be controlled by a hygrostat with a variable humidity and temperature setting. The
heaters shall be dimensioned to ensure that condensation cannot occur within the
switchgear panel. Heaters of adequate rating shall be provided for the circuit breaker,
cable and LV compartments.
The 240V AC supply, for the heaters shall be controlled by a suitably rated single pole
miniature circuit Breaker.
cc) The circuit breaker cubicle shall have a limit switch which shall be wired to provide
SCADA indications on whether the breaker is fully racked in or fully racked
out(withdrawn).
dd) All the switchgear panels shall be rodent and vermin proof.
ee) Suitable means shall be provided to monitor the status of the HV cable, i.e., whether it is
live or dead. The monitoring device shall be a three phase device with illumination in red
colour for live status visible from the front of the panel without opening any compartment
doors. The indications shall be labeled R, Y & B or Ll, L2 & L3. The device shall meet the
requirements of IEC 61243-5.
ff) Each switchgear panel shall be provided with Tinned Copper earth bar of adequate cross
section area to be able to withstand the rated short-circuit current of 25 kA or 31.5 kA for
3 seconds, and arranged so that the bars of adjacent panels are joined together to form a
common earth busbar. Provision shall be made at either end the assembled switchgear
board for connection of the earthing bar to the substation earthing grid.
gg) Manual close & open push buttons shall be provided on the circuit breaker compartment
door for manual close and open of the circuit breaker both in the service and in the
test(withdrawn) position. The manual close and open push buttons shall be clearly
labeled with CLOSE and OPEN Labels and with I(red) and O(Green) Symbols and colour
codes as per the IEC standard.
hh) The complete switchgear board shall be equipped with ARC protection, consisting of
ARC protection relays and arc sensing devices located in the Cable, Circuit Breaker
and Busbar Compartment of each panel. Optical sensors shall be used. The sensors
shall operate upon occurrence of a flash (light) from the ARC. The sensors shall be
connected to the ARC protection Relays via fiber cables or any other suitable means that
is already in use. The ARC protection relay shall monitor both the operation of the Optical
sensors and over current relay and shall only operate upon operation of both the
sensing device and the pick up of the over current element. It shall also be possible to
select the operation of the scheme due to operation of the optical sensor alone but with
longer time delay. Upon operation of the ARC Protection, all circuits within the fault
Zone shall be tripped by the ARC protection relay. The ARC protection scheme shall
have means for indicating the panel and the compartment where the ARC occurred. The
scheme shall be secure and immune to mal-operation. The fundamental operating time
of the ARC protection scheme shall preferably be 50 ms and in any case not more than
100 ms. However adjustable time delay and over current pick-up shall be provided. The
design of the complete scheme shall be to the approval of the employer. A single line
drawing shall be enclosed with the bid to show how the scheme is implemented.


2.3.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
a) The circuit breaker shall be three pole operated, indoor type, employing Vacuum
Interrupter with air or solid Insulation and shall comply with the requirement of
IEC62271-100 in respect of design, type tests, service operation and the making
and breaking of faulty currents.
b) The moving portion of each circuit breaker shall consist of a three-pole circuit
breaker, operating mechanism, primary and secondary disconnecting devices,
auxiliary switches, position indicators and necessary control wiring. The
Auxiliary switches shall be of the plug-in type, with the male contacts mounted
on the breaker carriage and the female contacts on the plug-in cable connected to
the panel wiring. Other options may be considered where there is adequate proof
that the auxiliary contacts will always be making firmly without mis-alignment.
Finger contacts will however not be acceptable.
c) The circuit breakers of the same current and voltage ratings shall be fully
interchangeable, both electrically and mechanically.
d) Name plate for the circuit breaker shall be provided with all the required details
as per IEC standards, including:-
i) Circuit Breaker type
ii) Applicable IEC standard
iii) Total Weight
iv) Rated Voltage
v) Lightning impulse withstand voltage
vi) 1 minute Power frequency withstand voltage
vii) Rated frequency
viii) Rated Current
ix) Breaking Capacity
x) Short time current
xi) Making capacity
xii) Operating sequence
xiii) Rated voltage of closing and opening coil
xiv) Rated voltage of spring charging motor
e) The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be motor wound spring operated,
power closing with electrical release and with provision for hand spring charge.
f) Mechanical indication shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring. This
shall be visible without opening the circuit breaker compartment door. Also two
pairs of Auxiliary contacts, which are open, when the springs are charged shall be
provided for local and supervisory indication.
g) A spare set of 4 normally open and 4 normally closed auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breaker shall be provided and shall be wired to a terminal block (box), for
connection to SCADA equipment, etc.
h) The control circuits for the circuit breaker shall automatically be connected when
inserting the breakers into the cubicle. Alternatively a single plug-in cable for all
auxiliary contacts shall be provided. It will not be possible to rack-in the circuit
breaker without connecting the plug in cable first.
i) The operating mechanism shall be completely trip free both mechanically and
electrically.
j) The circuit breaker shall have a mechanical operations counter
k) One mechanical ON/OFF indicator, with inscription "ON" white letters on red
background and inscription "OFF" white letters on green background shall be
provided for the circuit breaker. Alternatively approved IEC indications for circuit
breaker ON and OFF shall be used.
l) The breaker controls shall have anti-pumping facilities


m) Where the Circuit Breaker is used for circuit or busbar integral earthing, the
control wiring of the breaker housing should be such that when the breaker is in
circuit earth or busbar earth positions it shall only be operated mechanically and
not electrically.
n) Circuit breaker poles between the interrupters and the primary plug-in contacts
shall be fully insulated with durable material.
o) The circuit breaker maintenance and operations manual shall contain clear
instructions on the maintenance requirements of the circuit breaker (if any), to
prevent switchgear failure in service, due to excessive fault current clearance or
any other cause .
2.3.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
a) Current transformers shall be Cast Resin Type and shall be accommodated inside
the cubicle, in a separate compartment or in the same compartment as the cable.
b) The current transformers shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC
60044-1 and IEC 60044-6 and shall have the specified accuracy under load and
short-circuit conditions and shall be able to withstand the effect of short-circuit
fault current rating of the switchgear, of 31.5 kA for 3 seconds.
c) Current transformers shall have a rated burden as specified, sufficient for the
connected Numerical Protection relays and Energy meters and instruments. The
CT rated burden shall however not be less than 15 VA.
d) The Manufacturer of the CTs shall be identified at the time of tender. Copies of
Type Test certificates and routine Test Reports/Certificates as per IEC 60044-1 of
CTs of similar rating and class verifying the class and accuracy as well as the
limits of error for the declared class similar to those of the specified CTs shall be
submitted with the bid for tender evaluation purposes. The specified CTs must be
within the product range of the manufacturer. A catalogue of the CT manufacturer
shall be supplied with the bid.
e) The current transformer shall have markings on the secondary and primary
terminals as per requirements of the IEC 60044-1 standard. The markings shall
be indelibly made. The secondary terminals shall have screw terminals.
f) Name plate for the current transformer shall be provided with all the required
details as per IEC 60044-1 Standards, including:-
i) The manufacturer's name
ii) Serial number and a type designation
iii) Rated primary and secondary current
iv) Rated frequency
v) Rated output and corresponding accuracy class for each secondary
winding, including the rated accuracy limit factor and Instrument security
factor for protection and metering secondary windings respectively.
vi) The highest voltage of the equipment
vii) The rated Insulation level
viii) The rated short-time thermal current (Ith) and the rated dynamic current
ix) Class of Insulation
x) Rated continuous thermal current
2.3.3 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
a) The VT shall be of Cast resin, indoor, type mounted within the 11kV incomer panel.
The VT shall be a three phase unit or Three (3) Single phase units.
b) Voltage transformers shall be suitable for operation of the protection relays, metering
and transformer voltage regulating relay and shall be in accordance with the
requirement of IEC60044-2.
c) Each voltage transformer shall be three phase, five limb, star/star connected and


complete with HV and LV fuses and links, alternatively three single phase units shall
be installed and connected.
d) It shall have an open delta winding to be used for directional earth fault Relay.
e) The Manufacturer of the VTs shall be identified at the time of tender. Copies of Type
Test certificates and routine Test Reports/Certificates as per IEC 60044-2, of VTs of
similar rating and class as the specified VTs shall be submitted with the tender for
evaluation purposes. The Specified VTs must be within the product range of the
manufacturer.
f) Name plate for the voltage transformer shall be provided with all the required details as
per IEC 60044-2 Standards, including:-
i) The manufacturer's name
ii) Serial number and a type designation
iii) Rated primary and secondary voltage
iv) Rated frequency
v) Rated output and corresponding accuracy class for each secondary
winding,
vi) The highest voltage of the equipment
vii) The rated Insulation level
ix) Class of Insulation for the equipment
x) Rated voltage factor and corresponding rated time.
xi) The use each secondary winding and it's corresponding terminals

2.3.4 PROTECTION RELAYS
a) The LV compartment terminal block shall include a test switch (block), which enables
the CTs circuits to be isolated from the relay and shorted without opening circuiting the
CT, to facilitate relay testing in situ and to allow for isolation of VT circuits, alarm and
trip circuits without disconnecting wires at the terminal block.
b) The measurement relays shall be flush mounted and of Numeric Design, with event
recording. Fault recording, power measurements, and shall be in accordance to IEC
60255.
c) Besides the communication port, the relays shall have a human machine interface
facility (MMI) with and LCD Screen where one can easily access relay information.
d) Relays contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents,
which they are required to control in normal service. Where contacts of the protective
relays are not sufficient for circuit breaker tripping, auxiliary trip relays shall be
provided, in order to prevent damage to output contacts of measuring relay.
e) Operating time for auxiliary tripping relays shall not significantly affect the overall
fault clearance time, i.e., the auxiliary trip relays must have short pick up time of less
than 30 ms.
f) Relay contacts shall make firmly without bounce and the relay mechanism shall not be
affected by Panel vibration or external magnetic fields.
g) Relays shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels describing their functions and
IEC Device Function numbers. The labels shall be to the approval of the Employer.
h) Relays shall be suitable for operation on the station D.C. supply without use of
dropping resistors or diodes.
i) To reduce the effect of electrolysis, relay coils operating on DC shall be so connected
such that they are not continuously connected from the positive pole of the station
battery.
j) The relay Thermal rating shall be such that the fault clearance times on any
combination of current and time multiplier settings shall not exceed the thermal
withstand capability of the relay. (Max. fault current = 31.5 kA).
k) The relays shall be EMC 89/336/EEC compliant.


2.3.5 INDICATIONS AND INSTRUMENTS
All instruments shall be flush mounted and shall be in accordance with the requirement
of IEC 51.
Each cubicle shall have the following indications.
One indicator lamp to show the breaker in closed position - RED colour
One indicator lamp to show the breaker in open position - GREEN colour
One indicator lamp to show breaker Auto-trip - Amber colour
The instruments shall be supplied as described under each panel in the subsequent
sections.
2.3.6 POWER CABLE TERMINATION
Cable compartment design shall be suitable for heat shrinkable (or equivalent) jointing
application termination. The following provisions shall be made:-
i) Single core, twelve gland fabricated sheet steel cable box, complete with gland and
armour clamp, suitable for receiving four(4) single core 1 kV cable of size upto
600mm
2
per phase, for Incomer type panels.
ii) Three core single gland fabricated sheet steel cable boxes complete with gland and
armour clamp suitable for receiving one (1) single core 11kV cable upto 400mm
2

11kV XLPE cable per phase, for feeder type panels.
iii) The cable connection terminals shall be located at least 250mm from the CT
Primary terminal.
2.3.7 SCOPE OF SUPPLY FOR DISTRIBUTION SUBSTATIONS 11kV SWITCHGEAR BOARD.
The scope of supply for the Distribution Substation Switchgear boards is listed else
where in this tender document.
LABELLING OF THE SWITCHGEAR PANELS.
NB1. For each Switchgear Board the panels shall be assigned a distinct numerical
numbers for identification starting with number one (1) on the left hand side. The
number will be embedded on a stainless steel plate of width not less then 5 cm. The
size of the number shall be at least 3 cm high. The stainless steel plate shall be fixed
to the panel using stainless steel bolts.
NB2: For each switchgear board the panels shall be assigned a distinct Alpha-
Numeric name corresponding to the transformer or feeder to which it shall be
connected. The Alpha-Numeric name shall be embedded on a stainless steel
plate, of width not less than 5 cm. The size of the letters/number shall be at
least 2 cm high. The letters/numbers shall be of black colour on white
background. The stainless steel plate shall be fixed to the panel using stainless
steel bolts. The arrangement and names of the switchgear panels for various
switchgear boards shall be given after tender award.
2.4 RATINGS OF SWITCHGEAR EQUIPMENTS
a) 11kV Incomer, Bus-coupler and Feeder Circuit BreakerInterrupting Medium
Vacuum
Number of poles 3
Highest equipment Voltage 17.5kV
One minute power frequency withstand voltage 38 kV
Impulse withstand voltage (BIL) 95 kV
Frequency 50Hz
Rated short time current 31.5 kA


Rated short time marking current (peak) 79 kA
Rated short circuit current withstand 31.5 kA, 3seconds
First pole to clear factor 1.5
Operating sequence 0-0.3 sec-co-15 sec-co
Auxiliary D.C. voltage for closing and tripping coil 110V
Auxiliary a.c voltage 240V AC, 50Hz
Tripping/closing coil auxiliary voltage 110 V DC
Spring charging motor supply 240 V AC
Rated normal Current Incomers 1500 A
Rated normal Current Bus-coupler 1500 A
Rated normal Current Feeder 630 A
b) Current Transformer for Incomer, Bus-coupler and
Feeder Panels
Ratings:
Rated Short time current (STC) withstand : 31.5 kA for 3 seconds
Rated Voltage of the CT :17.5kV
One minute power frequency withstand voltage :38 kV
Impulse withstand voltage : 95 kV
Rated maximum continuous current:
Incomer : 1500 A
Bus-coupler : 1500 A
Feeder :630A
Ratio and Class:
i) 11 kV feeder panel
Core 1 : C.T. Ratio : 600/300/1 A
Class : 5P15
Core 2 : C.T Ratio : 600/300/1 A
Class : 0.5
Burden : 15 VA
ii) 11 kV Bus-coupler:
Core 1 : C.T. Ratio : 1500/1 A
Class : 5P15
Core 2 : C.T Ratio : 1500/1 A
Class : 0.5
Burden : 15 VA

iii) 11 kV Incomer panel:
Core 1 : C.T. Ratio : 1500/1 A (Turns Ratio)
Class : X
Imag : 0.02 A
Vk : 250 V

Core 2: C.T. Ratio : 1500/1 A (Turns Ratio)
Class : X
Imag : 0.02 A
Vk : 250 V
Core 3: C.T Ratio : 1500/1 A
Class : 5P15
VA : 15 VA

Core 4: C.T Ratio : 1500/1 A
Class : 5P15
VA : 15 VA


c) Voltage Transformers:
Rated Voltage of the CT : 17.5kV
One minute power frequency withstand voltage : 38 kV
Impulse withstand voltage : 95 kV
Ratio: Core 1, Core 2 : 11000/3 : 110/3V : 11/3V
VA : 150 VA
Class : 0.5 & 3P
NB: The rated VA of 150 VA is for three Phase unit. Incase three (3) single phase units
are supplied, the minimum acceptable burden for each is unit 50VA.
2.5 FACTORY ACCEPTENACE TESTS (FATs)
(see clause 1.10(e))
All the switchgear panels shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of IEC
60298
Tests shall be carried out on the circuit breaker as per the requirement of IEC 62271-
100.
Current transformers and Voltage transformers shall be tested in accordance with the
requirement of IEC 60044-1 and 6044-2 respectively.
The following tests shall be carried out during the FATs, by the manufacturer in
presence of the employers engineers.
1. Complete Switchgear Board
a) Dimensional Checks
b) Operational Tests
c) Primary Injection Tests
d) Calibration Tests on Relays and Instruments Power frequency Withstand Test
e) Megger Test
f) Contact resistance test for Primary joints
g) Lighting Impulse withstand test
h) Power frequency Withstand Test on Secondary Wiring
2. 17.5kV Circuit Breaker
Routine tests
a) Operation test
b) High Voltage tests, dry.
c) Voltage tests on controls and auxiliary circuits
d) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
Type Tests: Submit copies of Type test Reports and Certificate
e) Mechanical endurance test
f) Temperature rise test
g) Impulse voltage test
h) Interrupting Capacity
NB: Copies of Type Test Certificate for similar rated Circuit Breakers and Certified
by National Standards and Testing Authority body or Reputable Third Party Test
Laboratory shall be submitted with the Tender for Evaluation Purposes.
3) Current Transformer
Routine tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's plant as per the requirement of
IEC 60044-1, as listed below, in the presence of KPA Engineers.
i. Polarity test and verification of terminal markings test
ii. Ratio and phase angle error tests (accuracy class composite error test)


iii. Power frequency tests on primary and secondary windings
iv. Power frequency withstand tests between sections (windings)
v. Inter-turn over voltage tests
vi. Partial discharge measurement
Certificate and type test report for the following type test shall be provided during the
FATs:
i. Lightning, Impulse voltage withstand test
ii. Temperature rise test
iii. Short tine current test
iv. Determination of Errors test
v. Radio Interference voltage measurements (RIV)
4) Voltage Transformer

Routine tests shall be carried tout at the manufacturers plant during FATs as per the
requirements of IEC 60044-2, as listed below:-
(a) Polarity tests and verification of terminals
(b) Power frequency withstand tests on Primary windings
(c) Power frequency withstand tests on secondary windings
(d) Power frequency withstand tests between sections
(e) Determination of errors
(f) Partial discharges measurement
Certificates and type test report for the following type tests shall be provided during the
FATs:-
(a) Temperature rise test
(b) Lightning Impulse Test
(c) Determination of errors
(d) Short-circuit withstand test capability
(e) Measurement of the radio interference voltage (RIV)
5) Protection Relay Tests
a. Relay Pick-up test for all functions and phases
b Relay timing test for all functions and phases
c Directional characteristic test
d. In-zone and out of Zone tests for unit schemes
2.6 TRAINING AT THE MANUFACTURERS PLACE
During the FATs the manufacturer shall conduct complete training for the following
equipments for at least four (4) KPA Engineers: -
(a) Feeder Protection and Control relay
The Training shall include:-
(i) Theory on application of all the functions included in the relay
(ii)Complete configuration of the relay using software including creation and editing of
the switchgear Mimic
(iii) Relay parameter setting
(iv) Downloading and analysis of all the data including disturbance recording
(vi) Installation and testing
(vii) (vi) Trouble-shooting and repair
(viii) Complete testing of all the relay functions
The manufacturer shall plan adequate time for the training separate from the FATs. The
duration of the training shall however not be less than three (3) eight hour working days.
The employer may send a separate team from the team witnessing the FATs to attend the
training.


The Training shall be considered to have been successful once the engineers are able to
carry out all the above activities on their own. The manufacturer shall conduct
evaluation tests and give a feedback report on the training to the employer for each of
the engineers.
(b) 17.5 kV Circuit Breaker.
The Training shall include:-
(a) Functions of the Circuit breaker
(b) Installation checks and operational tests
(c) Inspections, repair and maintenance
The manufacturer shall plan adequate time for the training separate from the FATs. The
duration of the training shall be at least one (l) day. The engineers attending the FATs will
attend this training.
The training shall be conducted for Five (5) Engineers/Technicians. The duration of the
Training shall be at least two (2) days. The manufacturer shall arrange for the complete
training and pay for the venue and for meals and refreshments and any other associated
costs.
The training shall be considered to have been successful once the engineer / technicians
are able to carry out all the above activities on their own. The manufacturer shall conduct
evaluation tests and give a feedback report on the training to the employer for each of the
engineers/technicians.
2.8 PROTECTION RELAYS, CONTROLS AND MEASURING DEVICES REQUIREMENTS FOR
SWITCHGEAR PANELS:
2.8.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) The equipment for the control system shall be highly reliable, long-lived and
suitable for continuous operation.
(b) All instruments scales, coils, relay contacts and other features shall be suitable for
the apparatus controlled or the purpose intended.
(c) It shall be the manufacturers responsibility to properly design the electrical
control, protective relaying, alarm and indication schemes related to the 11 kV
switchgear panels.
(d) The manufacturer shall prepare arrangement and detailed drawings, equipment
lists and wiring diagrams based on the requirement of meters, relays, control
switches, indicating lamps and other devices including those to be supplied under
other subsections.
(e) Protection against electrical faults and abnormal conditions on 11 kV switchboard
and the outgoing 11 KV feeder shall be conducted by the protective relays and
associated switchgear.
2.8.2 ;BILL OF QUANTITIES
The items listed under the bill of materials shall be installed and connected
to form a complete and safe working system. Any components and
accessories required to form a complete safe and correct working system,
though not listed below shall be installed wired and connected by the
manufacturer and shall be deemed to have been included in the bid and
contract price.


2.8.2.1 FEEDER PANELS REQUIREMENTS
The feeder panel shall be equipped with the following protection relays, measuring and
indicating devices, control and other accessories.

i) Feeder protection and control relay. The relay must fully meet the requirements
of the detailed specifications included in these specifications.
ii) Trip circuit supervision relay visible from front of panel without having to open
any panel compartment door. The TCS Relay shall be offered as a separate relay
and NOT as a function of the feeder protection relay. Alternatively, the trip circuit
supervisory function may be included in the feeder protection and control relay
provided that it meets all the Requirements of the specifications
iii) A single power measurement unit shall be provided for each feeder panel to
capture instantaneous and maximum demand values for the following
parameters; I, kV, MW, MVAR and p.f
iv) Tariff Energy Meter
v) Current Transducer; output 0-20mA, for input current of 0 1 Amp
vi) Circuit breaker control switch (Close, Open &Neutral), with a mechanical Lock
vii) Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) mechanical ON/OFF switch, mounted on the panel
and indelibly marked.
viii) Circuit Breaker ON (red), OFF (green) and auto-trip (amber)indication lamps
ix) Anti-condensation heaters for the Circuit Breaker and the LV compartment
x) Hygrostat with separate humidity and temperature control setting to control the
heater.
xi) DC supply under voltage relay on the feeder panels at the two ends of the
switchgear board when assembled
xii) AC supply under voltage relay on the feeder panels at the two ends of the
switchgear board when assembled
xiii) Door switch operated lighting point and bulb
xiv) 3 Pin - square power socket outlet with red neon indicator
xv) Suitably rated MCBs for auxiliary 110V DC for control, 110V DC for Trip, 240
V AC for motor, 240 V AC for heaters and illumination and VT 110 V AC
supplies shall be fitted

2.8.2.2 BUS-COUPLER PANEL REQUIREMENTS
The Bus Coupler Panel shall be equipped with the following Protection Relays,
Measuring and indicating devices, Controls and other Accessories.
(i) Feeder protection and control relay. The relay must fully meet the
requirements of the detailed specifications included in these specifications.
(ii) Trip circuit supervision (TCS) relay visible from front of panel without having
to open any panel compartment door with Push Button and indicating lamp. .
The TCS shall be offered as a separate relay and NOT as a function of the
feeder protection relay. Alternatively, the trip circuit supervisory function may
be included in the feeder protection relay if can clearly be annunciated and
meets all the requirements and of the specifications.
(iii) Annunciator relay with at least 16 alarm windows for annunciations of all
protection trips and equipment defects and power supply failures for the
whole switchgear board and other equipments that will be connected to the
switchgear board at site.

The following alarms shall be connected to annuciator relay:-

(a) 110V DC supply fail urgent
(b) 240V AC supply fail urgent
(c) Incomer 1 Fault Trip urgent


(d) Incomer 2 Fault Trip urgent
(e) Bus-coupler Fault Trip urgent
(f) Feeder Fault Trip urgent
(g) Relay Fail urgent
(h) Trip Circuit Fail urgent
(i) Busbar Earth Switch 1 applied non-urgent
(j) Busbar Earth Switch 2 applied non-urgent
(k) VT change-over operated non-urgent
(l) Urgent Alarm
(m) Non-urgent alarm
The following alarms shall be engraved on the alarm windows and wired to the
terminal block for connection at site.
a) Battery Changer Failure - urgent
b) Local Supply change-over operated non-urgent
c) Fire Alarm urgent
All the alarms marked urgent will be connected to an urgent alarm out put relay.
All the alarms marked non-urgent will be connected to an non-urgent alarm out
put relay. One output contact from each relay will be connected to the Hooter, one
contact each will be connected to the annunciator window and one contact each
will be connected to the terminal block for external connection to SCADA.
iv) Hooter
v) Circuit breaker control switch (close, open & Neutral), with a mechanical lock
vi) Single power measurement unit shall be provided for each feeder panel to
capture instantaneous and maximum demand values for the following
parameters: I, kV, MW, MVAR and p.f.
vii) Current Transformer: output 0-20Ma, for input current of 0-1 Amp
viii) Circuit breaker ON (red) and OFF (green) indication lamps
ix) Heater ONOFF switch for anti-condensation heater
x) 11 kV board 110 V AC supply changeover circuit for energy metering.
NB: A scheme consisting of contactors shall be designed to ensure that energy
recording by energy meters is achieved at all times even when one of the 11kV
incomer circuits is isolated and hence the bus-coupler closed. The scheme
shall be designed so that under normal conditions, the feeder on each side of
the section shall be supplied by the VT from the corresponding 11kV incomer,
with the bus-coupler open. In case one 11kV incomer is switched off and the
bus-coupler closed the 11kV Feeder shall receive 110V AC for energy metering
from the remaining incomer. The scheme shall however not permit parallel
connection of the VTs on the secondary side. The scheme shall be subject to
approval by the employer.
xi) Anti-condensation heater
xii) Hygrostat with separate Humidity and Temperature control Setting.
xiii) DC supply under voltage relay
xiv) Door switch operated lighting point and bulb
xv) 3-Pin square power socket outlet with neon indicator
xvi) Suitably rated MCBs for auxiliary 110V DC for control, 110V DC for Trip, 240
V AC for motor, 240 V AC for heaters and illumination and VT 110 V AC
supplies shall be fitted.


2.8.2.3 INCOMER PANELS REQUIREMENTS
The Incomer Panel shall be equipped with the following Protection Relay,
Measuring and indicating devices, controls and other Accessories
(a) Feeder protection and control relay. They must fully meet the requirements of the
detailed specifications included in this specifications. Three phase over current and
each fault relay.
(b) Three phase directional over current and earth fault relay
(c) Trip relay with a push button for electrical reset
(d) Trip circuit supervision relay visible from front of panel without opening relay
compartment door. TCS shall be offered as a separate Relay and NOT as a function
of the feeder protection relay. Alternatively, the trip circuit supervisory function may
be included in the feeder protection relay if can cleared be annunciated and meets
the requirements of specifications.
(e) A single power measurement unit shall be provided for each feeder panel to capture
instantaneous and maximum demand values for the following parameters: I, kV, MV,
MVAR and p.f
(f) Tariff Energy Meter
(g) MW Transducer, 20 mA
(h) MVAr Transducer, 20 mA
(i) Current Transducer, 0-20 mA, for current input of 0-1Amp
(j) Voltage Transducer, 0-20 mA, for voltage input of 0-110V AC
(k) Circuit breaker control switch, (Close, Open & Neutral) with mechanical locking to
prevent in-intended operation.
(l) Circuit breaker status ON (red) and OFF (green) indication lamps
(m) Heater ON/OFF switch, for anti condensation heater
(n) Anti-condensation Heater
(o) Hygrostat with separate Humidity and Temperature control setting.
(p) DC Supply Under-voltage Relay
(q) AC Voltage Under-voltage Relay
(r) Door switch operated lighting point and bulb
(s) 3-Pin-square power pocket outlet with neon indicator
(t) Suitably rated MCBs for Auxiliary 110 V DC for control, 110V DC FOR Trip, 240 V AC
for motor, 240 V AC for heaters and illumination and VT 110 V AC supplies shall be
fitted.

2.8.3 PROTECTION RELAYS
2.8.3.1 REFERENCES
IEC 60255: Electrical Relays
2.8.3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) The electrical protective relay shall be of Numeric design
(b) Auxiliary relays, of Static or electromechanical design, with mechanical flag
indicators are acceptable.
(c) The protective relays and auxiliary relay shall operate successfully for any value
of the DC supply voltage between 85% and 125% of the rated voltage of 110 V DC
without exceeding the temperature rise limits for the operating coils.
(d) Each Measuring protection relay shall be of the panel flush mounted, back
connected type with rectangular case. Each relay shall have a removable
transparent cover or cover with a transparent window making the front of the


relay visible. It is preferred that each measuring relay shall be of a withdrawable
type from the front of the panel with sliding contacts, without opening the current
transformer secondary circuits, disturbing external circuits or requiring
disconnection of leads on the rear of the panels.
(e) Each protection relay shall be equipped with adequate electrically independent
contacts, of adequate rating for Trip and alarm functions. The relay shall also have
adequate number of LEDs to assign each of the available protection functions. The
number of LEDs shall not be less than eight (8).
(f) Test facilities for each AC current secondary circuit so as to provide access for
testing of the protective relay and its associated circuits. This shall be provided on
the terminal block and will consist of isolation links on the current transformer
and voltage transformer circuits and suitable terminals for insertion of test leads
banana terminals for injection of secondary current and voltage.
(g) Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one
point only in the control compartment's terminal block. The protection trip and
alarm circuit for each panel shall be provided with an isolation link to facilitate
isolation of the trip or alarm circuit for testing and trouble-shooting of the circuits.
(h) Relays contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents,
which they may be required to control in normal service. Where contacts of the
protective relays are unable to deal directly with the tripping currents, Auxiliary
Trip relays shall be provided. This will ensure safety for the protection relays
output contacts.
(i) Relays contacts shall make firmly without bounce and the whole of the relay
mechanism shall be as far as possible unaffected by vibration or external magnetic
fields.
(j) Relays shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels on the surface of the panel
describing their application in words e.g., "Three over-current & earth Fault relay"
in addition to the IEC numbering.
(k) To minimise the effects of electrolysis, relay coils operating on DC shall be so
connected that the coils are not continuously connected from the positive pole of
the battery.
(l) The relay thermal rating should be such that the fault current clearance times on
any combination of current and time multiplier setting shall not exceed the thermal
withstand capability of the relay (Maximum Fault current= 31.5 kA).
(m) The numerical relays will be equipped with an RS232 communication port to
facilitate connection to a Laptop computer for configuration and parameter setting.
Also a communication port shall be provided on each numerical relay for interface
into a substation control and monitoring system and for remote interrogation and
programming of the protection relays.
(n) The relays will also have a MMI with LCD screen and keypad to facilitate manual
relay programming and data access.
(o) Relay operation due to system fault, shall be indicated by a Red L.E.D, and the
fault details (flags) shall be displayed on the MMI. Both the relay fault flags and
red L.E.D shall be reset via reset push buttons without opening the relay cover.



2.9 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS FOR RELAYS, MEASURING AND INDICATING
INSTRUMENTS, CONTROL SWITCHES AND OTHER ACCESSORIES
These specifications indicate the required performance characteristics for each of
the Protection Relays and are in accordance with IEC 60255.
a) The Feeder Protection and Control Relay 1:
This relay shall be installed on the feeder and bus-coupler switchgear panels
and shall as a minimum meet the following requirements.
The Feeder protection and control relay shall be of numeric design
The Relay will have a large LCD screen measuring at least 7 cm x 7 cm
where a mimic of the switchgear arrangement and status of the
switchgear for the bay shall be displayed. The position of the circuit
breaker, i.e., racked-in or withdrawn shall be indicated. Circuit breaker
close and open key buttons with symbols and colour codes as per the
IEC standards shall be provided on the relay as well as switchgear
selection key. A local/remote key selector switch shall be provided on
the relay and the selected status of the selector switch indicated by
means of an LED.
The relay shall be equipped with a keypad for manual configuration and
parameter settings and for access of settings, fault and event records.
The relay offered shall have at least the following protection functions; -
three phase overcurrent and earth fault, sensitive earth fault, having
separate current transformer inputs to be connected to a core-balance
CT to be installed in the switchgear panels. Other protection functions
include; broken conductor protection, breaker failure protection, under and
over frequency as well as over and under voltage functions. All the protection
functions shall meet the requirements of each function as included in these
specifications.
The relay shall monitor, measure and display on the screen the following
parameters; I, V, P, Q and p.f. Also the circuit breaker wear shall be
monitored and stored. The relay shall store at least 20 fault records, 20
events and 6 oscillographic fault records.
It shall be possible to display instantaneous measurands on the screen
alongside the Bay Mimic.
The unit shall have a green L.E.D to indicate healthy status and a red L.E.D
to indicate operation (Trip) of the protection functions.
It shall be equipped with a red L.E.D indicator to indicate relay failure as well
as output contacts to signal relay failure.
The relay shall have at least eight (8) programmable LEDs for displaying
protection and other alarms.
The Relay terminals shall be screw type terminals large enough to
accommodate at least 4mm2 cable and shall be located at the back of the
Relay.
shall be Equipped with an RS232 serial port for connection to a laptop
computer for configuration and setting of relay and control functions and
also for access of the relay data. Also a communication port for connection to
local area network shall be provided. Seven (7) laptop to relay connection
cables shall be provided
Seven (7) sets of Installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance
manuals shall be provided.


Software for relay configuration, parameter settings and data download
shall be supplied in CD ROM with the switchgear boards. Seven (7)
copies (CD ROMs) of Software shall be supplied.
b) The Feeder Protection and Control Relay 2:
This relay shall be installed on the incomer switchgear panels and shall as a
minimum meet the following requirements.
The feeder protection and control relay shall be of numeric design
The relay will have a large LCD screen measuring at least 7cm x 7cm
where a mimic of the switchgear arrangement and status of the
switchgear for the bay shall be displayed. The position of the circuit
breaker, i.e., racked-in or withdrawn shall be indicated. Circuit Breaker
close and open key buttons with symbols and colour codes as per the IEC
standards shall be provided on the relay as well as switchgear selection
key. A local/remote key selector switch shall be provided on the relay and
the selected status of the selector switch indicated by means of an LED.
The relay offered shall have at least the following protection functions;-
three phase overcurrent and earth fault, directional three phase
overcurrent and earth fault relay, sensitive earth fault. Other protection
functions include; broken conductor protection, , breaker failure
protection, under and over frequency as well as over and under voltage
functions. All the protection functions shall meet the requirements of each
function as included in this specifications.
The Relay shall monitor, measure and display on the screen the following
parameters; I, V,P, Q and p.f.. Also the circuit breaker ware shall be
monitored and store. The relay shall store at least 20 fault records, 20
events and 6 oscillographic fault records.
It shall be possible to display instantaneous measurands on the screen
alongside the bay mimic.
The unit shall have a green L.E.D to indicate healthy status and a red
L.E.D to indicate operation (trip) of the protection functions.
It shall be equipped with a red L.E.D Indicator to indicate relay failure as s
well as output contacts to signal relay failure.
The relay shall have at least eight (8) programmable LEDs for displaying
protection and other alarms.
The relay terminals shall be screw type terminals large enough to
accommodate at least 4mm
2
cable and shall be located at the back of the
relay.
It shall be equipped with an RS232 serial port for connection to a laptop
computer for configuration and setting or relay and control functions and
also for access or the relay data.
The relay shall be equipped with a keypad for manual configuration and
parameter settings and for access of settings, fault and event records and
other data.
Software for relay configuration, parameter settings and data download shall
be supplied in CD ROM with the switchgear boards. Seven (7) copies (CD
ROMs) of Software shall be supplied.


NB: The Protection Functions Offered in the feeder protection and control
relay shall satisfy the detailed specifications for each of the functions,
detailed below:-

i. Three phase overcurrent and earth fault relay
Should incorporate the following features;
Relay must be of Numerical Design
Shall be suitable for mounting on the panel front.
Current setting range for overcurrent relay 0.51n-2.41n
Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.051n-0.81n
I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS142 or IEC255 i.e. SI,VI,EI,LTI,
including definite time for the high-set Elements.
Highset Element for both overcurrent and earth fault with.
Protection, with a setting range of 1-301n and a definite time delay setting
of Seconds.
Circuit breaker maintenance
Fault records and event records
Trip and start contacts shall be freely configurable to the output relays.

ii. Sensitive Earth Fault Relay
Should incorporate the following features
Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.010In 0.8In
Definite time delay characteristic: setting range, 0-30 Seconds
Fault records, event records and disturbance records
Drop off/pickup ratio >90%
iii. Three Phase Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay
Should incorporate the following features
Current setting range for overcurrent relay 0.5In 2.4In
Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.05In 0.8In
Quadrature connection for polarizing voltage
Applicable on the LV side of a Dyn1 transformer
High set Element, with a setting range of 1-32In
All stages of the phase and earth elements shall be freely assigned the
directional feature.
Shall have the ability to program the directional feature forward or
reverse for each setting stage.
I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS 142 or IEC 255 and define time
characteristic
The normal operating boundary shall be +/-90 degrees from relay
characteristic angle.
Relay sensitivity should be 1% of rated value of current and polarizing
voltage at an angle equal to the relay characteristic angle.
Time setting multiplier 0.05 1.0


High set element for both overcurrent and earth faults protection, with a
setting range of 1-20In.
Incorporate faults records, event records
Configurable output relays with ability to output starting elements to
control tripping of other upstream protection relays.
iv. Trip Relay
High burden tripping relay, immune to capacitance discharge current
and leakage current.
At least 7 pairs of output contacts two of which should be NC contacts
Instantaneous operation, t >15ms
Flag or target shall be a red L.E.D, durable bulb or red mechanical flag
The relay shall be suitable for flush mounting
The relay shall be electrically reset, the rest button shall be inbuilt on
the relay and accessible without opening the relay cover OR shall be
supplied separately for panel surface mounting.
Relay Terminals- shall be screw type terminals large enough to
2
cable and shall be located at the back of
relay.
Relay terminals shall be clearly marked
Relay contacts configuration shall preferably be drawn on the relay
casing

v. Trip Circuit Supervision Relay
The relay shall have the following features
Continuous supervision of trip circuit for circuit breaker in both OPEN &
CLOSED position
Trip circuit fail Red L.E.D or Flag\
Suitable for panel surface mounting: However if mounted inside the
control compartment, then the relay must be visible from the front.
Two (2) normally closed (NC) and two (2) normally open (NO) or 2 NO/NC
output contacts
Relay Terminals shall be screw type terminals large enough to
2
relay.
casing.

vi. Annunciator Relay Unit
Shall have Silence, Accept and Reset, push buttons, to control the
Alarms
Shall be equipped with at Least 16 separate alarm elements
Each of the elements shall be freely assigned to one of two common
output alarms; urgent and non-urgent alarm.
Each alarm element shall have a red L.E.D. to indicate ON status. It
shall also have provision for fixing of identification label changeable on
site. A flashing alarm element shall be clearly visible.
The urgent and non-urgent common alarms shall be freely configurable
to the output relays.
High immunity against electrical interference


Relay output for audible alarm and for self supervision shall be provided
Integrated events register to provide analysis of the latest sixteen (16)
events
Each of the elements shall be freely assigned to one or two common
output Alarms; Urgent and Non-urgent Alarms
Relay Terminals-shall be screw type terminals large enough to
accommodate a 2.5 mm
2
relay.
casing.
At least two output relays one for urgent and the other for non-urgent
alarm.
At least two (2) pairs of NO pair of output contacts for each output relay.

vii. Circuit breaker Close/Open control Switch
The switch shall have a mechanical interlock to prevent accidental
operation of the switch.
It shall have a close, neutral and open positions engraved on the switch,
black letters on white background. After an operation, the switch shall
return to the neutral position by spring action.
The terminals of the switch shall be screw type and shall be indelibly
marked.

viii. Transducers:
(a) MW Transducer
Connection shall be 3-Phase, 4-Wire
Inputs 110V AC and l Amp
Programmable output characteristic
Out put shall be 0 - 20 mA
Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC/DC.
The transducer terminals shall be of screw type, large enough to
accommodate 4 mm
2
cable and shall be indelibly marked.

(b) MVAr Transducer
Connection shall be 3-Phase 4-Wire
Inputs 110V AC and l Amp
Out put shall be 0 - 20 mA
Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC/DC
The transducer terminals shall be of screw type. Large enough
to accommodate 4mm
2
cable and shall be indelibly marked.
(c) Current Transducer
Input 0-1 Amp
Output 0 -20 mA
Transducer terminals shall be screw type, large enough to
accommodate 4mm
2
cable and indelibly marked.
(d) Voltage Transducer
Input 0-110 V AC
Output 0 -20 mA


Transducer terminals shall be screw type, large enough to
accommodate 4mm
2
NB: A single transducer units with all of the above listed functionality in one
casing is acceptable.

ix. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker:
Three phase unit with Auxiliary contact
Rated operating voltage, 400 V AC
Rated Insulation voltage 600V AC
Rated frequency 5O HZ
Setting value of Thermally delayed Overhead release, 3A
Auxiliary switch should have 1 NC & I NO contact.
Suitable for fixing on a DIN rail
Terminals suitable for connection of at least 4mm
2
cable
x. Signalling Hooter:

The actuator system shall consist of a strong, non polarized electromagnet
with an impact resistance sturdy casing.
Rated frequency 50 HZ.
Rated voltage shall be 240V AC; +6/-10 %
Protection degree shall be IP 55
Operating mode continuous
Volume approximately 108 dB(A) 1
1/
4
m
Hooter terminals shall be large enough to accommodate 4 mm
2
cable
and indelibly marked.
xi. Anti-condensation Heater:
The heater should be suitable for mounting inside the circuit breaker, the
cable and LV compartment.
The Heater for each compartment shall be adequately rated to preventing
condensation within the respective compartment.

xii. DC Supply under voltage Relay
Shall have a settable range for under-voltage pick ups, of 30-80% of
the rated DC voltage
Shall be of electromechanical or electronic design
Shall have an accuracy of < 4%
Shall be self reset when the voltage returns to normal level
Shall have a built in indication LED (green) and a built in operation
LED (red)
Shall have at least 2 NC auxiliary contacts (Contacts close for under
voltage conditions)
The relay shall be rated for continuous operation at the rated DC
voltage.
Shall be suitable for mounting on DIN rail
Relay terminals shall be screw type, large enough to accommodate
4mm
2

xiii. Indicating Lamps:
Shall be suitable for mounting on the front of the panel


The Lamp Indicators should be rated for 130V DC and equal or less
than 2.5W rating.
The lamp indicators should be designed for continuous operation
and give a long life of at least 10 years.
The bulb shall be easily replaceable without using a special tool.
The Lamp Indicators shall be of LED design
NB: LED Indicators are preferred

xiv. Power Measurement Unit:
This is a power monitoring meter for panel mounting
The unit shall be of numerical design
The unit shall have a large LCD display for displaying the measurements
The unit shall measure instantaneous values of; rms voltage, both phase
phase and phase to ground, currents, active reactive and apparent power,
energy, frequency, power factor and phase angle per phase.
The unit shall the following input rating, 1A and 110V AC phase to phase
The unit shall be for flush mounting on the front of the panel
The unit shall be for 3 phase, 4 wire connection on the secondary or
current and voltage transformers
The unit shall be equipped with an RS232 port for programming the unit to
ensure correct measurement and display of the parameters. The CT and VT
ratio shall be programmable.
The accuracy of measurement shall be at least class 1.0
It shall be possible to display all the measured parameters on the screen
through the pre-programmed display screen. The screen to be displayed
shall be selectable using the keys on the front of the unit.
The software and the PC to measurement unit connection cable shall be
supplied with the unit
\The LCD screen shall be large enough to accommodate at least three
measurands simultaneously
All the terminals shall be clearly marked
The measurement range for power shall at least be up to 30 MVA
The measurement unit terminals shall be screw type, large enough to
accommodate 4mm
2

2.10 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS FOR ENERGY METERS:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGH TENSION (HT) VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS (CT) CONNECTED STATIC METERS FOR ENERGY
METERING ON THE INCOMERS AND FEEDERS.

1 Scope
This specification is for newly manufactured High Voltage current
transformer connected static meters for measurement of alternating current
active energy in 50 HZ networks.

2 Requirements
2.1 Meters shall meet requirement of IEC 62052-11: 2003 and IEC 62053-
21:2003
2.2 Meters shall be suitable for operation in tropical climate where
temperature may vary from -1 to +45 degrees Celsius and Average
Annual Relative humidity reaching 90% and altitude of 0-1000m.


2.3 The meters shall be constructed as 3 phase 4-wire meters but may be
wired as 3 phase 4-wire or 3 phase 4-wire meters.
2.4 The meters shall have terminals with bottom entry for cables and the
arrangement shall be L1, V1, L1:L2V2L2:L3V3L3: N for 3 phase 4-wire
meters.
2.5 The meters shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 as given in
IEC 60529: 1989 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Amendment 1:1999.
2.6 The meters terminal hole and screws shall be made of brass or nickel-
plated brass for high strength and high conductivity. Terminal hole
shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the cables of at least 6mm
diameter.
2.7 The meters shall have LED indicators for testing and indication of KWh
and kVArh meter operation.
2.8 The meter shall be equipped with auxiliary terminals for inputs and
outputs.
2.9 The meters shall have a real-time clock controlled by a quartz crystal
oscillator and a back up power supply to run the calendar clock for a
minimum of 1 year without mains voltage.
2.10 The meters shall have a non-volatile memory capable of data
storage.
2.11 The meters shall be capable of storing load profile for at least 180
days on four channels with 20 minutes integration for the following
parameters namely Import watts, Export watts, Export VA. Import VA,
4-quadrant Reactive energy Q1,Q2,Q3 and Q4, Phase voltage. Phase
currents and Power factor.
2.12 The meters shall be capable of measuring the following
parameters: Active, reactive and apparent energy and demand in export
and import modes; Maximum demand in kVA and kW: Four quadrant
power measurement: Multi-tariff metering: Accurate measurement for
incorrect phase sequence; and Instrumentation data (V, I, Pf, Phase
angles, Power etc)
2.13 Additional operational and security features of meter: Meter
sealing provisions; meter software with enhanced access level; Logging of
loss of voltage, over-current, over-voltage, date of last programming; at
least 6 and 6 registers for energy and demand respectively;
Programmable billing dates; Non resettable billing registers and a
minimum of 12 months; LCD with 5 digit ID codes that are EDIS
compliant; No mains supply reading facility: RS 485 and optical ports for
communication; Primary metering for Demand and Energy.
2.14 Meters rating: 3 x 63.5/110 V, 3 x 1 A and at 50 Hz
2.15 Meter type and other test: Meters to pass tests on Power
consumption, Influence of short-time over-current, Influence of self-
heating, AC voltage test, Limits of errors due to variation of the current,
Limits of error due to influence quantities, Test of starting and no-load
condition and EMC tests.
2.16 Name plate marking requirements: Each meter market legibly
and indelibly in English with the following information: Name or trade
mark of the Manufacturer, Country of origin, Type/model, meter
number up to ten digits, in inscription Property of Kenya Port Authority
(KPA), Standard(s) to which the meter complies and Year of
manufacture.


2.17 Warranty requirements: 18 months from date of supply of meters

2.18 Schedule of Technical data

Standard and type tests
General requirements, tests
and test
IEC 62052-11:2003
Particular requirements for
static meters for active
energy
IEC 62053-21:2003
Power consumption and
voltage
IEC 62053-21:2003
Shock test IEC 62052-11:2003
Plastic-determination of
temperature
IEC 62052-11:2003
Degree of protection IP51
Measurement Base Active / Reactive energy,
3 element, 4 quadrant
Network type 3phase 3 or 3 phase 4-
wire
Connection type VT and CT connected
Accuracy kWh class 1.0 kVArh class
2
Humidity: Reaching 90%
Altitude Up to 2,200m
Temperature range
(operating)
-1 to+45 C
Voltage measurement (Uri) 3x 63.5/110 V 50Hz, 3
or 4 wire
Voltage range 0.8 U, to 1.15 U,
Voltage circuit burden 5 2 W and 10 VA
Burst test 4 kV
Impulse voltage 6 KV, 1.2/50 us
Current measurement I =1 A; I,,,, > 6 A
Short circuit current 20 Imax for 0.5 s
Starting current 0.001 L
Current circuit burden < 1 VA
LCD 7 Measurement and 5 ID
(EDIS) digits
Load profile _ 180 day-4-channel
capacity at 20 minute
Dielectric strength 4 kV, 50 Hz., 1 min.


A. TECHNICAL SCHEDULES FOR 11kV SWITCHGEAR, CONTROL, PROTECTION
AND COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

Technical Schedules for 11kV switchgear control, protection and
communications equipment

The Tenderer shall after reading through the Technical Specifications and the
Tender Documents in general complete the technical schedules below, which also
constitute the guaranteed technical particulars. The completed schedules shall
accompany the bid. Attach manufacturer's profile, catalogues and manuals to
verify details entered in the schedule.
Schedule A SWITCHGEAR BOARD

DESCRIPTION
KENYA PORT
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
value or Yes or No
as appropriate}

Manufacturer's name Indicate
Manufacturer's letter of
Authorization.
Provide
copy

Copy of ISO 9001/2 certificate. Provide
copy

Type or designation number of
Switchgear offered and applicable
standard.

Manufacturer's experience in
Manufacturing same type of
Switchgear panels.
At least 7
Years

Manufacturing similar type of
Switchgear panels
15 years
No. of units sold in the last 5 years. > 400
No. of units sold in the export
market [attach list] in the last 5
years [attach export list]
> 200
Enclosure [IP] class of protection
[attach type test certificate]for the
offered panel type
IP41
Arc proof design [attach type test
certificate] for offered panel type
Yes
Rated voltage 17.5KV
Rated power frequency withstand
[attach routine test report] offered
panel type
38KV
Rated lighting impulse withstand
[attach type test
report] for the offered panel type
95 KVp
Metal clad compartments [CB],
Busbar, LV, CT, Cable] attach
layout -drawing for the offered
panel type
5
Busbar material copper


Dimensions [WxHxD [attach layout
drawing]
provide
Short circuit withstands. 31.5KA, 3sec
Arc Proof design for entire
switchgear board
Yes
ARC venting Yes
Lockable door with viewing glass in
CB compartments.
Yes
Lockable door for LV compartment
Earth switch rating on making and
withstand
31.5KA, 3 sec
Earth switch position visible from
front
Provide
Shutters for Busbars [red] and
circuit [yellow] provided.
Provide
Provision to safely open the
shutters for phasing out provided
Provide
Anti condensation heater Provide
Hygrostat with variable Humidity
and temperature control setting
Provide
Busbar rating 2000A

Circuit rating - Incomer 1500A

Circuit rating - Feeder 630A
Integral Feeder earth switch Provide
Horizontal or vertical Isolation and
withdraw of circuit Breaker
State
Live cable indicator Provide
Interlock between Incomer live cable
and Earth switch
Provide
Integral Busbar earth switch Provide
Separate locking of Busbar and
circuit shutters
Provide
Earth switch operating handle
cannot be inserted in to operate
position when CB is in circuit
position
Yes
Switchgear panel width 800 mm
Switchgear panel depth 800 mm
Length(Height) of LV Compartment 650 mm
Detailed catalogue and manual for
the switchgear panels with detailed
design drawings
Provide
Dimensioned Layout drawing for
the complete switchgear board,
including the Arc venting channel
Provide
Single line drawing(SLD)for the
complete switchgear board
Provide
Routing test report for similar panel
as per IEC 298?
Provide


Schedule B 12kV CIRCUIT BREAKER
DESCRIPTION KENYA PORT
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE
{Enter value or
Yes or No as
appropriate}

Manufacturer's letter
of
Authorization.
Provide
copy

copy

Type or designation number
of circuit breaker offered

Applicable standard for
manufactures and testing
state
Circuit breaker.
At least 7
Years

Manufacturing similar type circuit
breaker [MV indoor circuit breaker]
A least 15
years

No. of units sold in the last 5 years. 1000
Units sold in to export market in
the last 5 years
500
Type of interrupter employed Vacuum
Name of manufacturer of vacuum
interrupter

Provide
Manufactures experience in
manufacturing vacuum interrupters
15 years
Rated circuit breaker voltage 17.5 kV
1 minute power frequency
withstand [attach test report]
38 kV
Impulse withstand voltage [attach
test report]
95 kV
Rated short circuit current and
withstand [attach type test report]
31.5 kA, 3 sec
Rated short time making current
peak [attach type test report]
63 kA or 79 kA
Circuit breaker operating sequence
[attach type test report]
0-0.3 sec-co-3 min-
co

Motor wound spring operated
mechanism

Auxiliary DC voltage for closing and
tripping coils
110 V DC
Trip-free mechanism State
Anti-pumping feature Provide
Auxiliary AC supply 240 VAC
CB mechanism Motor wound
spring

Visible spring charges/discharged
mechanical indication on CB as per
specifications.
Provide


Visible CB ON/OFF indications as
per specifications
Provide
Connection of CB to auxiliary panel
circuits via a plug-in cable
Yes
Operation counter Provide
CB close and open mechanical
push
Provide
Button on CB
CB isolation Vertical /
Horizontal

CB withdrawal Horizontal
CB lowering trolley provided [for
horizontal withdrawal] suitable for
use by one switching operator
provide
CB withdrawal not possible when
CB is closed
Yes
CB cannot be drawn-in until the
earth switch is open and auxiliary
circuit connected [powered]
Yes
Earth switch cannot be closed
when the CB is in circuit position
or in transit
Yes
CB cannot close when in transit
Circuit breaker is equipped with anti
pumping device

CB routine test report as per IEC
62271-100
Provide
CB rating for incomer and bus-
section
1500A
CB rating for feeder 630A
Circuit breaker poles between the
interrupters and the primary plug in
contacts-insulated.
Yes



Schedule C CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE
{Enter value
or Yes or No
as
appropriate}

Authorization.
Provide
copy

copy

Type or designation number of CT
Applicable standard state
Manufacturer's experiencein
CTs
At least 7
Years

Manufacturer's experiencein
Manufacturing similar type CTs
[MV indoor type]
15 years
No. of units sold in the last 5 years. 600
the last 5 years
300
Rated circuit breaker voltage 17.5 kV
withstand [attach test report]
38 kV
Impulse withstand voltage [attach
a copy test report]
95 kVp
Short -circuit withstand current
duration [attach copy of type test
report]
31.5 kA, 3 sec
Feeder CT details
Raito 600/300/1A Yes
Core 1 15VA,5P15 Yes
Core 2 15VA,cl 0.5 Yes
Incomer CT details
Ratio 1500/1A Provide
Core 1 : clx; VR250V;Ie0.02A Provide
Core 2 : clx; VR250v;Ie0.02A Provide
Core 3 : 15VA,5P15 Provide
Core 4 : 15VA cl 0.5
Bus coupler CT details
Ratio : 1500/1A Provide
Core 1 : 15VA, 5P15 Provide
Core 2 : 15VA, cl 0.5 Provide
Routine test certificates of similar
CTs as those listed in 14, 15 and
16 above. NB: the classes must
be the same as per IEC 60044-1
Provide
Provide manufacturers CT
catalogue



Schedule D VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter value
or Yes or No as
appropriate}

Authorization.
Provide
copy

copy

Type or designation number of VT
VTs
At least
7 Years

Manufacturing MV, indoor VTs
15
years

No. of units sold in the last 5
years.
500
the last 5 years
200
Rated voltage of offered VT 17.5 kV
withstand voltage [attach
routine test report]
38 kV
Impulse voltage withstand
voltage [attach a copy test
report]
95 kV
Feeder VT details
Raito : 11KV/3; 110/3;
110/3 VAC
Provide
Core 1 : 100VA, cl 0.5 Provide
Core 2 : 50VA, cl 3p Provide
Primary fuses Provide
Secondary fuses Provide
Copies of routine test reports for
VT of similar voltage rating as
per IEC 60044-2
Provide
Manufacturers catalogue Provide


Schedule E PROTECTION RELAYS AND AUXILIARY
RELAYS
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
value or Yes or No as
appropriate}

Authorization.
Provide copy
Copy of ISO 9001/2
certificate of manufacturer.
Provide copy
Manufacturing protection
and auxiliary relays
15 Years
Total No. of measuring
relays sold in the last 5
years
5000
Experience in manufacture
of numerical protection
relays.
10 years
Number of numerical
protection relays sold in the
last 5 years
5000
Number of numerical relays
sold to the Export Market in
the last 5 years. NB: Attach
manufacturers export sales
list.
2000
FEEDER PROTECTON AND CONTROL RELAY
Relay shall be of Numeric
Design
state
Relay designed for Bay
Protection & Control
State
Size of Relay LCD screen State
For flush mounting on
panel surface
Provide
Relay is equipped with
Circuit Breaker close and
open key/push buttons

Relay has the following
protection functions:

Three phase over current Provide
Earth fault function Provide
Sensitive earth fault
function
Provide
Broken Conductor
function
Provide


Auto-reclose function Provide
Circuit breaker
maintenance function
Provide
Measurement and display
of instantaneous values of
I, V, P, Q and p.f on the
LCD
State
Trip Indication Via Red LED
Healthy Indication via
Green LED

Relay has eight LEDs for
Annunciation

Start and Trip output
contracts are freely
configurable

Relay terminals are screw
type and adequate to
accommodate 4mm
2
cable

Fault Records storage
capacity
State
Events storage capacity State
Disturbance Record storage
capacity
State
MMI with keypad and LCD Provide
Serial RSS232 port Provide
Communication Port for
connection to Local
Network

Software to be provided:
Seven Copies of software in
CD ROM required
State name of
software

Relay is equipped with IEC
61850 communication
State
Seven (7) connection cables
from relay to laptop
Provide
Seven (7) Detailed
publication / operation and
instruction manual
attached to verify all the
specifications
Provide


Schedule F THREE PHASE OVER CURRENT AND EARTH
FAULT RELAY
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
appropriate}

One tine delay element and
two high set elements
state
Setting range and step for
IDMT element for both
current and Time Multiplier
Setting
state
Selectable Current/Time
curves for IDMT element.
State
Broken conductor
protection
Provide

Schedule F.1 EARTH FAULT RELAY
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
value or Yes or No
as appropriate}

One time delay element and two
high set elements
state
Setting range and step for IDMT
element for both current and Time
Multiplier Setting
state
Selectable Current/Time curves for
IDMT element.
Numeric
Setting range and step for high set
elements for both current and time
delay
State

Schedule F.2 SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT FUNCTION
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
appropriate}

Current setting range State
Time delay. state



Schedule F.3 THREE-PHASE DIRECTIONAL
OVERCURRENT
AND EARTH FAULT RELAY
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
appropriate}

Current setting range for
over current element
state
Current setting range for
earth fault element.
state
Quadrature connection of
polarizing voltage
State
Directional feature freely
assigned to Over current
and Earth faults elements
State
Directional element voltage
sensitivity
State
Circuit breaker
maintenance
Provide
One time delayed element
and two high set elements.
Provide

Schedule G TRIP RELAY
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
appropriate}

Manufacturers name state
Type or designation name state
Electrical reset Provide
High burden relay State
Operating time State
Contracts configuration State



Schedule I ANNUNCIATOR RELAY UNIT
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
value or Yes or No
as appropriate}

Number of alarm elements state
Each alarm has RED LED
for visual indication
Provide
Has silence, accept and rest
push buttons
State
Alarms freely assigned to
urgent or non-urgent bus-
wires
State

Schedule J CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSE/OPEN SWITCH
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
value or Yes or No
as appropriate}

Mechanical interlock Provide
Close and open position
marked on the switch
State

Schedule H TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISORY RELAY
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS
DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
appropriate}

Supervision for CB open
and closed status
State
Contracts configuration State



Schedule K TRANSDUCERS
AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter
appropriate}

Connection 3 phase 4 wire Provide
Input and output range State
Programmable output
characteristic
State

MVAR TRANSDUCERS
Connection 3 phase 4 wire Provide
Programmable output
characteristic
State

CURRENT TRANSDUCER

VOLTAGE TRANSDUCER

DESCRIPTION KENYA PORT AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT
SUPPLIERS DETAILS/
RESPONSE {Enter value
or Yes or No as
appropriate}

Schedule L HOOTER, HEATER & INDICATING
LAMPS
HOOTER
Auxiliary Supply 240 V AC
supply
state

ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER
Duty continuous operation state



INDICATING LAMPS AND HOLDERS
Rating 2.5W
Duty Continuous
Duration of service 10 years

Schedule M POWER MEASUREMENT UNIT
Type or designation name of
the unit
state
Unit suitable for flush
mounting

Complete order number of
offered unit
State
Parameters measured State
Class of accuracy of
measurement
State
Configuration of the unit (3
phase + 4 wire)
State

NOTE:
The Bidders should note that the above Technical schedules must be
fully completed and submitted with the bid. Failure to complete the
schedules shall lead to rejection of the bid. Each entry in the
schedule in compliance with the specifications shall constitute
marks as shown in the bidders evaluation sheet. The maximum
possible score shall be 28% and the lowest possible score shall be
0%.
Note: This schedule does not in any way substitute for details
information required elsewhere in the specification.
NB: The Bidder should read through the document thoroughly and
submit with the bid all the required test certificates, manuals and
drawings, etc.


B. TECHNICAL SCHEDULES FOR 132KV SWITCHGEAR, CONTROL,
PROTECTION AND COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
The Tenderer shall after reading through the Technical Specifications and
the Tender Documents in general complete the technical schedules below,
which also constitute the guaranteed technical particulars. The
completed schedules shall accompany the bid. Attach manufacturer's
profile, catalogues and manuals to verify details entered in the schedule.


Technical Schedules for 132 kV switchgear, control, protection and
communications equipment.
SCHEDULE -1a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR
OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR 132 kV

ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT GUARANTEED
FIGURE
TOLERAN
CE
A1 Circuit Breaker (Type__________)

Breaking Medium SF6/Vacu
um

Manufacture
- Rated voltage

kV
- Maximum service voltage kV

- Rated frequency Hz

- Rated Continuous current A

- One minute power frequency
withstand voltage, dry and wet

(a) To earth kV rms

(b) Across open breaker pole kV rms

- Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50
ms

(a) To earth kV peak

(b) Across open breaker
- Breaking capacity at rated voltage
(a) symmetrical kA rms

(b) asymmetrical kA rms

- Making capacity kA peak

- Breaking capacity of capacitive
current
A

- Overvoltage factor for
disconnection of unloaded
transformers (without voltage
limitation by lighting arresters)

- Rated inductive current switching
capacity

A
- Permissible 1 second short-tine
current
kA rms



OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

132 kV

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT GUARANTEED
FIGURE
TOLERAN
CE
Circuit breaker continued
- Dynamic short-time current kA peak

- Opening time, interval of
time between the instant of
application of tripping
impulse to the instant when
the main contacts have
separated in all poles
m.sec
- Total break time, interval of
between the instant of
application of tripping
impulse to the instant of final
arc extinction in all poles.

(a) At 100% breaking capacity m.sec

(b) Under phase opposition m.sec

- Rate of rise of recovery
voltage (RRRV) at 100% short
circuit current.
-

(a) 3-phase kV/msec

(b) 1-phase kV/msec

- RRRV out of phase duty kV/msec

- Minimum temperature rise at
rated current of main
contract

0
C
A2 Current Transformers

Manufacturer

- Rated voltage kV


- Rate frequency Hz

- One-minute power frequency
test voltage of

(a) Primary winding kV rms

(b) Secondary winding kV rms

- Lighting impulse withstand
voltage
kV peak
-



OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

132 kV
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT GUARANTEED
FIGURE
TOLERANCE

- Rated primary currents A

- Rated secondary current A

- Short-time thermal rating
(a) 1 second kA rms

- Short time dynamic rating kA peak

- Burden and accuracy class of
(a) Measuring core
(b) Protection core
- Instrument security factor of the
measuring core

- Accuracy limit factor of the
(a) Protection core

A3 Voltage Transformers, (Type
_____________)

Manufacturer
- Rated voltage kV

- Maximum service voltage kV rms

- Rate frequency Hz

- One-minute power frequency test
voltage of

(a) Primary winding kV rms

(b) Secondary winding kV rms

- Lighting impulse withstand voltage kV peak

- Burden and accuracy class of
(a) Measuring winding protection
winding

- Ratio kV

A4 Country of manufacture
- Cubicles

- Circuit breaker

- Voltage transformers



SCHEDULE 1a: TECHNICAL GURANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR 132 KV
ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT GUARANTEED.
FIGURE
TOLERANCE
A5 Disconnector (Type ________)

Manufacturer (state)
Applicable Standards (state)
Breaking Medium Air
- Rated voltage kV
- Rated Frequency Hz
- Rated Continuous current Amps
- Contact Resistance (state)
- Max temperature rise under rated
voltage and current
(state)

- Rated power frequency withstand
voltage

(a) To earth kV
(b) Across open contacts kV
- Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50
ms

(a) To earth kV peak
- Breaking capacity at rated voltage
(a) symmetrical kA rms
Current density kA rms
- Moving Blade A/sq.mm
- Terminal Pad A/sq.mm
- Contacts A/sq.mm
- Terminal connector A/sq.mm
Breaking capacity of capacitive
current
(state)

capacity
(state)

capacity
(state)

- Permissible 1 second short-time
current
kA rms

- Dynamic short-time current kA peak
- Auxiliary Supplies
DC V
AC V
- No of spare auxiliary contacts
Disconnector
Earthing switched


SHEDULE 1a: TECHNICIAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR 132 kV
ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT GUARANTEED
FIGURE

Disconnector (Type___________)
continued

- Auxiliary contacts current rating Amps
- Motor rating Amps
- Level of galvanization
Padlocking facility in both open and
closed position
(state)
- Tolerance (DC)
- Degree of Protection for Control
Box

- Thickness of sliver coating
- Creepage distance mm
- Operation
Local (manual)
Local ( motorized)
Remote (motorized)
- Interlocking with breaker
(electrical / mechanical)
(state)
- Interlocking with earth switch
(Mechanical)
(state)
- Position indication on control box (state)
Clearances
- Between phase mm
- Between phase and ground Mm
Type of break (state)
Any special assembly tool (state)


SHEDULE -1b INFORMATVE DATA OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR
ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT DATA TOLERANCE
Circuit Breaker
B1 - Reference standard
- Type of breaker and designation
- Voltage drop across main contacts
at rated current
mV
- Type of main contact mm
- Type of arc control device m/s
- Method of closing
- Method of tripping
- Max. percentage of recovery voltage
across any break
%
- Minimum clearance between live
parts and earth, in SF6 or vacuum
Mm
- Min distance between phases
- Number of opening operations
Permissible before
inspection and
maintenance of contacts,
gas treatment etc.

At rated current
At maximum short circuit
current

For SF6 breakers
- Normal gas density for SF6 circuit
breaker (represented by gas
pressure)

At 20
0
C Bar
At 40
0
C Bar
- Minimum gas density for safe
operation

At 20
0
C Bar
AT 40
0
C Bar
- Quantity of gas required per 3-pole
breaker
Kg
- Operating pressure of relief device Bar
- Method of monitoring pressure and
temperature compensation

- Max. permissible dew point
temperature
0
C
- Max. permissible acidity level
- Max. permissible leak rate %/year
For vacuum breakers
- Vacuum in break chamber torr
- Max. permissible leak rate %


SCHEDULE 1b : INFORMATIVE DATA OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR
Circuit Breaker (Continued)
For all breakers
- Control voltage V DC
- Type of operating device
Motor voltage
AC of DC
Max. permissible service
voltage
V
(a) Min. service voltage V
- Starting current of motor
- Power consumption of motor
When starting W
When running W
- Power consumption of
Closing coil W
Trip coil W
Heater W
- Auxiliary switch
Rupturing current at 110 V
DC
A
Number of free NO contact
Number of free NO contact
Test voltage 50Hz, 1 min. V
Manufacturers of
- Support insulators
- Breakers insulators
- Operating mechanism
NOTE
- Indication to the characteristics
listed above, the following
information shall be given for all
switchgear:-

Layout and overall
dimensions drawings

descriptions
B2 Earthing Switches
- Reference standard
- Type of isolating switch
- Min creepage distance (live part to
earth)
mm
- Min. isolating distance (clearance
between open contacts)
mm
- Materials of contract surface
- Total contact pressure
- Type of operating device
- Weight of earthing switch


SCHEDULE -1b INFORMATIVE DATA, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR
ITEM PRARTICULAR UNIT DATA TOLERANCE
B3 Current Transformers
- Type designation
- Overall dimensions
- Total weight of one current
transformer
kg
- Type of insulation

B4 Voltage Transformers
- Type designation
- Overall dimensions
- Total weight of one current
transformer
kg
- Type of insulation


SCHEDULE -2a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, CONTROL SYSTEM
SUB-STATION CONTROL SYSTEM (SCS)
ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT GUARANTED
FIGURE
a.1 Control system response and update time
under moderate load conditions

The control system shall be designed to yield the
following response and update time under
moderate load conditions:-

- Time taken to complete refresh data held
with the SCS:

(a) Maximum
(b) Average
s
s
- Time taken to carry out a complete status
check of all indications and alarms

(a) Maximum s
(b) Average s
- The time between selection and display of
a VDU diagram fully updated from the
existing main computer data base shall
not exceed
s
- The time between selection of a control
function and check back shall not exceed
s
- The time between execution of a control
function and successful completion being
displayed at the Operation Workshop shall
not exceed for

(a) Circuit breaker (operating time = 250 ms) s
(b) Isolator (operating time=10s) s
- The time between the occurrence of the
first change of state/alarm and display at
the Operators Workstation shall not
exceed
s
- The time between selecting display of
analogue measurements and the
corresponding value in the database being
displayed shall not exceed
s
- The time between successive updates of
the data base with analogue
measurements shall not exceed
s
(a) Network MW measurements s
(b) Other analogue measurements s
a.2 Equipment Reliability
Mean time between failure shall be not less that:
- Each computer h
- VDC h
- Logging printer h
- System console h
- Communication system h



SCHEDULE 2b INFORMATION DATA, CONTROL SYSTEM

ITEM DESPRIPTION UNIT DATA
b.1 General System Considerations
- Soft ware
Package
Which RTU communication
protocols are supported

- Real-time database
Package
Is an SOL interface supported
- Database Management Tool
Package
State type of man-machine
interface software

b.2 Operator Workstation
- Reference standards
- Type designation
- Weight kg
- Mounting arrangement
VDU
- Type designation
- Diagonal screen size mm
- Usable display area Max.mm
Weight kg
Alphanumeric Keyboard
- Type designation


SCHEDULE 3a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, PROTECTION ETC
CONTROL, PROTECTION, METERING, SIGNALLING
ITEM PARTICULARS UNIT GUARANTED
FIGURE
TOLERANCE
a.1 Indicating Instruments
- To be filled in for each AC and DC
Ampere meter and Voltmeter and for
each Wattmeter, VAr-meter,
Frequency-meter and other indicating
instruments :-

- Instrument for:
- (A,V (AV), V (DC), W, etc
Error %
Max. admissible current %.1N
Max. admissible voltage %1N
a.2 Meters
- To be filled in for each meter
- Meter for (MWh, MVArch:
Error with 5% load %
Max. admissible current %1N
a.3 Metering Converters (Transducers)
- Converter for (MW, MVAr, A, etc:
Error %
Linearity %
Max. admissible current continuously %1N
Max. admissible voltage for 0.5
seconds
%1N
Max. admissible current continuously %1N
a.4(a) Protection Relays
- To be copied and filled in for each type
of relay as applicable.

Relay for ___________________________
- Accuracy of the adjustable tripping
time
sec
- Min. possible tripping time ms
- Drop out ratio %
- Directional sensitivity (dist, relay only) %.UN
- Max. admissible current during 0.5
sec
%1N
- Max admissible current continuously %1N
- Relation between tripping coil current
and holding coil current (diff. relay
only)
%
- Limit value of the adjustable tripping
current (O.C.R.)
%1N
- Limit value of the instantaneous
tripping current (O.C.R.)
%1N


SCHEDULE 3a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, PROTECTION ETC
ITEM PARTICULARS UNIT GUARANTEED
FIGURE
TOLERANCE
voltage (O.C.R.)
%1N
tripping voltage (O.C.R)
%1N
a.4(b) Protection Relays
- To be copied and filled in for each type
of relay as applicable.

Relay for
- Accuracy of the adjustable tripping
time
sec
- Min. possible tripping time ms
- Drop out ratio %
- Directional sensitivity (dist, relay only) %.UN
- Max. admissible current during 0.5
sec
%1N
- Max admissible current continuously %1N
- Relation between tripping coil current
and holding coil current (diff. relay
only)
%
current (O.C.R.)
%1N
tripping current (O.C.R.)
%1N
voltage (O.C.R.)
%1N
tripping voltage (O.C.R)
%1N
a.5 Auxiliary Circuit Breaker
- To be filled in for each type of AC and
DC breaker:

Min. operating voltage %UN
Max. operating voltage %UN
Drop out voltage V
Service life (min, number of contact
operation)

a.6 Manufacturers Name
- Control room boards
- Local relay boards
- Protection relays
- Auxiliary contactors
a.7 Country of Manufacture
- Control room boards
- Local relay boards
- Protection relays
- Auxiliary contactors



SCHEDULE 3b INFORMATION DATA, PROTECTION ETC
ITEM PARTICULARS UNIT DATA TOLETRANCE
b.1 Indicating Instruments
To be filled in for each type of
instrument:

- Type (moving coil, iron type, etc.)
- Consumption of internal
resistance
VA/ohm
- Size mm
b.2 Meters
To be filled in for each type of meter
- Type
- Consumption of internal
resistance
VA/ohm
- Size mm
b.3 Metering Converters (Transducers)
To be filled in for each type for converter
- Type
- Consumption current VA
- Consumption, voltage VA
- Time constant Ms
- Size mm
b.4 Alarm Annunciators
- Type
- Number of annunicators
- Size of each annunicator (areas of
the cap)
mm
- Total size of panel mm
b.5 Control Room Board
- Height mm
- Width mm
- Length mm
- Relay board
Height
width
Length


SHEDULE 3b INFORMATIVE DATA, PROTECTION ETC
ITEM PARTICULARS UNIT DATA TOLETRANCE
b.6a Protection Relays
To be copied and filled in for each relay
with the applicable items of the data
below:

Relay for ________________________
- Consumption VA
- Limit values of the adjustable
tripping time
Sec
- Limit values of adjustable
sensitivity
%
operating quantity (current,
voltage, frequency, etc.) in %
normal
%
- Limit values of the instantaneous
operating quintet in % of nominal
value
%
- Size mm
For distance relay only:-
- Starting impendence adjustable
between
ohm/ph
- Earth fault tripping current
adjustable between
x.1N
b.6b Protection Relays
To be copied and filled in for each relay
with the applicable items of the data
below:

Relay for ________________________
- Consumption VA
- Limit values of the adjustable
tripping time
Sec
sensitivity
%
operating quantity (current,
voltage, frequency, etc.) in %
normal
%
- Limit values of the instantaneous
operating quintet in % of nominal
value
%
- Size mm
For distance relay only:-
- Starting impendence adjustable
between
ohm/ph
- Earth fault tripping current
adjustable between
x.1N


SCHEDULE 4a INFORMATION DATA, CABLES
POWER CABLES, CONTROL CABLES, CABLE RACKS

a.1 Low Voltage Cables
- Conductor material
- Insulation material
- Armouring/screen
- Protective coating
- Overall diameter of cable of biggest
cable
mm
- Weight of heaviest reek, including
cable
kg
- Size of biggest reel,
diameter/width
mm/mm
a.2 Control and Measuring Cables
- Conductor material
- Armouring/screen
cable
mm
- Weight of heaviest reel, including
cable
kg
diameter/width
mm/mm
a.3 Special Cables
To be used for:
- Relevant informative data



SCHEDULE 4a INFORMATION DATA, CABLES
POWER CABLES, CONTROL CABLES, CABLE RACKS
11 KV Voltage Cables
a.1 - Conductor material
- Armouring/screen
cable
mm
cable
kg
diameter/width
mm/mm
132 KV Voltage Cables
a.2 - Conductor material
- Armouring/screen
cable
mm
cable
kg
diameter/width
mm/mm
Special cables, optical fibre
a.3 - Relevant informative data


SCHEDULE 5a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, EARTHING
EARTHING SYSTEM
ITEM PARTICULARS UNIT GUARANTEED
FIGURE
TOLERANCE

a.1 Resistance to Earth of Earthing
Electrode system

- Under the control building max. ohms Nil

- Under the switchyard max. ohms Nil

- Complete earthing system ohms Nil



SCHEDULE 5b TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, EARTHING
EARTHING SYSTEM
ITEM PARTI CULARS UNIT GUARANTEED
FIGURE
TOLERANCE

b1 - Reference standard

- Material of earth conductor

- Max temp of any earth conductor
during 1 sec. rated phase ground
fault

- Method of interconnecting earth
grid conductors



SCHEDULE 6a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, POWER TRANSFORMERS
HV POWER TRANSFORMER GUARANTEED DATA
ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT 15 MVA

1. Continuous maximum rating on
any tapping when operation under
the ambient conditions specified
in()

With ONAN cooling:
HV winding MVA
LV winding MVA
TV winding MVA

With ONAF cooling:
HV winding MVA
LV winding MVA
TV winding MVA
2. Rated frequency Hz

3. Rated no-load voltage at rated
frequency on:

HV, principal tapping kV
HV, extreme plus tapping kV
HV, extreme plus tapping kV
LV, kV
TV kV

4. Tapping ranges from principal
tapping:

HV, no. of plus tappings -
HV, no of minus tappings -
HV, steps in % of rated voltage %

5. No-load losses at rated voltage and
frequency
kW

6. No-load current at rated voltage
and frequency



7. Load losses at 75
0
C at rated
current, the third winding being
open:

HV LV , ONAN kW -
HV TV, ONAN kW -
LV TV, ONAN kW -
HV - TV , ONAF kW -
HV TV, ONAF kW -
LV TV ONAF kW -

8. Cooling plants power consumption kW

9 Total losses at 75
0
C on principal
tapping and unity power factor and
rated currents:

ONAN kW
ONAF including input to cooling
plant
kW

10. Impedance voltage at 75
0
refereed
to mutual capacities at rated
frequency and 100% rating.

Principal tapping:

HV LV , ONAN % -
HV TV, ONAN % -
LV TV, ONAN % -
HV - TV , ONAF % -
HV TV, ONAF % -
LV TV ONAF % -



Extreme plus tapping

HV LV , ONAN % -
HV TV, ONAN % -
LV TV, ONAN % -
HV - TV , ONAF % -
HV TV, ONAF % -
LV TV ONAF % -

Extreme minus tapping:

HV LV , ONAN % -
HV TV, ONAN % -
LV TV, ONAN % -
HV - TV , ONAF % -
HV TV, ONAF % -
LV TV ONAF % -

11. Temperature rise after continuous
operation with rated MVA, under
the ambient conditions specified
and the rated conditions giving the
highest losses:

Top oil (by thermometer)
0
C
Winding (by resistance)
0
C

12 Efficiency on principal tapping max.
temperature of winding and unity
power factor and TV winding open.

-120% load, ONAN %
-100% load, ONAN %
-50% load, ONAN %
-120% load, ONAF %
-100% load, ONAF %
-50% load, ONAF %



13. Inherent voltage regulation on
principal tapping, 75
0
C and unity
power factor:

- TV winding open %
- 80% of full load on LV
winding and 20% on TV
winding

%

14. Inherent voltage regulation on
principal tapping, 75
0
C and 0.8
factor lagging:

- TV winding open %
- 80% of full load on LV
winding and 20% on TV
winding

%

15. Vector group -

16. No. of phases per transformer -

17 Type of cooling -

18. Whether star connected windings
shall be fully insulated or graded

- HV winding -
- LV winding -

19. Insulation levels of star points

- HV winding kV
- LV winding kV

20. Method of system earthing:

- HV system
- LV system



21. Method of transformer earthing:

- HV windings star point -
- LV windings star point -
- TV winding one corner or
closed delta
-

22. Whether TV windings are to be
brought out to separate bushing
insulators

-

23. Indoor or outdoor installation -

24. System highest voltage according to
IEC:

-HV
-LV
kV
kV

-TV kV

25. Maximum flux density at rated
voltage on principal tapping and
rated frequency:

- Transformer legs T
- Transformer yokes T

26 Maximum flux density at most
onerous voltage and frequency
conditions:

- Transformer legs T
- Transformer yokes T

27. Specific core loss W/kg



28. Maximum current density in
winding at rated output:

HV, higher voltage, ONAN A/mm
2

HV, lower voltage, ONAF A/mm
2

LV, ONAN A/mm
2

LV, ONAF A/mm
2

TV, ONAN A/mm
2

TV, ONAF A/mm
2

29. Magnetising current at rated
nominal voltage on principal
tapping
A

30. Maximum hot spot temperature of
winding
0
C

31. Equivalent resistance referred to HV
side
ohms

32. Equivalent reactance referred to HV
side
ohms

33. Maximum current carrying capacity
of bushings:

HV A
LV A
TV A

34

Rated service voltage of bushing:

HV kV
LV kV
TV kV
HV, neutral kV
LV, neutral kV



35. I minute, 50Hz dry withstand
voltage:

HV bushing kV
LV bushing kV
TV bushing kV
HV, LV neutral bushings kV

36 I minute, 50Hz wet withstand
voltage:

HV bushing kV
LV bushing kV
TV bushing kV
HV, LV neutral bushings kV

37. Impulse withstand voltage:

HV bushing kV
LV bushing kV

38. Maximum noise level

- Transformer and tap
changing equipment
energized and at no-load
with ONAN
dB

- Transformer and tap
changing equipment
energized and at no-load
with ONAF (fan running)
dB


SCHEDULE 6b INFORMATIVE DATA , POWER TRANSFORMERS

1. Type of transformer (core or shell
type)
-

2. Number of core leg -

3. Type of windings:

HV -
LV -
TV -

4. Type of insulation:

HV, winding -
LV, winding -
TV, winding -

Tappings
Tappings connection -
Core bolts (if any) -
Core bolt washers (if any) -
Core lamination designation -
Specific core loss w/cm
3

5. Type of axial coil supports:

HV, winding -
LV, winding -
TV, winding -

6. Winding conductor material

HV -
LV -

7. Type of joints in the magnetic core
(butt type, interleaved etc.)

8. Calculated thermal time constant:

ONAN Hours
ONAF hours



9. Type of bushing:

HV -
LV -
TV -
HV, LV neutral -

10. Principal bushing insulator
material:

HV -
LV -
TV -
HV, LV neutral -

11. Total creepage distance over
porcelain externally:

HV bushing mm
LV bushing mm

12. Protected leakage distance over
porcelain externally (90
0
shadow).

HV bushing mm
LV bushing mm

13. Thickness of transformer tank:

Sides mm
Bottom mm
Top mm

14. Thickness of radiator plates mm

15. Number of radiators per
transformer
-




16. On-load lap changer:

Type (resistor type, reactor type,
etc.) Total number of tappings
including principal rated current of:

- Selector switch A
- Diverter switch
- Resistors
A
A

Maximum overcurrent of:

- Selector switch A
- Diverter switch
- Resistors
A
A

Driving motor input kW

Type of driving motor (3-phase etc) -

Motoring contact:

- Closing time in advance of
parting of diverter switch.
sec
- Opening time after diverter
switch contact have fully
opened
Sec
Diverter switch opening time Sec

Time from point of no return to
parting of diverter switch contact.
sec

17. Whether outdoor cabinets/kiosks
are provided with heaters.
-



18. Forced air cooling system:

State if fans are blowing directly on
radiators
-

Total number of fan units per
transformer
-

Cooling capacity of each complete
cooling system
kW

19 Total oil quantity in completely
filled transformer
kp

20 Total weight of oil in completely
filled transformer
1

21 Total oil quantity in conservator 1

22 Total quantity of oil conservator
between highest and lowest level
1

23 Volume of conservator tank 1

24 Weight of copper in winding kg

25 Weight of core/winding assembly kg

26 Weight of each radiator:

Filled with oil kg
Empty kg

27 Total weight of bushings

HV kg/each
LV kg/each



28. Total weight of complete
transformer erected at site
Tons

29 Weight of transformer as arranged
for transport
tons

30. Filling medium during transport -

31 Overall dimensions of transformer
completely erected at site, including
bushings, radiators

Length mm
Width mm
Height mm

32 Overall dimensions of transformer
arranged for transport:

Length mm
Width mm
Height mm

33 Minimum lift of core/winding
assembly incl. Lifting beam, slings.
Etc. for untanking
mm

34 Rated output per fan unit m
3
/min

35 Speed of fan motors rpm

36 Continuous rating of fan motors Hp

37 Starting current of fan motors A

38 Efficiency of fan motors %

39 Power factor for fan motors at rated
output
%



40 Materials in rating and diagram
plates
-

41 Are on-load tap changing
equipment prepared for fully
automatic operation
-

equipment prepared for local,
remote control (control room) and
supervisory (NCC) operation and
indication
-

equipment prepared for fully
automatic parallel operation with
similar transformers
-

44 Whether first filling of oil is
included
-

45 Whether tap changer cubicle and
wiring cabinet are provided
-

46 Whether winding, and top oil
indicators are provided
-

47 Whether cooling fans are
automatically operated from the
winding temperature indicators
-

48 Whether pressure relief device is to
be fitted
-

49 Whether Buchholz relay is fitted -

50 Whether all internal cabling/wiring
on transformer is supplied to form a
complete self contained unit
-



51 Are the following alarms/trip
signals provided:

Tap changer not operating, alarm -
Tap changer out of step, alarm -
Voltage transformer failure -
Fan failure, alarm -
Oil/gas flow transformers, alarm -
Oil/gas flow transformers, trip -
On load tap changer protective
relay operated, trip
-
Oil gauge low level, alarm -
Tap changer oil gauge level low ,
alarm
-
Tap changer oil gauge level critical,
trip
-
Top oil temp. high, alarm -
Top oil temp. critical, trip -
Winding temp. high, alarm -
Winding temp, critical, trip -

52 Are the following temperature
indicators provided:

HV winding

-

LV or common winding
TV winding

53 Are the following oil level gauges
provided:

- Main conservator tank -
- On-load tap changer
conservator tank
-

54 Tap change indicator provided -

55 Tap change in progress indicator -



56 Tap changer out of step indicator -

57 Potentiometer switch for
remote/supervisory on-load tap
changer position indicator
-

58 Will all the tests specified in the
technical specifications be
adhered to?

If deviations, please state
underneath

59 State all Standards applied
underneath:


SCHEDULE 6b INFORMATIVE DATA, POWER TRANSFORMERS

60 State identity of transformer
manufacturer and all sub-
manufactures including the parts
manufactured below:-

Transformer

Cooling equipment

On-load tap changer

Current transformer

Bushings

Core steel

Oil

Buchholz relay

Breather

Thermometer

Other equipment to be listed by the
Bidder:

-
-
-
-


SCHEDULE 7a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, STATION TRANSFORMER
STATION TRANSFORMER GUARANTEED DATA

ITEM PARTICULARS UNIT 11/0.4kV

1 Continuous Maximum Rating C.M.R kVA

2 Normal voltage between phases at no load

(a) H.V. Volts
(b) L.V. volts

3 Tappings

(a) Plus %
(b) Minus %

4 Performance Data at Sea Level, corrected
at 75%

(a) No load loss at normal primary
voltage
watts
(b) No load loss at 10% primary over
voltage
watts
(c) Load loss at C.M.R watts
(d) Impedance volts at C.M.R. and
normal ratio
%
(e) Regulation at C.M.R. and unity
power factor
%
(f) Regulation at C.M.R. and 0.8
power factor
%
(g) Max temperature rise at C.M.R:
i) Top oil by thermometer
0
C
ii) Average winding by
resistance

iii) Hot Spot corresponding to
(ii)


SCHEDULE 7a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, STATION TRANSFORMER


5 Type of insulation used on winding

(a) H.V.
(b) L.V.

6 Lighting impulse Insulation level of:

(a) H.V. winding kVpk
(b) L.V winding kVpk
(a) Tap change equipment and
connections

i) To earth kVpk
ii) Between contacts kVpk

7 Are test certificate supplied supporting the
level sated in Clause 6
Yes/No

8 Silica gel Breather

(a) Make of unit fitted
(b) Size of Unit


SCHEDULE -7b INFORMATIVE DATA, STATION TRANSFORMER


1 Transformer type (sealed or breathing)

2 Type of windings

HV
LV

3 Type of insulation

HV winding
LV winding

4 Type of tap changer

5 Tap changer designation

6 Type of axial coil supports

HV winding
LV winding

7 Winding conductor material

HV winding
LV winding

8 Core laminations designation -

9 Specific core loss w/cm
3

10 Type of bushings

HV
LV


SCHEDULE -7b INFORMATIVE DATA, STATION TRANSFORMER


11 Bushing insulator material

HV
LV

12 Creepage distance across bushing

HV
LV
Mm
mm

13 Type of cooling system

14 Total oil quantity K

15 Total weight

16 Volume of conservator tank 1

17 Overall dimension

Length
Width

Height

18 State all standards applied underneath:

19 State identity of manufacturer underneath


SCHEDULE -8a GUARANTEED DATA TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
UHF LINK RADIOS
TYPE _____________________________________________________

ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT EMPLOYERS
REQUIREMENT
TENDER VALUE
1 Output power W 1-25

2 Sensitivity (12dB SINAD) V 0.35

3 Frequency Range MHz 403 -420

4 Frequency stability ppm 2

5 Channel spacing Hz 12.5/20/25

6 Channel capacity

7 Signalling standards CCIR. ZVEI and
EEA

8 Mode of operation Simplex/semi-
duplex/duplex

9 Antenna connectors 50

10 Antenna impedance N-female

11 Temperature range
0
C -30 to + 60

12 Voltage (nominal) V
DC
13-2

13 Designed for continuous-duty cycle
operation
Y/N

14 Power consumption @full power W

15 Power consumption, standby mode W

16 Mounting Rack or wall-
mounting
bracket



SCHEDULE -8b GUARANTEED DATA TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
UHF LINK ANTENNA
TYPE _____________________________________________________

ITEM PARTICULAR UNIT EMPLOYERS
REQUIREMENT
TENDER VALUE

1 Antenna type

2 Frequency band (minimum) MHz 400-420

3 Impedance 50

4 Polarisation Vertical or
horizontal

5 Gain dBi >10

6 Front to back ratio db >20

7 Half-power Beam Width, vertical Deg <40

8 Half-power Beam Width, Horizontal Deg <50

9 Bandwidth MHz >10

10 SWR <1.5:1

11 Max. power W 150

12 Connection N-female

13 Mounting On 30-58mm
tube

14 Wind survival rating m/s

15 Wind surface m
2

16 Wind load @40 m/s N

17 Weight kg

18 Dimensions mm


235 SECTION VII: DRAWINGS

SECTION VII: DRAWINGS

SEE ATTACHED DRAWINGS

All other Architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings complete with their details
shall be obtained from the Project Manager through the office of Principal Electrical Engineer
Kenya Ports Authority.

Any clarifications as regards the drawings and detailing should be channelled through the same
office.

No claims shall be entertained out of ignorance or misinterpretation of the drawings by the
contractor.












241 SECTION VIII: BILLS OF QUANTITIES

SECTION VIII: BILLS OF QUANTITIES


PRICE SCHEDULES

ITEM QTY UNIT
COST
(currency
)
UNIT
COST
(KSH)
TOTAL
(KSH)
Country
of
origin
MATERIALS
1 132 kV Takeoff, Kipevu
a 132 KV cable sealing
ends
9
b 132 KV circuit breakers 1
c 132 KV line isolators 2
d 132 KV surge arresters 3
e 132 KV voltage
transformers
3
f 132 KV current
transformers
3
g Substation structures lot
h Foundation and trench
works
lot
i Allow Pc Sum to be used
in clearing KPLC
switchyard of existing
equipment
sum 2,200,000
j Any other item to
complete the installation
(describe)

Total, 132 kV Takeoff,
Kipevu

2 Cable, Kipevu to KPA
(1.5km)

a 3 400mm s/c XLPE
copper cables(or
appropriate cable as
calculated by the
contractor)
1500M
b 48 strand fibre optic
cable
1500M
c Cable terminations lot
d Cable trench including
back-filling and Hatari
tiles
lot
e Any other items(describe)
Total, Cable, Kipevu to
KPA

3 KPLC metering at KPA
a 132 kV Isolator with
Integral earth switch
1
b 132 kV isolator without
earth switch
1
c 132 kV sure arresters 3
d 132 kV line traps 2
e 132 kV current
transformers
3
f 132 kV Voltage
transformers
3
g 132 kV circuit breaker 1


h Switchgear connection
cables including
terminations and
accessories
lot
i Allow PC sum for design
detailing and technical
coordination with KPLC
2,500,000
j Training for 3 KPA
engineers and
technicians

K Any other items
(describe)

l
Total, KPLC Metering at
KPA

ITEM QTY UNIT
COST
(currency)
UNIT
COST
(KSH)
TOTAL
(KSH)
Country
of origin
4 KPA 132 KV yard
a 132 kV isolator with earth
switch
2
b 132 kV isolator without
earth switch
2
c 132 kV circuit breakers 3
d 132 kV current transformers 6
e 132 kV voltage transformers 3
f 132 kV busbars set
g 132 kV surge arresters(tx
protection)
6
h 15MVA 132/11 kV power
transformers
2

i Switchgear connection
cables including
terminations and
accessories
lot
j Any other items (describe)
Total, 132kV at
Switchyard

5 11 KV unit (KPA)
a 2000A 11kV busbars set
b 1500A 11kV circuit
breakers(busbar incomers)
2
c 11kV bus coupler 1
d 630A 11kV circuit
breakers(Feeders)
5
e 1500A 11kV circuit
breaker(substation M feeder)
1
f 11kV voltage
transformer(metering)
2
g 200kVA 11kV/433 V station
transformer
1
h 2 300mm 4c XLPE
copper cables(or
100M


appropriate cable as
calculated by the
contractor) to link to
existing substation M.
i 100 m of 240 sq mm 4- core
cable at 415 volts complete
with changeover panel and
connection for emergency
power from generator at
Substation M to new
subststion
Lot
j Allow PC sum for works in
substation M to
accommodate the incoming
feed
Sum 5,000,000.
k Training for 3 KPA
Technicians and Engineers

l Any other items (describe)
Total 11kV Switchgear

6 Control Panels
a Control panel for 132 kV
switchgear as described in
the technical specifications
lot
b Control panels for 11kV
lot
c Any other items
Total, Control Panels


ITEM QTY UNIT
COST
(currency
)
UNIT
COST
(KSH)
TOTAL
(KSH)
Country
of origin
7 Protection relays
a

Protection relays for 132kV
lot
b Protection relays for the
11kV switchgear as
described in the technical
specifications
lot
c Training for 3 KPA engineers
and technicians

d Any other items
Total, Protective Relays

8 Communication
a Communication equipment
including SCADA system
equipment as described in
lot
b Allow PC sum for
interconnection to existing
SCADA, including necessary
interface and rehabilitation
25,000,000.00
c Training for 2 KPA engineers
Total Communication

9 All the necessary substation
steel structures, including
lightning protection and
communication towers
lot



10 CIVIL WORKS AND
PERMITS

a All civil works, including
substation building,
Structural foundations,
cable channels, roads,
fencing, lighting

lot
b Allow PC sum for permits
and licensing from
Municipal and other
statutory authorities
including NEMA
3,000,000.00
c Allow PC sum for clerk of
works, and transport for
resident engineer
2,800,000
Total civil works
11 All the necessary cables
including control and
communication cables
lot
Total Cables


ITEM QTY UNIT
COST
(currency
)
UNIT
COST
(KSH)
TOTAL
(KSH)
Country
of
origin
Spares
12 Spares for 11 KV
switchgear

i 630A feeder circuit breakers 2
ii 1500A incoming circuit
breaker
1
iii Circuit breaker charging
motors
2
iv Circuit breaker closing coils 3
v Circuit breaker tripping coils 3
vi Circuit breaker interlocking
coils
2
vii Earth switch interlocking
coils
2
viii Indicating lamps(each type) 10
ix Auxiliary relays (each type) 2
x Protection relays (each type) 2
xi MCBs of each type 4
xii Power measurement units 2
xiii Energy meter 2
xiv VT fuses (3 for primary & 3
for secondary side)
6

13 Spares for 132KV
switchgear

i 132 KV circuit
breaker(complete unit)
1
ii 132 KV voltage transformer
(single phase unit)
3
iii 132 KV current transformer
(single phase units)
3
iv 132 KV line isolator with
earth switch
1
v 132 KV line isolator without
earth switch
1
vi OTHER SPARES
NECESSARY

vii
viii
ix
x


SUMMARY
ITEM TOTAL
(currency
)
TOTAL
(KSH)
Country of
origin
1 132 kV Takeoff, Kipevu
2 Cable, Kipevu to KPA
(1.5km)

3 KPLC metering at KPA
4 KPA 132 kV yard
5 11 kV unit (KPA)
6 Total, Control Panels
7 Total, Protective Relays
8 Total Communication
9 Substation steel structures
10 Total civil works
11 Total Cables
12 Spares for 11 kV
switchgear

13 Spares for 132kV
switchgear

14 Allow 10% contingency to
be used at the discretion
of the Engineer

Total carried forward to
Form of Tender

Authorized Official: ____________________________ ______________________
Name Signature

Date____________________


249 SECTION IX: TENDER FORMS

SECTION IX: TENDER FORMS


A. Form of Tender
[date]

To: [name and address of Procuring Entity]

To: Sir/Madam:
Having examined the Tender documents including Addenda Nos. [insert addenda numbers], the
receipt of which is hereby duly acknowledged, we, the undersigned, offer to supply,
UPGRADING OF INCOMING POWER FROM 11KV TO 132KV -
SUPPLY, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING OF 132KV/11KV SUBSTATION AND
ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

in conformity with the said Tender documents for the sum of

______________________________________________[total Tender amount in words and figures] or such
other sums as may be ascertained in accordance with the Schedule of Prices attached herewith and
made part of this Tender.

We undertake, if our Tender is accepted, to Execute the works in accordance with the delivery
schedule specified in the Schedule of Requirements.

If our Tender is accepted, we undertake to provide a performance security in the form, in the
amounts, and within the times specified in the Tender documents.

We agree to abide by this Tender for the Tender validity period specified in Clause 18.1 of the Tender
Data Sheet, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the
expiration of that period.

We are not participating, as Tenderers, in more than one Tender in this Tendering process.

Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries including any subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the
contract has not been declared ineligible by the Government of Kenya under Kenyan laws.

Until a formal Contract is prepared and executed, this Tender, together with your written acceptance
thereof and your notification of award, shall constitute a binding Contract between us.

We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender you may receive.

We certify/confirm that we comply with the eligibility requirements as per ITT Clause 3 of the Tender
documents

Dated this ________________ day of ________________ 20______.

(Name)

_________________ __________________________
[Signature] [In the capacity of

Duly authorized to sign Tender for and on behalf of ______________________________

Authorized Signature:

Name and Title of Signatory:

Name of Tenderer:

Address:



Appendix to Tender

Schedule of Adjustment Data

[In Tables A, B, and C, below, the Tenderer shall (a) indicate its amount of local currency
payment, (b) indicate its proposed source and base values of indices for the different foreign
currency elements of cost, (c) derive its proposed weightings for local and foreign currency
payment, and (d) list the exchange rates used in the currency conversion.
Table A. Local Currency
Index
code
Index
descriptio
n
Source
of index
Base
value
and
date
Tenderer
s related
currency
amount
Range of
weighting
Proposed by the
Procuring
Entity
Tenderers
proposed
weighting
Nonadju-
stable

a: *

b: ------ to --------
*

c: ------- to -------
*

d: ------- to -------
*

e: ------- to -------
*

etc.
a: *

b:

c:

d:

e:

etc.
Total 1.00


Table B. Foreign Currency
State type: ....................... [If the Tenderer wishes to quote in more than one foreign
currency, this table should be repeated for each foreign currency.]

Index
code
Index
description
Source of
index
Base
value
and
date
Tenderers
related
source
currency
in type/
amount
Equivale
nt in
Foreign
Currency
1
Range of
weighting
Proposed by
the
Procuring
Entity
Tenderers
proposed
weighting
Non adju-
stable

a: *

b: ------ to --
------*

c: ------- to -
------*

d: ------- to -
------*

e: ------- to -
------*

etc.
a:

*

b:

c:

d:

e:

etc.

Total 1.00

Table C. Summary of Payment Currencies

For ..[insert name of Section of the Works]

[Separate tables may be required if the various sections of the Works (or of the Bill of
Quantities) will have substantially different foreign and local currency requirements. The
Procuring Entity should insert the names of each Section of the Works.]

Name of payment
currency
A
Amount
of
currency
B
Rate of
exchange
(local currency
per unit of
foreign)
C
Local currency
equivalent
C = A x B
D
Percentage of
Net Tender Price
(NBP)
100xC
NBP
Local currency

1.00

Foreign currency
#1

Foreign currency
#2


Foreign currency
#

Net Tender Price

100.00
Provisional sums
expressed in local
currency

*

*

*

TENDER PRICE



Name of Tenderer:

Address:


B. Tender-Securing Declaration (Mandatory)

Date: [insert date (as day, month and year)]

Tender No.: [insert number of Tendering process]

To: [insert complete name of Procuring Entity]
We, the undersigned, declare that:
We understand that, according to your conditions, Tenders must be supported by a Tender-
Securing Declaration.
We accept that we will automatically be suspended from being eligible for Tendering in any
contract with the Procuring Entity for the period of time of [insert number of months or
years] starting on [insert date], if we are in breach of our obligation(s) under the Tender
conditions, because we;
a) Have withdrawn our Tender during the period of Tender validity specified in the
Form of Tender; or
b) Having been notified of the acceptance of our Tender by the Procuring Entity during
the period of Tender validity,
(i). Fail or refuse to execute the Contract, if required, or
(ii). Fail or refuse to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with the
ITT.
We understand this Tender Securing Declaration shall expire if we are not the successful
Tenderer, upon the earlier of;
1) Our receipt of your notification to us of the name of the successful Tenderer; or
2) Thirty days after the expiration of our Tender.
Signed: [insert signature of person whose name and capacity are shown] In the capacity of
[insert legal capacity of person signing the Tender Securing Declaration]
Name: [insert complete name of person signing the Tender Securing Declaration]
Duly authorized to sign the Tender for and on behalf of: [insert complete name of
Tenderer]
Dated on ____________ day of __________________, _______ [insert date of signing]

Corporate Seal (where appropriate)


C. Confidential Business Questionnaire

1 Individual
Tenderer or
Individual
Members of
joint Ventures
1.1 Constitution or legal status of Tenderer: [attach copy]

Place of registration: [insert]

Principal place of business: [insert]

Power of attorney of signatory of Tender: [attach]

Registration certificate [attach] current Business License
[attach]

1.2 Total annual volume of construction work performed in
two years, in Kenyan shillings /USD as specified in the
Tender Data Sheet; [insert]
Similar works
1.3 Work performed as prime Contractor on works of a
similar nature and volume over the last two years or as
specified in the Tender Data Sheet in Kenyan Shillings.
Also list details of work under way or committed,
including expected completion dates.

Project
name and
country
Name of
client and
contact
person
Contractors
Participation
Type of work
performed and
year of completion
Value of
contract
(a)
(b)

1.4 Major items of Contractors Equipment proposed for
carrying out the works. List all information requested
below. Refer also to sub-Clause 12.3 of the Instructions
to Tenderers.

Item of equipment Description, make,
and age (years)
Condition (new,
good, Poor) and
number available
Owned, leased
(from whom?) or
to be purchased
(from whom?)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Qualification
and experience
of key
personnel
1.5 Qualifications and experience of key personnel proposed for
administration and execution of the Contract. Attach
biographical data. Refer also to sub-Clause 12.3 of the
Instructions to Tenderers and Sub- Clause 10.1 of the
General Conditions of Contract.


Position Name Years of
Experience
(general)
Years of experience
in proposed
position
(a)

(b)

Use format of CV attached
1.6 Proposed sub-contractor and firms involved. Refer to
Clause 7 of General Conditions of Contract.

Sections of the
Works
Value of
subcontract
Subcontractor
(name and address)
Experience in
similar work
(a)

(b)

1.7 Financial reports for the number of years specified in the
Tender Data Sheet.

1.8 Evidence of access to financial resources to meet the
qualification requirements: cash in hand, lines of credit,
etc. List below and attach copies of support documents.

1.9 Name, address, and telephone, e-mail address, and
facsimile numbers of banks that may provide references if
contracted by the Procuring Entity.

Litigation
History
1.10 Information on current litigation in which the Tenderer is
involved.

Other party(ies) Cause of dispute Amount involved
(a)
(b)

1.11 Statement of compliance with the requirements of
sub-Clause 3.2 of the Instructions to Tenderers.

1.12 Proposed Program (work method and schedule).
Descriptions, drawings, and charts, as necessary, to
comply with the requirements of the Tendering
documents.

2. Joint
Ventures
2.1 The information listed in 1.1 1.11 above shall be
provided for each partner of the joint venture.

2.2 The information in 1.12 above shall be provided for
the joint venture.

2.3 Attach the power of attorney of the signatory (ies) of


the Tender authorizing signature of the Tender on
behalf of the joint venture.

2.4 Attach the Agreement among all partners of the joint
venture (and which is legally binding on all
partners), which shows that:

(a) all partners shall be jointly and severally
liable for the execution of the Contract in
accordance with the Contract terms;

(b) one of the partners will be nominated as
being in charge, authorized to incur
liabilities, and receive instructions for and
on behalf of any and all partners of the joint
venture; and

(c) the execution of the entire Contract,
including payment, shall be done exclusively
with the partner in charge.

3. Additional
Requirements
3.1 Tenderers should provide any additional information
required in the Tender Data Sheet or to fulfil the
requirements of sub-Clauses 12.1 of the Instructions
to Tenderers, if applicable.
We, the undersigned declare that
(a) The information contained in and attached to
this form is true and accurate as of the date of
Tender submission


Name of Tenderer:

Address:

Company Stamp / seal ____________________________


Integrity Declaration
UNDERTAKING BY TENDERER ON ANTI BRIBERY POLICY / CODE OF
CONDUCT AND COMPLIANCE PROGRAMME
1. Each Tenderer must submit a statement, as part of the Tender documents, in either of
the two given formats which must be signed personally by the Chief Executive Officer or
other appropriate senior corporate officer of the Tendering company and, where
relevant, of its subsidiary in the Kenya. If a Tender is submitted by a subsidiary, a
statement to this effect will also be required of the parent company, signed by its Chief
Executive Officer or other appropriate senior corporate officer.
2. Tenderers will also be required to submit similar No-bribery commitments from their
subcontractors and consortium partners; the Tenderer may cover the subcontractors
and consortium partners in its own statement, provided the Tenderer assumes full
responsibility.
3.
a) Payment to agents and other third parties shall be limited to appropriate
compensation for legitimate services.
b) Each Tenderer will make full disclosure in the Tender documentation of the
beneficiaries and amounts of all payments made, or intended to be made, to
agents or other third parties (including political parties or electoral candidates)
relating to the Tender and, if successful, the implementation of the contract.
c) The successful Tenderer will also make full disclosure [quarterly or semi-
annually] of all payments to agents and other third parties during the execution
of the contract.
d) Within six months of the completion of the performance of the contract, the
successful Tenderer will formally certify that no bribes or other illicit commissions
have been paid. The final accounting shall include brief details of the goods and
services provided that they are sufficient to establish the legitimacy of the
payments made.
e) Statements required according to subparagraphs (b) and (d) of this paragraph will
have to be certified by the company's Chief Executive Officer, or other appropriate
senior corporate officer.
4. Tenders which do not conform to these requirements shall not be considered.
5. If the successful Tenderer fails to comply with its No-bribery commitment, significant
sanctions will apply. The sanctions may include all or any of the following:
a) Cancellation of the contract;
b) Liability for damages to the public authority and/or the unsuccessful
competitors in the Tendering possibly in the form of a lump sum representing a
pre-set percentage of the contract value (liquidated).
6. Tenderers shall make available, as part of their Tender, copies of their anti-Bribery
Policy/Code of Conduct, if any, and of their-general or project - specific - Compliance
Program.
7. The Government of Kenya has made special arrangements for adequate oversight of the
procurement process and the execution of the contract, and has invited civil society and
other competent Government Departments to participate in the oversight. Those
charged with the oversight responsibility will have full access to all documentation
submitted by Tenderers for this contract, and to which in turn all Tenderers and other
parties involved or affected by the project shall have full access (provided, however, that
no proprietary information concerning a Tenderer may be disclosed to another Tenderer
or to the public).


ANTI-CORRUPTION DECLARATION COMITTMENT/ PLEDGE

(Sections39, 40,41,42,43 & of the PPD Act, 2005)

I/We/Messrs.

of Street, Building, P O Box

..

Contact/Phone/E mail..

declare that Public Procurement is based on a free and fair competitive Tendering
process which should not be open to abuse.

I/We ....

declare that I/We will not offer or facilitate, directly or indirectly, any inducement
or reward to any public officer, their relations or business associates, in connection
with

Tender/Tender No ...

for or in the subsequent performance of the contract if I/We am/are successful.

Authorized
Signature................................................................................................

Name and Title of Signatory


D. Letter of Acceptance

[Letter head paper of the Procuring Entity]

[date]

To: [name and address of the Contractor]

This is to notify you that your Tender dated [date] for execution of the [name of the
Contract and identification number, as given in the Contract Data Sheet] for the
Contract Price of the equivalent of [amount in numbers and works] [name of
currency], as corrected and modified in accordance with the Instructions to
Tenderers is hereby accepted by us.

We confirm that [insert name proposed by the procuring entity] to be the
Adjudicator.

We accept that [name proposed by Tenderer] be appointed as Adjudicator.

Or

We do not accept that [name proposed by Tenderer] be appointed as adjudicator,
and by sending a copy of this letter of acceptance to [insert the name of the
Appointing Authority], we are hereby requesting [name], the Appointing Authority,
to appoint the adjudicator in accordance with Clause 44.1 of the Instructions to
Tenderers.

You are hereby instructed to proceed with the execution of the said works in
accordance with the Contract documents.

Please return the contract dully signed.


Name of Agency:

Attachment: Form of Contract


E. Contract Data Sheet

This Agreement, made the [day] day of [month], 2011] between [The Kenya Ports
Authority] (hereinafter called the Procuring Entity) and [name and address of
Contractor] (hereinafter called the Contractor) of the other part.

Whereas the Procuring Entity is desirous that the Contractor execute [Upgrade of
Incoming Power from 11kV to 132kV] (hereinafter called the Works) with the
objectives of [insert functional objectives of the works] and the Procuring Entity has
accepted the Tender by the Contractor for the execution and completion of such
works and the remedying of any defects therein in the sum of [contract price in
words and figures] (hereinafter called Contract Price).

NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSES AS FOLLOWS:

1. In this Agreement, words and expressions shall have the same meanings as
are respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter
referred to, and they shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as
pert of this Agreement;

2. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Procuring Entity to the
Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with
the Procuring Entity to execute and complete the Works and remedy any
defects therein in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the
Contract;

3. The Procuring Entity hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in
consideration of the execution and completion of the Works and the
remedying of defects wherein the Contract Price or such other sum as may
become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the
manner prescribed by the Contract.

In Witness whereof the parties thereto have caused this Agreement to be executed
the day and year first before written.

The Common Seal of

Was hereunto affixed in the presence of:
Signed, Sealed, and Delivered by the said

In the presence of:

Tendering Signature of Procuring Entity

Binding Signature of Contractor



MANUFACTURERS AUTHORIZATION FORM

To

[Name of the Procuring entity] .

WHEREAS [ name of the
manufacturer] who are established and reputable manufacturers of ..
[Name and/or description of the goods] having factories at
[Address of factory] do hereby authorize [name and address of
Agent] to submit a tender, and subsequently negotiate and sign the Contract with you
against tender No. . [Reference of the Tender] for the above goods
manufactured by us.

We hereby extend our full guarantee and warranty as per the General Conditions of
Contract for the goods offered for supply by the above firm against this Invitation for
Tenders.

___________________________________________
[Signature for and on behalf of manufacturer]

Date:_______________________

Note: This letter of authority should be on the letterhead of the Manufacturer and
should be signed by an authorized person.


263 FORMAT OF CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL STAFF

FORMAT OF CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL
STAFF

1. Proposed Position [only one candidate shall be nominated for each position]:

2. Name of Staff member [insert full name]:

3. Date of Birth: Nationality:

4. Education [indicate college/university and other specialized education of expert, giving names of
institutions, degrees obtained, and dates of obtainment]:

5. Membership in Professional Associations:

6. Other Trainings [indicate significant training since degrees under 5 - Education were obtained]:

7. Countries of Work Experience: [list countries where expert has worked in the last ten years]:

8. Languages [For each language indicate proficiency: good, fair, or poor in speaking, reading, and
writing]:

9. Employment Record [Starting with present position, list in reverse order every employment held by
expert since graduation, giving for each employment (see format here below): dates of employment, name
of employing organization, positions held.]:

From [Year]: To [Year]:
Employer:
Positions held:


264 FORMAT OF CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL STAFF

10.Detailed Tasks Assigned

[List all tasks to be performed
under this assignment]
11.Work Undertaken that Best Illustrates
Capability to Handle the Tasks Assigned

[Among the assignments in which the expert has been involved,
indicate the following information for those assignments that best
illustrate the experts capability to handle the tasks listed in line 11.]

Name of assignment or project:
Year:
Location:
Client:
Main project features:
Positions held:
Activities performed:

12. Certification:
I, the undersigned, certify to the best of my knowledge and belief that
(i) this CV correctly describes my qualifications and my experience;
(ii) In the absence of medical incapacity, I will undertake this assignment for the duration
and in terms of the inputs specified for me in the Personnel Schedule in Form provided
team mobilization takes place within the validity of this proposal or any agreed
extension thereof;
(iii) I am committed to undertake the assignment within the validity of Proposal;
(iv) I am not part of the team who wrote the terms of reference for this consulting services
assignment;

I understand that any willful misstatement described herein may lead to my disqualification
or dismissal, if engaged.
Date:
[Signature of expert or authorized representative of the firm]
1
Day/Month/Year

Full name of authorized representative:

1 This CV can be signed by an authorized representative of the Consultant provided that if the Consultants proposal
is ranked first, a copy of the CV signed by the expert and/or specialist must be submitted to the Client prior to the
commencement of contract negotiations
IMPORTANT NOTE: Attach certified copies of academic certificate and Professional
membership certificates


265 SECTION X: FORMS OF SECURITY

SECTION X: FORMS OF SECURITY

Page 266
A. Tender Security Guarantee
(MANDATORY)

[the Bank shall fill in this Guarantee form in accordance with the instructions
indicated in brackets.]
[insert banks or insurance companys name, and address of issuing branch or office]
Beneficiary: [insert name and address of Procuring Entity]
Date: [insert date]
TENDER GUARANTEE No.: [insert number]
We have been informed that [insert name of the Tenderer; if a joint venture, list
complete legal names of partners] (hereinafter called "the Tenderer") has submitted to
you its Tender dated [insert date] (hereinafter called "the Tender") for the execution of
[insert name of Contract] under Invitation for Tenders No. [insert IFT number] (the
IFT).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to your conditions, Tenders must be
supported by a Tender Guarantee.
At the request of the Tenderer, we [insert name of bank or insurance company] hereby
irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount
of [insert amount in figures expressed in the currency of the Purchasers Country or
the equivalent amount in an international freely convertible currency] ([insert amount
in words]) upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a
written statement stating that the Tenderer is in breach of its obligation(s) under the
Tender conditions, because the Tenderer;
a) Has withdrawn its Tender during the period of Tender validity
specified by the Tenderer in the Form of Tender; or
b) Does not accept the correction of errors in accordance with the
Instructions to Tenderers (hereinafter the ITT) of the IFT; or
c) Having been notified of the acceptance of its Tender by the Procuring
Entity during the period of Tender validity;
(i). Fails or refuses to execute the Contract Form, if required, or
(ii). Fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in
accordance with the ITT.
This Guarantee shall expire;
a) If the Tenderer is the successful Tenderer, upon our receipt of copies
of the Contract signed by the Tenderer and of the Performance
Security issued to you by the Tenderer; or
b) If the Tenderer is not the successful Tenderer, upon the earlier of;
(i) Our receipt of a copy of your notification to the Tenderer that
the Tenderer was unsuccessful, or
(ii) Thirty days after the expiration of the Tenderers Tender.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this Guarantee must be received by
us at the office on or before that date.
_____________________________
[signature(s) of authorized representative(s) ]

Page 267

B. Performance Bank Guarantee [Unconditional]

[The Bank or Insurance providing the Guarantee shall fill in this form in
accordance with the instructions indicated in brackets, if the Procuring Entity
requires this type of security.]
[insert banks or insurance companys name, and address of issuing branch or office]

Beneficiary: [insert name and address of Procuring Entity]

Date: [insert date]

PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE No.: [insert Performance Guarantee number]
We have been informed that [insert name of Contractor] (hereinafter called "the
Contractor") has entered into Contract No. [insert reference number of the Contract]
dated with you, for the execution of [insert name of Contract and brief description of
Works] (hereinafter called "the Contract").

Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a
Performance Guarantee is required.

At the request of the Contractor, we [insert name of Bank or Insurance Company]
hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an
amount of [insert amount in figures] ([insert amount in words]), such sum being
payable in the types and proportions of currencies in which the Contract Price is
payable, upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a
written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation(s) under
the Contract, without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or
the sum specified therein.

We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor
before presenting us with the demand.

We further agree that no change, addition or other modification of the terms of the
Contract or of the Works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract
documents which may be made between you and the Contractor shall in any way
release us from any liability under this Guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of
any change, addition, or modification.

This guarantee shall expire not later than thirty days from the date of issuance of
the Taking-Over Certificate.

[signature(s) of an authorized representative(s) of the Bank or Insurance Company]

Page 268
C. Bank Guarantee for Advance Payment

[Banks Name and Address of Issuing Branch or Office]

Beneficiary: ___________________ [Name and Address of Procuring Entity]

Date: ________________

ADVANCE PAYMENT GUARANTEE No.: _________________

We have been informed that [name of Contractor] (hereinafter called "the
Contractor") has entered into Contract No. [reference number of the contract] dated
______ with you, for the execution of [name of contract and brief description of Works]
(hereinafter called "the Contract").

Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, an
advance payment in the sum [amount in figures] ( ) [amount in words] is to be
made against an advance payment guarantee.

At the request of the Contractor, we [name of Bank or Insurance Company] hereby
irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount
of [amount in figures] ( ) [amount in words] upon receipt by us of your
first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the
Contractor is in breach of its obligation under the Contract because the Contractor
used the advance payment for purposes other than the costs of mobilization in
respect of the Works.

We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of
the Contract or of the Works to be performed thereunder or of any of the Contract
documents which may be made between ________________________[name of Procuring
Entity] and the Contractor, shall in any way release us from any liability under this
guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification.

No drawing may be made by you under this guarantee until we have received notice
in writing from you that an advance payment of the amount listed above has been
paid to the Contractor pursuant to the Contract.

The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the
amount of the advance payment repaid by the Contractor as indicated in copies of
interim statements or payment certificates which shall be presented to us. This
guarantee shall expire, at the latest, upon our receipt of a copy of the interim
payment certificate indicating that eighty (80) percent of the Contract Price has been
certified for payment, or on the ___ day of _____, 2___, whichever is earlier.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by
us at this office on or before that date.

Yours truly,
Signature and seal:
Name of Bank or Insurance Company:
Address:
Date:

Page 269
269 SECTION XI: APPLICATION TO PUBLIC PROCUREMENT ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW
BOARD

SECTION XI: APPLICATION TO PUBLIC PROCUREMENT
ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD

Page 270
270 SECTION XI: APPLICATION TO PUBLIC PROCUREMENT ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW
BOARD
FORM RB 1
REPUBLIC OF KENYA
PUBLIC PROCUREMENT ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD
APPLICATION NO.OF..20...
BETWEEN
.APPLICANT
AND

RESPONDENT (Procuring Entity)

quest for review of the decision of the (Name of the Procuring Entity) of
dated theday of .20.in the matter of Tender
No..of ..20
REQUEST FOR REVIEW
I/We,the above named Applicant(s), of address: Physical
address.Fax NoTel. No..Email , hereby request the
Public Procurement Administrative Review Board to review the whole/part of the
above mentioned decision on the following grounds , namely:-
1.
2.
etc.
By this memorandum, the Applicant requests the Board for an order/orders that: -
1.
2.
etc
SIGNED . (Applicant)
Dated on.day of /20

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Lodged with the Secretary Public Procurement Administrative Review Board on
day of ....20.

SIGNED
Board Secretary

Standard Tender Document

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Standard Tender Document

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

KENYA PORTS AUTHORITY

TENDER NO. KPA/169/2010-11/EE

Você também pode gostar